Lexus GS430, GS300 User manual

Lexus GS430, GS300 User manual
FOREWORD
Congratulations on your selection of this Lexus. In Lexus vehicles we have invested all our engineering and design resources; all
the know−how we have gained in over 60 years of making automobiles; the highest motivation of our most talented employees; and
our tradition of incessant striving toward ever greater quality.
This Owner’s Manual explains the features of your new Lexus. Please read it and follow the instructions carefully so that
you can enjoy many years of safe motoring.
When it comes to service, remember that your Lexus dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your complete
satisfaction. Your Lexus dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.
If there is not a Lexus dealer near you, please call the following number:
U.S. OWNERS
If you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:
D When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:
Lexus Roadside Assistance
Toll−free: 1−800−25−LEXUS or 1−800−255−3987
D HAWAII:
Servco Automotive Roadside Assistance/Customer Services
Toll−free: 1−800−25−LEXUS or 1−800−255−3987
CANADIAN OWNERS
D When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:
Lexus Roadside Assistance/Customer Service
Toll−free: 1−800−26−LEXUS or 1−800−265−3987
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.
All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual
product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find
some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
Please access our websites for further information.
D The U.S. mainland www.lexus.com
D Hawaii
www.servcolexus.com
D Canada
www.lexus.ca
i
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
YOUR LEXUS
Occupant restraint systems
Lexus encourages you and your family to take the time to read
Section 1−6 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. In terms of
helping you understand how you can receive the maximum
benefit of the occupant restraint systems this vehicle provides,
Section 1−6 of this Owner’s Manual is the most important
section for you and your family to read.
Section 1−6 describes the function and operation concerning
seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint systems of
this vehicle and some potential hazards you should be aware
of. These systems work together along with the overall
structure of this vehicle in order to provide occupant restraint
in the event of a crash. The effect of each system is enhanced
when it is used properly and together with other systems. No
single occupant restraint system can, by itself, provide you or
your family with the equal level of restraint which these
systems can provide when used together. That is why it is
important for you and your family to understand the purpose
and proper use of each of these systems and how they relate
to each other.
The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help reduce
the possibility of death or serious injury in the event of a
collision. None of these systems, either individually or
together, can ensure that there is no injury in the event of
collision. However, the more you know about these systems
and how to use them properly, the greater your chances
become of surviving an accident without death or serious
injury.
Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of the
vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wear seat
belts properly at all times. Children should always be secured
in child restraint systems that are appropriate for their age and
size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are, as
their names imply, designed to work with, and be supplemental
to, seat belts and are not substitutes for them. SRS airbags
can be very effective in reducing the risk of head, chest and
knee injuries by preventing contact of the head, chest and knee
with interior portions of the vehicle.
In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy with
tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS airbags
makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sources of
serious injury if an occupant is too close to an airbag, or if an
object or some part of his or her body has been placed between
the occupant and the airbag at the time of deployment. This
is just one example of how the instructions in Section 1−6 of
this Owner’s Manual will help ensure proper use of the
occupant restraint systems, and increase the safety they can
provide to you and your family in the event of an accident.
Lexus recommends you to read the provisions in Section 1−6
carefully and refer to them as needed during your time of
ownership of this vehicle.
ii
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
Event data recorder
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain
aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and
maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Besides storing
data useful for troubleshooting, there is a system to record data
in a crash or a near car crash event. This is called an Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a
crash or a near car crash event, this device may record some
or all of the following information:
Engine speed
Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
If your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability control (VSC)
system, its Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may contain another
EDR. There are a variety of driving situations which include
activating the VSC under which the VSC EDR will record
certain information. The VSC EDR may record some or all of
the following information:
Behavior of the vehicle
Steering wheel angle
Vehicle speed
To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
To what extent the brake pedal was applied
Vehicle speed
To what extent the ECU controlled the condition of the 4
wheels
To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data
Position of the transmission selector lever
Whether the driver and front passenger wore the seat belts
or not
Driver’s seat position
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose
of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data
recorders, the EDR does not record sound data such as
conversation between passengers.
Front passenger’s occupant classification
SRS airbag deployment data
SRS airbag system diagnostic data
iii
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third
party except when:
An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing
company for a leased vehicle) is obtained
Officially requested by the police or other authorities
Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit
Ordered by the court
However, if necessary Lexus will:
Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety
performance
Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes
without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only
when it is deemed necessary
Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification
information to a non−Lexus organization for research
purposes
New vehicle warranty
Your new vehicle is covered by the following Lexus limited
warranties:
New vehicle warranty
Emission control systems warranty
Others
For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s Guide”,
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.
iv
Your responsibility for maintenance
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified
maintenance is performed. Section 5 of this Owner’s Manual
gives details of these maintenance requirements. Included in
Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduled
maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.
Important health and safety information about
your Lexus
CAUTION
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and a wide variety of automobile components
contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects and
other reproductive harm. In addition, oils, fuels and
fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste
produced by component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands
after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals
that have caused cancer in laboratory animals.
Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
Accessories, spare parts and modification of
your Lexus
A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessories for
Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You
should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and
is not responsible for their performance, repair, or
replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse
effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuine Lexus
products. Modification with non−genuine Lexus products
could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even
violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting from the modification may not
be covered under warranty.
Spark ignition system of your Lexus
The spark ignition system in your Lexus meets all
requirements of the Canadian Interference−Causing
Equipment Standard.
Installation of a mobile two−way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system in your
vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport
fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system,
cruise control system, dynamic radar cruise control system,
anti−lock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat belt
pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer
for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding
installation.
Smart access system with push−button start
Users of any electrical medical devices such as implanted
pacemakers should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the
operation of such medical devices. For details, see “Keys” on
page 8 and “Smart access system with push−button start” on
page 11.
Tires and loading on your Lexus
Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and the
excess load may result in the deterioration of steering
ability and braking ability, leading to an accident. Check
the tire inflation pressure periodically and be sure to
keep the load limits given in this Owner’s Manual. For
details about tire inflation pressure and load limits, see
page 548 and 462.
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your
Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped
with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are,
this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the
systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed
and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus
dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
v
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
Leak detection pump
This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. This
check is done several hours after the engine is turned off. So
you may hear sound coming from underneath the luggage
compartment for several minutes. It does not indicate a
malfunction.
vi
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
The contents of this manual are explained briefly on this
page to help you make the best use of the manual. Please
read this page and the rest of the Owner’s Manual
carefully to make sure you fully understand the operation
of your vehicle.
SECTION 2 − AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
The features of the vehicle’s air conditioning and audio are
explained in detail. Be sure to read this section so that you can
make full use of them.
SECTION 3 − STARTING AND DRIVING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Starting the engine, driving, stopping, operation of features
affecting vehicle handling, hints on vehicle safety and safe
driving techniques are all explained. Please read everything
in this section, and remember − drive safely!
The table of contents and the pictorial index provide easy
reference to the appropriate pages.
SECTION 4 − IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
This will help you enjoy safe and comfortable driving.
Operation of basic equipment is briefly explained in an easily
understandable way for quick reference.
This section explains what to do in the event of an urgent
situation such as the engine not starting or getting a flat tire,
etc. If such a problem occurs, check the contents of this
Owner’s Manual and follow the instructions given.
SECTION 1 − INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
SECTION 5 − MAINTENANCE
The vehicle’s equipment is divided into the 8 groups listed
below. Use of the equipment is explained, including any points
you should pay particular attention to.
This section explains the importance of regular maintenance.
Regular and periodic inspection and maintenance of your
Lexus will help to keep your vehicle in its best condition.
BASIC OPERATION − QUICK REFERENCE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Keys and doors
Switches
Gauges, meters and service reminder indicators
Interior equipment
Exterior equipment
Occupant restraint systems
Steering wheel and mirrors
Touch screen
SECTION 6 − SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Simple maintenance procedure and service data are provided
here for your reference should you wish to perform inspection
and maintenance yourself.
vii
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INDEX
Safety and vehicle damage warnings
The page number is listed for each item in the Owner’s Manual
so that you can rapidly find the item and page you are
searching for.
In this manual you will see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings.
These are used in the following ways:
GAS STATION INFORMATION
The information you need to know for appropriate servicing at
the gas station is provided here.
QUICK INDEX
This is designed so that you can quickly find the needed
information when an urgent situation arises.
Safety symbol
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause
injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are
informed about what you must or must not do in order
to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause
damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to
your Lexus and its equipment.
Your Lexus Owner ’s Manual provides you with a
considerable amount of information. To use this
information most effectively, please take the time to
familiarize yourself with the contents and use of the
manual.
In this manual, you will also see a circle with a slash through
it. This means ”Do not”, ”Do not do this”, or ”Do not let this
happen”.
viii
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Fuel selection:
Premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91
(Research Octane Number 96) or higher required for
optimum engine performance. However, if such premium
type cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline
with an Octane Rating as low as 87 (Research Octane
Number 91).
Fuel tank capacity:
71 L (18.7 gal., 15.6 lmp.gal.)
Engine oil:
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil.
Recommend oil viscosity − SAE 5W−30 if normal
temperatures are below 38C (100F)
Oil capacity: L (qt., lmp.qt.)
Drain and refill
with filter
without filter
GS430
5.1 (5.4, 4.5)
4.5 (4.8, 4.0)
GS300 (2WD)
6.3 (6.6, 5.5)
5.9 (6.2, 5.1)
GS300 (4WD)
6.4 (6.7, 5.6)
6.0 (6.3, 5.2)
See page 530 for detailed information.
Engine coolant:
Capacity: GS430 − 10.1 L (10.7 qt., 8.9 lmp.qt.)
GS300 − 9.1 L (9.6 qt., 8.0 lmp.qt.)
Coolant type − ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar
high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate, non−amine,
non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid
organic acid technology (Coolant with long−life hybrid
organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates
and organic acids.)
Do not use plain water alone.
For checking the engine coolant, see page 534.
Automatic transmission:
Fluid type − “Toyota Genuine ATF Type WS”
See page 540 or 544 for detailed information.
Tire information:
See page 548 through 570 for detailed information.
Tire inflation pressure:
Tire size: GS430 − 245/40R18 93Y or P245/40R18 93V
GS300 − 225/50R17 94W or P225/50R17 93V
Tire inflation pressure:
Front 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi)
Rear 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi)
For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add the
tire inflation pressure given below to the front tires and rear
tires, but never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation
pressure molded on the tire sidewall.
GS430
GS300
60 kPa (0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar, 9 psi)
50 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm2 or bar, 7 psi)
You should know as much about the quality and
importance of proper maintenance of your new
vehicle as the people who built it.
The Lexus authorized Repair Manual tells you
how to maintain your vehicle and enables you to
correctly perform your own maintenance.
The best way to keep your new vehicle in top running
order is to maintain it properly from the moment you
drive it off the showroom floor.
The Lexus authorized Repair Manual is packed with
literally everything you need to know to perform your
own maintenance in virtually every area of your new
vehicle.
cm−1
Maintenance procedures for the engine, chassis,
body, electrical system, and more, are clearly
explained and illustrated.
Periodic maintenance and tune−up
Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to prevent small
problems from growing into larger ones later on. The repair
manual outlines exactly what maintenance is required and
clearly explains how to do the work yourself step−by−step.
Areas covered include such things as spark plug replacement,
valve clearance adjustment and engine oil and filter
replacement.
cm−2
Where to obtain the
Repair Manual
The repair manual for GS430, GS300 may be purchased from
any Lexus dealer or call the Material Distribution Center. To
purchase the repair manual, please contact your Lexus dealer
or the Material Distribution Center toll−free at
1−800−622−2033.
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT PANEL (Vehicles with navigation system)
G00011b
Four−wheel drive models
i
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
Page
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
1
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 59
17
2
Driving position memory switches . . . . . . . . . . . 202
18
Trunk lid opener main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3
Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
19
Tire pressure warning select switch . . . . . . . . . . 448
4
Door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
20
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5
Side vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
21
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6
Engine switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
22
Seat heater switches or Seat ventilator/heater
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 65
7
Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . 258
23
8
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Traction control system off switch
(Two−wheel drive models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
9
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
24
Driving pattern selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
10
Center vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
25
Damping mode select switch
(GS430 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
11
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
26
Coin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
12
Touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Navigation system display (See the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”)
27
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
28
Automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . 359
13
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
29
Tire pressure warning reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . 446
14
Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
30
Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
31
Parking brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
15
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . 78
32
Switch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
16
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section.
ii
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT PANEL (Vehicles without navigation system)
G00012b
Four−wheel drive models
iii
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
Page
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
1
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 59
17
2
Driving position memory switches . . . . . . . . . . . 202
18
Trunk lid opener main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3
Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
19
Tire pressure warning select switch . . . . . . . . . . 448
4
Door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
20
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5
Side vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
21
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6
Engine switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
22
Seat heater switches or Seat ventilator/heater
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 65
7
Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . 258
23
8
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Traction control system off switch
(Two−wheel drive models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
9
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
24
Driving pattern selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
10
Center vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
25
Damping mode select switch
(GS430 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
11
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
26
Coin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
12
Touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
27
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
13
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
28
Automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . 359
14
Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
29
Tire pressure warning reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
15
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . 78
30
16
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
31
Parking brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
32
Switch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section.
iv
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (Vehicles sold in U. S. A.)
G00041
v
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
Page
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
17
2
Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 49
18
3
Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Adaptive front−lighting system off
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
19
Anti−lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 80
4
Headlight indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
20
Pre−collision system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5
Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425, 428, 429
21
Brake system warning light (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6
Fog light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
22
Master warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7
Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
23
Electric power steering system warning light . . 82
8
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
24
Multi−information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
9
Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
25
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
10
Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 359
26
Tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
11
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
27
Intuitive parking assist indicator light . . . . . . . . 373
12
Fuel filler door indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
28
Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
13
Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
29
Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
14
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
30
Power mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
15
Charging system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
31
Damping mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
16
Brake system warning light (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . 77
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section.
vi
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (Vehicles sold in Canada)
G00043
vii
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
Page
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
17
2
Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 49
18
3
Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Adaptive front−lighting system off
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
19
Anti−lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 80
4
Tail light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
20
Pre−collision system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5
Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425, 428, 429
21
Brake system warning light (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6
Fog light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
22
Master warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7
Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
23
Electric power steering system warning light . . 82
8
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
24
Multi−information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
9
Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
25
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
10
Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 359
26
Tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
11
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
27
Intuitive parking assist indicator light . . . . . . . . 373
12
Fuel filler door indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
28
Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
13
Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
29
Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
14
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
30
Power mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
15
Charging system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
31
Damping mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
16
Brake system warning light (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . 77
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section.
viii
PICTORIAL INDEX
FRONT SEAT
Page
G00094
1
Seat position, seat cushion
angle and height control
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145, 146
2
Seatback angle control
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
3
Lumbar support control
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
For detailed information, refer to the
description given in each Section.
ix
PICTORIAL INDEX
STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN
Page
1
Headlight, turn signal and
fog light switches . . . . . . . . 46, 49, 50
2
Audio remote control
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
3
Distance switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
4
Speech command button (See the
separate “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.)
5
Telephone button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
6
Windshield wiper and washer
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
7
Multi−information
change switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
8
Cruise control switch . . . . . . 398, 401
9
Tilt and telescopic steering
adjustment switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
G00095b
For detailed information, refer to the
description given in each Section.
x
PICTORIAL INDEX
SWITCH BOX
Page
G00096
1
Headlight cleaner switch . . . . . . . . 57
2
Rear view mirror
folding switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
3
Rear electric
sunshade switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
4
Intuitive parking assist switch . 372
5
Adaptive Front Lighting system
cancel switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6
“ODO TRIP” and
“RESET” switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7
Instrument panel light control
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
8
Light sensitive optitron meter
mode change switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
9
Trunk lid opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
10
Fuel filler door opener . . . . . . . . . 132
11
Power rear view mirror control
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
For detailed information, refer to the
description given in each Section.
xi
PICTORIAL INDEX
EXTERIOR VIEW
Page
G00001
1
Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
2
Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . 58
3
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
4
Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
5
Windshield wiper
and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 589
6
Outside rear view mirror . . . . . . . 209
7
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
8
Tire and wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
9
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 594
10
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
For detailed information, refer to the
description given in each Section.
xii
PICTORIAL INDEX
xiii
BASIC OPERATION
QUICK REFERENCE
Driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight and turn signal switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
3
5
6
1
QUICK REFERENCE
1. DRIVER’S SEAT
2. STEERING WHEEL
TILT STEERING COLUMN
G00102
Seat position
G00151
Seat cushion
angle
Seat cushion
height
To tilt the steering column up or down to the desired angle,
push the control switch in the required direction and
release the button when the steering column reaches the
desired angle.
TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN
Seatback
angle
Lumbar
support
G00103
Head restraint
height
Head restraint
angle
2
To move the steering column to the desired position, push
the control switch away from you or pull it toward you until
the steering column reaches the desired position.
QUICK REFERENCE
3. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
OPERATION OF SELECTOR LEVER
G00104
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION
P: Parking and engine starting
G00105
R: Reverse position
N: Neutral position
D: Normal driving position
(Shifting into overdrive possible)
S: “S” mode driving
+:
Upshifting
–:
Downshifting
Shift while pressing the brake pedal. (Engine
switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode.)
3
QUICK REFERENCE
NOTE:
Vehicles with the cruise control: When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from “D” or “6” (sixth range) to “5” (fifth
range), or “D” or “5” (fifth range) to “4” (fourth range), engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled.
For vehicle speed reduction, see page 400. Vehicles with the dynamic radar cruise control: When the cruise control is being used
in the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode or in the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode, even if you downshift from
“D” or “6” (sixth range) to “5” (fifth range) or “D”, or “5” (fifth range) to “4” (fourth range), engine braking will not be enabled because
the cruise control is not cancelled. For vehicle speed reduction, see pages 423.
4
QUICK REFERENCE
4. HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCHES
D HEADLIGHT SWITCH
Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument
panel lights turn on.
Headlights also turn on.
G00108
D TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Right or left turn
G00111
Lane change
(Right or left)
Automatic light control
D HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH
High beam
G00110
Headlight flasher
5
QUICK REFERENCE
5. WINDSHIELD WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
Rain−sensing windshield wipers
Mist wiper operation
Mist wiper operation
Automatic operation
Variable intermittent
operation
Low speed operation
G00113
6
Variable intermittent wipers
Low speed operation
G00112
High speed operation
High speed operation
Washer on
Washer on
SECTION
1–1
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Keys and doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Smart access system with push−button start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7
KEYS AND DOORS
KEYS
G11007
1
Electronic keys − These keys will work for the doors,
trunk and can start the engine. They will not work for
glove box and trunk storage extension door. Your
dealer will need one of them to make a new key.
Before you use these keys, be sure to read “Smart access
system with push−button start” on page 11.
8
2
Mechanical keys − These keys work for the doors,
trunk, glove box and trunk storage extension door,
but cannot start the engine.
3
Key number plate − Keep the plate in a safe place
such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
Using a mechanical key
G11008
When you use the mechanical key included on the side of the
electronic key, slide the lock knob in the arrow direction and
take out the key as shown. To put the key back, slide the key
gently until it locks, paying attention to the angle and position
of the key. Be sure to put the key back when not in use.
KEYS AND DOORS
CAUTION
NOTICE
People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away from the smart access system antennas, because the radio waves
may affect the operation of such devices. For the
antenna locations, see “Antenna locations” on
page 28.
Users of any electrical medical device other than
implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the
device for information about its operation under
the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could
have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
If necessary, the entry functions can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
When using an electronic key, observe the following
precautions:
Do not affix any material that cuts off electromagnetic
waves (such as a metal seal) on the electronic key.
Do not knock the electronic key hard against other
objects.
Do not leave the electronic key exposed to high
temperatures for a long period, such as on the
dashboard or hood under direct sunlight.
Do not put the electronic key in water or wash it in an
ultrasonic washer.
Do not keep the electronic key together with the
products emitting electromagnetic waves such as a
cellular phone.
Do not disassemble the electronic key.
Do not place the electronic key near electrical
appliances (e.g. television, computer or stereo) or
electrical medical equipment such as low frequency
medical appliances.
If gasoline, polishing agents or oil adheres to the
electronic key, it may deform or crack over time.
9
KEYS AND DOORS
The electronic keys are required to deactivate the engine
immobilizer, and are essential for the engine immobilizer to
function correctly, so be careful not to lose these keys. If you
make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the
system or start the engine.
To protect items when using valet parking, turn the trunk lid
opener main switch to inoperative or lock the glove box if
necessary, and leave the electronic key (with the mechanical
key removed) with the attendant. For details, see “Trunk lid
opener main switch” on page 130.
If you should lose your electronic keys or if you need additional
electronic keys, duplicates can be made by a Lexus dealer
using the key number.
We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in
a safe place.
10
KEYS AND DOORS
SMART ACCESS SYSTEM WITH PUSH−BUTTON START
G11024
1 Engine immobilizer
2 Entry function 3 Wireless remote control
4 Push−button starting
The smart access system with push−button start comprises 4 kinds of functions; engine immobilizer, entry function,
wireless remote control and push−button starting.
For engine immobilizer, see page 12.
For entry function, see page 14.
For wireless remote control, see page 29.
For push−button starting, see page 348.
11
KEYS AND DOORS
If the electronic key battery is discharged, the entry function
and wireless remote control cannot be used. Use the
mechanical key integrated into the electronic key by inserting
it in the door keyhole to lock or unlock doors and into the trunk
lid keyhole to unlock the trunk lid. To start the engine, see
“Starting the engine when the electronic key battery is
discharged” on page 357. In order to activate the entry function
and wireless remote control, the battery should be replaced.
For details, see “Replacing the battery” on page 34.
(a) Engine immobilizer
G11009
The engine immobilizer is a theft prevention function.
When you enter the vehicle carrying an electronic key and
press the engine switch, the electronic code in the key is
automatically checked to determine whether it
corresponds to the registered ID code for the vehicle. If
the ID code is verified, you can start the engine.
The system is automatically set when the engine switch is off.
The indicator light will start flashing to show the system is set.
12
KEYS AND DOORS
If any of the following indicator conditions occurs, contact your
Lexus dealer.
The indicator light stays on except when the theft deterrent
system is setting or activating. (See “Theft deterrent
system” on page 41.)
The indicator light does not start flashing when the engine
switch is off.
The indicator light flashes inconsistently.
For your Lexus dealer to make you a new key, your dealer will
need your key number and electronic key. However, there is
a limit to the number of additional keys your Lexus dealer can
make for you.
If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able
to cancel the function or start the engine.
NOTICE
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB−1
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Do not modify, remove or disassemble the engine
immobilizer.
If any unauthorized changes or
modifications are made, proper operation of this
function cannot be guaranteed.
13
KEYS AND DOORS
For vehicles sold in Canada
(b) Entry functions*
Entry functions are as follows:
This device complies with RSS−210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Locking the doors
(For details, see page 20.)
Unlocking the door(s)
(For details, see page 23.)
Changing the doors to be unlocked
(For details, see page 24.)
Unlocking the trunk lid
(For details, see page 26.)
Battery power saving
(For details, see page 27.)
NOTE:
*These functions can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
14
KEYS AND DOORS
CAUTION
People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away from the smart access system antennas, because the radio waves
may affect the operation of such devices. For the
antenna locations, see “Antenna locations” on
page 28.
Users of any electrical medical device other than
implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the
device for information about its operation under
the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could
have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
If necessary, the entry functions can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
INFORMATION
Be sure to take the electronic key with you.
In the following cases, the entry function, wireless
remote control or push−button starting feature may
not operate properly. If this happens, use a
mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors and trunk
lid. If you are unable to use push−button starting,
follow the procedure for starting the engine on page
357.
When facilities issuing strong electromagnetic
waves such as TV towers, electric power stations,
broadcasting stations are nearby.
In places where automated payment facilities are
installed (such as gas stations).
When you are carrying an electronic key together
with a mobile communications system such as a
two−way radio or cellular phone.
When the electronic key is in contact with or
covered by a metallic object.
When in proximity to a number of electronic keys
When placed in proximity to electrical appliances
e.g. computer
When another person is operating a wireless
remote control function on another vehicle near
your vehicle.
When the electronic key is in close contact with
one’s body.
15
KEYS AND DOORS
If you do not drive your vehicle, store the electronic
key, keeping it at least 5 m (15 ft.) away from the
vehicle.
ALARMS AND WARNING MESSAGES
Your Lexus is equipped with alarms inside and outside, as
well as warning messages in the multi−information
display, that remind you if there is a problem involving the
entry function.
Cases which are expected to happen frequently are
shown in the illustrations and the other cases are
described in the table. If an alarm or warning message
comes on, check to see what the problem is referring to
the illustrations and table, and take the appropriate
measure.
If a warning message appears, the master warning light
will blink.
16
KEYS AND DOORS
G11025
When a door is opened and closed with the engine
switch in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode and with the selector
lever in the “P” position, and then the electronic key is
carried outside of the vehicle.
Inside alarm: One chime
G11026
When you attempted to lock the door(s) with the
electronic key still in the vehicle.
Outside alarm: One beep (sounds for 2 seconds)
See page 21 and 22 for details.
Outside alarm: 3 beeps
Multi−information display: “KEY IS NOT DETECTED”
See page 93 for details.
17
KEYS AND DOORS
G11149
18
G11027
When you pushed the lock button on the outside door
handle while carrying the electronic key with the engine
switch not to be turned off.
When you attempted to lock a door which is not
completely closed while carrying an electronic key with
the engine switch off.
Outside alarm: One beep (sounds for 2 seconds)
Outside alarm: One beep (sounds for 10 seconds)
See page 21 and 22 for details.
See page 22 for details.
KEYS AND DOORS
Outside warning
alarm
Warning message on
the multi−information
display
Chimes
None
None
The driver’s door was opened when the engine switch is
selected in “ACC” mode and the selector lever was in “P”, or
when the steering lock is not activated.
Beep
(sounds
continuously)
Beep
(sounds
continuously)
“SHIFT TO P
RANGE” and “KEY IS
NOT DETECTED”
appear alternately.
The electronic key was not in the vehicle, the driver’s door
was opened and closed when the engine switch was
selected in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode and the selector lever
was in a position other than “P”.
Beeps
(sound
intermittently)
None
None
The driver’s door was opened when the engine switch was
selected in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode and the selector lever
was in a position other than “P”.
One chime
None
“KEY IS NOT
DETECTED”
(shown for about 8
seconds)
The engine switch was pushed while the electronic key was
not in the vehicle or the electronic key battery was
discharged.
One chime
None
”LOW KEY
BATTERY”
Electronic key battery is low.
Inside warning
alarm
Causes
19
KEYS AND DOORS
LOCKING THE DOORS WITH ENTRY FUNCTION
NOTICE
If the key is in the vehicle, do not perform door locking
operation, or you might lock your keys inside the
vehicle.
G11028
INFORMATION
When locking the doors, be sure to push the lock
button on the outside door handle slowly and firmly.
If you push the button quickly, the doors may not
lock.
When the engine switch is off and you push the lock
button on the outside door handle while carrying an
electronic key, all the doors will be locked. At this time,
one beep will sound and the turn signal lights will flash
once.
The entry function will be activated within about 1m (3ft.) from
each outside door handle.
However, when you push the lock button on the outside door
handle with any door not closed securely, a beep sounds for
10 seconds. (For details, see page 22.)
If outer foot lights are illuminated, you can turn off the lights by
pushing the lock button on the outside door handle. (For
details, see “Outer foot lights” on page 212.)
20
When opening or closing a door, do not touch the
lock button on the outside door handle.
When an electronic key is used to lock the doors and
an electronic key is left in the effective range of the
entry function in the vehicle, the doors cannot be
unlocked using the entry function. In this case, use
the wireless remote control function to unlock the
doors.
You cannot activate unlocking function within 3
seconds after the locking function is activated.
KEYS AND DOORS
The doors cannot be locked using the entry function in the
following conditions:
G11029
Key reminder alarm
If you push the lock button on the outside door handle
with an electronic key left in the vehicle, an alarm sounds
for 2 seconds and the doors will not lock.
Before you push the lock button, make sure you are carrying
the electronic key.
INFORMATION
Do not put an electronic key on the instrument panel,
rear package tray or floor, or in the glove box or
auxiliary box near the selector lever, which falls
outside of the effective range of the entry function.
As the alarm does not sound when a key is left in such
a place, you might accidentally lock the doors by
pushing the lock button on the outside door handle
and be locked out of the vehicle. Be sure to take the
electronic key with you.
If you have the electronic key but bring it very close
to the window or outside door handle, the alarm
might activate. In this case, keep the electronic key
a certain distance away from the window or outside
door handle and then push the lock button again.
If the electronic key is left in the vehicle, attempting
to lock the door by pushing in the lock button located
in the inside door handle and closing the door will
unlock all the doors and activate the alarm for 2
seconds.
21
KEYS AND DOORS
G11030
G11031
Engine switch on/off reminder alarm
Open door warning
If you push the lock button on the outside door handle
without turning off the engine switch, an alarm sounds for
2 seconds and the doors will not lock.
If you push the lock button on the outside door handle
while any door is not completely closed, an alarm sounds
for 10 seconds and the doors will not lock.
Before you push the lock button, make sure you have an
electronic key and that the engine switch is off.
To stop the alarm, close all the doors securely or push the
“UNLOCK” button on the electronic key.
Before you push the lock button, make sure you have an
electronic key and all the doors are securely closed.
22
KEYS AND DOORS
UNLOCKING THE DOOR(S) WITH ENTRY FUNCTION
G11032
When the door(s) is(are) unlocked, the interior lights come on
for 15 seconds if the interior light switch is in the “DOOR”
position. However, the interior lights go out when you push the
power door lock switch in the lock position or select the engine
switch in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode. For further information, see
“Interior lights” on page 100.
You have 30 seconds to open a door after operating the
unlocking function. If a door is not opened by then, all the doors
will be automatically locked again.
INFORMATION
When you take hold the back side of the outside door
handle on the driver’s door carrying an electronic key, the
driver’s door will be unlocked. When you take hold the
back side of the outside door handle except on the driver’s
door, carrying an electronic key, all the doors will be
unlocked. At this time, two beeps will sound and turn
signal lights flash twice.
When you get close to your vehicle (about 1 m (3 ft.) from each
outside door handle), and are carrying the electronic key, the
electronic code emitted from the key is automatically checked
to determine if it corresponds to the registered ID code for the
vehicle. After this, the outer foot lights come on. (For outer foot
lights, see “Outer foot lights” on page 212.)
You can select the doors to be unlocked. For details, see
“Changing the doors to be unlocked” on page 24.
When unlocking the door(s), be sure to take hold of
the back side of the outside door handle firmly as
shown in the illustration. Taking hold of the handle
with a gloved hand might cause a delay in unlocking
or may not unlock.
When you take hold of the handle to unlock the
door(s), be sure to confirm that the door(s) has(have)
been unlocked. If the turn signal lights flash twice,
two beeps sound outside the vehicle, the doors are
unlocked. At this time, you can pull the outside door
handle to open the door. If you quickly move closer
to the vehicle or pull the outside door handle quickly,
the doors might not unlock. If you cannot open the
door by pulling the outside door handle at this time,
push it back to the original position and then pull it
out again.
23
KEYS AND DOORS
If you bring the electronic key very close to the
outside door handle, the doors might not unlock.
If the electronic key is within effective range, even
persons not carrying an electronic key may lock or
unlock the doors.
CHANGING THE DOORS TO BE UNLOCKED
When you push the “LOCK” button together with the
“UNLOCK”, “TRUNK” or “PANIC” button on the electronic
key for about 5 seconds with the engine switch off, you
can change the settings for door unlocking.
If a large amount of water is applied to the outside
door handle during heavy rain or a car wash, and
someone carrying an electronic key is near the
vehicle, the door(s) might be unlocked. However, if
the outside door handle is not pulled out, the doors
will lock automatically after about 30 seconds.
G11183
Each time you push the buttons, the multi−information display
and setting changes as shown.
1
Driver’s door unlocking mode
The setting displays flash alternately for 4 seconds.
When the setting is complete, you will hear the following:
3 beeps (Outside), One chime (Inside)
This mode allows you to unlock only the driver’s door
when you hold the driver’s door handle and all the doors
when you hold any door other than the driver’s door
handle.
24
KEYS AND DOORS
2
Side doors unlocking mode
The setting displays flash alternately for 4 seconds.
When the setting is complete, you will hear the following:
4 beeps (Outside), One chime (Inside)
This mode allows you to unlock the front and rear doors
on your side when you hold any door handle.
3
Single door unlocking mode
The setting display changes as shown. When the setting
is complete, you will hear the following:
One beep (Outside), One chime (Inside)
This mode allows you to unlock the door for which you
hold the door handle.
4
INFORMATION
If you get in the vehicle from the driver’s door using an
electronic key while the side doors or one door is set to
be unlocked, all the unlocking controls activated by the
electronic key will be stopped for security. If you get out
of the vehicle from the driver’s door carrying the
electronic key and reaches out of the effective range of
the entry function, unlocking control by the electronic
key will be possible. However, unlocking control may
not be carried out for 5 seconds after you get out from
the vehicle. In this case, perform unlocking operation
again after 5 seconds.
All doors unlocking mode
The setting display comes on for 4 seconds. When the
setting is complete, you will hear the following:
2 beeps (Outside), One chime (Inside)
This mode allows you to unlock all the doors when you
hold any door handle.
The display will return to driver’s door unlocking mode when
you attempt to change the setting from all doors unlocking
mode.
25
KEYS AND DOORS
UNLOCKING THE TRUNK LID WITH ENTRY FUNCTION
G11055
G11056
Key reminder alarm
When you push the trunk button on the trunk lid while
carrying an electronic key, the trunk lid will unlock.
If you lock your electronic key in the trunk when all doors
are locked, an alarm sounds for about 2 seconds to
remind you that the electronic key is in the trunk.
INFORMATION
At this time, the trunk lid is unlocked. Even after the alarm
stops sounding, pushing the trunk button will unlock the trunk
lid.
If you bring the electronic key close to the center of the
bumper, or it is close to the ground or in a high place, the
trunk lid might not unlock.
26
KEYS AND DOORS
INFORMATION
If you close the trunk lid while an electronic key is left
in the trunk and all doors are locked, an alarm should
be activated. However, if the electronic key is placed
near the spare tire or at the edge of the trunk, or if the
electronic key is in a metallic bag, the trunk lid might
not be unlocked.
If you accidentally lock an electronic key in the trunk
when all doors are locked, be aware that anyone can
unlock the trunk by pushing the trunk button.
Even when the electronic key is outside the trunk, an
alarm still might be activated if the electronic key is
near the trunk. However, if you have the electronic
key, there is no problem.
BATTERY POWER SAVING
If the electronic key is left within the effective range of the
outside of the vehicle for more than 10 minutes without locking
or unlocking the doors, the entry function is disabled.
If the electronic key does not enter the effective range of the
outside of the vehicle for 4 days, the output interval of the
electromagnetic signal is extended. If this situation continues
for 14 days, the entry function is disabled.
To reactivate the entry function properly, perform any of the
following:
(a) Press the lock button on the outside door handle while
carrying the electronic key.
(b) Perform a wireless remote control function.
(c) Insert and turn the mechanical key in the keyhole of the
door.
27
KEYS AND DOORS
INFORMATION
ANTENNA LOCATIONS
To maintain communication with the vehicle,
electronic keys use built−in battery power. The
battery service life is about 1 to 2 years on average.
If battery power becomes insufficient, replace the
battery with a new one.
The
electronic
key
continually
receives
electromagnetic waves, and if it receives strong
electromagnetic waves over a period of time, the
battery can be drastically run down. Therefore, avoid
storing electronic keys near any electrical
appliances.
Here is a list of electrical appliances which may have
adverse effects on the electronic key performance:
TVs, personal computers, cellular phone or cordless
phone recharger units, electric light stands and
fluorescent desk lights
Note that you should always keep such electrical
appliances at least 1 m (3 ft.) away from the electronic
key.
28
1
Antennas outside cabin
2
Antennas inside cabin
3
Antenna outside trunk
4
Antenna inside trunk
KEYS AND DOORS
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
(c) Wireless remote control*
FCC ID: NI4TMLF−1
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
G11014
CAUTION
1
Locking the doors
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
Unlocking the doors and opening the windows and
moon roof
3
Unlocking the trunk lid
4
Sounding an alarm
For vehicles sold in Canada
5
This device complies with RSS−210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Indicator light
NOTE:
*This feature can be deactivated as vehicle theft deterrent
measure in case of the loss of the electronic key.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
When you operate any button on the electronic key, push it
slowly and firmly. At this time, the indicator light flashes once.
29
KEYS AND DOORS
The operational range of the wireless remote control is
approximately 1 meter (3 ft.). The effective range may vary
with different conditions. To activate the wireless remote
control without fail, do it approximately 1 meter (3 ft.) from your
Lexus.
The electronic key is an electronic component. Observe
the following instructions in order not to cause damage to
the electronic key.
In the following cases, the battery in the electronic key may be
discharged.
Avoid knocking it hard against other objects or dropping it.
The message “LOW KEY BATTERY” appears on the
multi−information display.
The remote control does not work.
The operational range of wireless remote control becomes
extremely short.
The indicator light on the electronic key is dimmed or does
not come on.
For the replacement of the battery, see ”Replacing the battery”
on page 34. You can also have the battery of the key replaced
by your Lexus dealer.
If you lose the electronic key, contact your Lexus dealer
immediately to avoid the possibility of theft, or an accident.
You can use up to 7 electronic keys for the same vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information.
30
Do not leave the electronic key in places where the
temperature becomes high such as on the dashboard.
Avoid putting it in water.
KEYS AND DOORS
LOCKING/UNLOCKING THE DOORS
The wireless remote control will not operate when the
engine switch is selected in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode.
When you push the ”LOCK” button on the electronic key
briefly, all the doors can be locked from outside the
vehicle.
When they are locked securely, the turn signal lights will flash
and one beep will sound.* However, when you push the
”LOCK” button with any door not closed securely, the buzzer
sounds for 10 seconds.** To stop the buzzer, close all the
doors securely or push the ”UNLOCK” button. If the electronic
key is left in the vehicle, locking cannot be done.
Make sure all the doors are locked when you leave the vehicle.
Push the ”LOCK” button once again. If they were already
locked, the turn signal lights will flash and one beep will
sound.***
NOTE:
*The turn signal lights can be set not to flash and beep can
be set not to sound. **The buzzer can be set not to sound
if a door is not closed securely. ***The turn signal lights can
be set not to flash.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
When you push the ”UNLOCK” button, the driver’s door
is unlocked. Pushing that button once again within 3
seconds from the first push, all other doors are also
unlocked.*
NOTE:
*The 2−step unlocking function can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
At this time, the turn signal lights will flash twice and two beeps
will sound.* Together with the activation of unlocking, the
interior lights come on for 15 seconds if the interior light switch
is in ”DOOR” position.** For further information, see ”Interior
lights” on page 100.
You have 30 seconds to open a door after using the wireless
remote unlock feature.*** If a door is not opened by then, all
the doors will be automatically locked again.
Even if the ”LOCK” or ”UNLOCK” button is kept pressed in, the
locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the
button and then push again.
NOTE:
*The turn signal lights can be set not to flash and beep can
be set not to sound. **The interior light can be set not to
come on or the duration of lighting can be changed. ***The
time before automatic re−locking can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
31
KEYS AND DOORS
UNLOCKING THE TRUNK LID
G11015
When you keep the button pushed for about 1 second, you
can unlock the trunk lid.* One beep sounds.
This function does not work in either of the following conditions.
When the engine switch is selected in “ACC” or “IG−ON”
mode.
When the trunk opener main switch is deactivated.
NOTE:
*The operation method can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
32
SOUNDING AN ALARM*
G11016
When you push the ”PANIC” button for about 1 second, an
alarm sounds to deter any person trying to break into or
damage your vehicle.
If you want to stop the alarm, push any button.
This function does not work when the engine switch is selected
in “IG−ON” mode.
NOTE:
*The alarm can be set not to sound.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
KEYS AND DOORS
OPERATING THE WINDOWS AND MOON ROOF
The windows and moon roof can be operated using an
electronic key from outside the vehicle.*
NOTE:
*The windows can be deactivated. The moon roof can be
set to slide open, tilt up or deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
G11017
Push the “UNLOCK” button until the windows and moon roof
start to move. When you release the button, the windows and
moon roof stop operating.
This function will work even with the window lock switch
pressed in.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
33
KEYS AND DOORS
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
REPLACING THE BATTERY
When you replace the battery, prepare a lithium battery
CR1632 or equivalent and flathead screwdrivers. However, if
the inner parts are touched or the electronic key is dropped, it
will not function properly. We recommend you to have an
electronic key battery replaced by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
Special care should be taken to prevent small children
from swallowing the removed battery or components.
NOTICE
Do not touch the components in an electronic key
with your hand. It may cause static electricity to
occur, and an electronic key will be broken.
When replacing the electronic key battery, be careful
not to lose components.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by a Lexus dealer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
34
KEYS AND DOORS
G11034
1. After taking out the mechanical key, insert the flathead
screwdriver into the space, and turn it.
G11035
2. Using a screwdriver of smaller diameter, insert the
screwdriver with the gap and remove the battery.
G11036
3. After placing the battery in the slot at an angle, with the
positive side facing up, press down on the battery and ensure
it is properly in place.
G11037
4. Replace the cover by pressing down in the order of 1 and
2 as shown in the illustration.
35
KEYS AND DOORS
DOORS
NOTICE
Make sure the positive side and negative side of the
battery are faced correctly.
See page 20 for locking the doors with entry function and
page 23 for unlocking them with entry function.
Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may
cause unexpected rust.
Locking with a mechanical key
Do not touch or move any components inside the
transmitter, or it may interfere with proper operation.
Be careful not to bend the electrode when inserting
the battery and that dust or oils do not adhere to the
inside of the module.
G11001
5. After replacing the battery, be sure to return the mechanical
key to its original position.
1 Lock
2 Unlock
Turn the mechanical key towards the front of the vehicle
to lock and towards the back to unlock.
The doors lock and unlock simultaneously with the driver’s
door. Turning the mechanical key once will unlock the driver’s
door and twice in succession will unlock all doors
simultaneously.*
NOTE:
*The 2−step unlocking function can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
36
KEYS AND DOORS
If a wrong key is used, the key cylinder rotates freely to isolate
inside mechanism. So, door locking is protected from thieves.
Locking with inside lock button
The windows and moon roof can be opened and closed from
outside the vehicle using a mechanical key. For details, see
“Power window switches” on page 59 and “Moon roof” on page
136.
G11002a
1 Lock
2 Unlock
Push in the lock button to lock and unlock the door.
The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handles
even if the lock buttons are in the locked position.
CAUTION
Do not pull the inside handle of the front doors while
driving. The doors will open and an accident may occur.
Lexus strongly recommends that all children be placed
in the rear seat of the vehicle.
37
KEYS AND DOORS
Closing the door with the lock button pushed in will also lock
the door. If the electronic key is left in the vehicle, locking
cannot be done.
Locking with power door lock switch
If the vehicle is subjected to a severe frontal, rear or side
impact with the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode, all the doors
will unlock automatically after a few seconds.
G11003
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure the doors are closed and
locked, especially when small children are in the
vehicle. Along with the proper use of seat belts, locking
the doors helps prevent the driver and passengers from
being thrown out from the vehicle during an accident.
It also helps prevent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.
1 Lock
2 Unlock
To lock all the doors simultaneously, push the power door
lock switch down on the lock side. Pushing down on the
unlock side will unlock them.
When you push the power door lock switch on the unlock side
to unlock the doors to allow a passenger to get in, the outer foot
lights come on. To turn off the lights, push the power door lock
switch on the lock side. (For details, see “Outer foot lights” on
page 212.)
The same switch is also found on the front passenger’s side.
However, pushing this switch will neither turn on nor off the
outer foot lights.
38
KEYS AND DOORS
Automatic door locking and unlocking
functions
To select the locking linked with the vehicle speed:
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING
1. Close all doors and select the engine switch in “IG−ON”
mode.
You can select the following functions:
2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the “N” position.
Locking linked with the shift position
3. Within 10 seconds of selecting the engine switch in “IG−ON”
mode, press and hold the driver’s side power door lock switch
in the lock position for 5 seconds and then release.
All doors are automatically locked when the selector lever is
moved out of “P” position.
Locking linked with vehicle speed
The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the
function is set.
All doors are automatically locked when the vehicle speed
goes above about 20 km/h (12 mph).
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.
You can set or cancel the automatic door locking
functions:
Be sure to apply the parking brake when performing the
following operations.
To select the locking linked with the shift position:
1. Close all doors and select the engine switch in “IG−ON”
mode.
2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
3. Within 10 seconds of selecting the engine switch in “IG−ON”
mode, press and hold the driver’s side power door lock switch
in the lock position for 5 seconds and then release.
The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the
function is set.
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.
39
KEYS AND DOORS
AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCKING
To select the unlocking linked with the engine switch:
You can select the following functions:
1. Close all doors and select the engine switch in “IG−ON”
mode.
Unlocking linked with the shift position
All doors are automatically unlocked when the selector lever
is moved to “P” position.
Unlocking linked with the engine switch
All doors are automatically unlocked when the the driver’s door
is opened within 10 seconds after the engine switch is selected
in “ACC” or “OFF” mode.
You can set or cancel the automatic unlocking functions:
Be sure to apply the parking brake when performing the
following operations.
To select the unlocking linked with the shift position:
1. Close all doors and select the engine switch in “IG−ON”
mode.
2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
3. Within 10 seconds of selecting the engine switch in “IG−ON”
mode, press and hold the driver’s side power door lock switch
in the unlock position for 5 seconds and then release.
The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the
function is set.
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.
40
2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the “N” position.
3. Within 10 seconds of selecting the engine switch in “IG−ON”
mode, press and hold the driver’s side power door lock switch
in the unlock position for 5 seconds and then release.
The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the
function is set.
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.
KEYS AND DOORS
Locking with rear door child−protector
G11004
1 Unlock
2 Lock
Whenever small children are in the vehicle, lock the rear
door so that it does not open by the inside door handle.
To do this, turn the knob to the lock position as shown and
then close the door.
THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
G11005
To deter theft of the vehicle, this system is designed to
sound an alarm if any of the doors, trunk or hood is
forcibly unlocked or opened, or the battery terminal is
disconnected and then reconnected while the vehicle is
locked.
The alarm blows the horn intermittently, flashes the headlights,
tail lights, turn signal lights and other exterior lights. When the
interior light switch is in the “DOOR” position, the interior lights
also turn on.
After the alarm is activated, when you unlock any door or the
trunk using a entry function, wireless remote control or
mechanical key, the tail lights turn on for about 2 seconds to
inform you that the system was activated.
41
KEYS AND DOORS
Cancelling the system
When you unlock any door or trunk using entry function,
wireless remote control or a mechanical key, the system
is cancelled.
G11006a
Security indicator light
NOTE:
* The turn signal lights can be set not to flash and beep can
be set not to sound.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
Setting the system
Activating the system
1. Turn the engine switch off.
The alarm sounds for 60 seconds if any of the following are
operated:
The engine immobilizer causes the security indicator light to
flash.
2. Close and lock all the doors, trunk and hood using entry
function, wireless remote control or a mechanical key.
If you lock them with entry function or wireless remote control,
the turn signal lights flash once and one beep will sound.* At
this time, the indicator light comes on.
NOTE:
* The turn signal lights can be set not to flash and beep can
be set not to sound.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
3. After 30 seconds, the illuminated indicator light
changes flashing and the system is set.
42
If you unlock any door or trunk with entry function or wireless
remote control, the turn signal lights flash twice and two beeps
will sound.*
Unlocking any door or trunk without using entry function,
wireless remote control or a mechanical key.
Opening the hood forcibly.
Reconnecting the battery.
If any door is unlocked during the alarm sounding, its door is
automatically locked.
To stop the alarm: Use either of the following methods.
Unlock the door or trunk using entry function, wireless
remote control or a mechanical key.
Start the engine.
KEYS AND DOORS
Testing the system
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the system as described above.
All the doors should be locked with entry function, wireless
remote control or a mechanical key. Be sure to wait until the
indicator light starts flashing.
3. Unlock one of the doors from the inside through one of
the opened windows.
The system should activate the alarm.
4. Unlock any of the doors with entry function, the
wireless remote control or a mechanical key to cancel the
system.
5. Repeat this operation for the other doors, trunk and
hood.
When testing the hood, also check that the system is activated
when the battery terminal is disconnected and then
reconnected.
If the system does not work properly, have it checked by your
Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
When disconnecting the battery, be sure to cancel the
theft deterrent system. Otherwise, the system could
activate an alarm and lock the unlocked door(s)
automatically.
43
KEYS AND DOORS
44
SECTION
1–2
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Switches
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight dimmer and turn signal switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight cleaner switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch . . . . .
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat ventilator/heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
49
50
51
57
58
59
62
63
65
45
SWITCHES
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
Vehicles sold in U.S.A.: When the headlights are on, the
headlight indicator lights up in the instrument cluster.
Vehicles sold in Canada: When the tail lights are on, the tail
light indicator lights up in the instrument cluster.
G12001
1 U.S.A.
2 Canada
To turn the lights on, twist the knob on the end of the lever.
FIRST CLICKSTOP: Only the parking, tail, license plate, side
marker and instrument panel lights turn on.
SECOND CLICKSTOP: Headlights also turn on.
THIRD CLICKSTOP (”AUTO”): The headlights and all other
lights automatically turn on depending on the darkness of the
surroundings.*
NOTE:
*The operating condition or sensitivity can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
46
With the knob in the “AUTO” position, there may be a case
that the headlights do not turn on immediately, even when
the vehicle enters a dark place such as a tunnel or parking
lot according to lighting conditions. In this case, we
recommend you to twist the knob manually to the second
clickstop to turn on the headlights immediately.
When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second
clickstop, the brightness of the instrument cluster will be
reduced slightly unless the maximum brightness is provided by
pushing the “MAX” button.
However, the brightness of the instrument cluster will not be
reduced in daytime even when the headlight switch is turned
to first or second clickstop.
SWITCHES
Daytime Running Light System
G12002
The headlights turn on at reduced intensity when the parking
brake is released with the engine started, even with the light
switch in the ”OFF” position. They will not go off until the engine
switch is turned off.
To turn on the other exterior lights and instrument panel lights,
twist the knob to the first clickstop.
Twist the knob to the second clickstop to turn on the headlights
to full intensity for driving at night.
The automatic light control sensor is on top center of the
instrument panel.
Do not place anything on the instrument panel, and/or do not
affix anything on the windshield to block this sensor.
When the headlights come on, the lights automatically turn off
about 30 seconds after any of the doors is opened and closed
with the engine switch off.* To turn them on again, select the
engine switch in “IG−ON” mode, or turn the headlight switch off
and then twist the knob until the first or second clickstop.
If you are going to park for over one week, make sure the
headlight switch is off.
When setting the knob to the third clickstop (”AUTO”), the
headlights will automatically adjust to full intensity and/or turn
on the other lights depending on the darkness of the
surroundings. Likewise, as the surroundings become brighter,
the headlights will turn to reduced intensity, ultimately turning
off the other lights.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the lights on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
When the headlight switch is on with all the doors locked and
the trunk closed, pushing the ”LOCK” button on the electronic
key turns off the headlights.
NOTE:
*The time before turning off the lights can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
47
SWITCHES
Automatic headlight leveling system
The headlight beam level is always maintained automatically
at the proper level in all loading conditions so that your
headlights do not dazzle other road users.
If there is a problem somewhere in this system, the message
“CHECK HEADLIGHT” appears on the multi−information
display. At this time, the master warning light comes on and a
warning tone sounds. If the warning message appears, have
your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
If you do not want to activate the system, you can cancel
the system.
Adaptive Front Lighting System cancel switch is located in the
switch box.
G12017
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) provides the proper
headlight beam level according to the current driving
conditions. This system moves the headlight beam left or right
according to the turning angle of the tires. The synergy of this
system and the automatic headlight leveling system improves
visibility at the intersections and curves.
Push the button to use the switch box. To cancel the
system, push the “AFS OFF” switch. To turn it on, push
it again.
The system operates when the vehicle speed increases above
10 km/h (6 mph), and stops when the vehicle speed drops
below 10 km/h (6 mph).
When the system is canceled, the “AFS OFF” indicator lights
up in the instrument cluster.
The system can operate within the limited range of the tires
turning angle.
If the system fails, the indicator light in the instrument cluster
will flash. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer.
After operation, be sure to close the switch box to its original
position.
48
SWITCHES
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when not in
use while driving.
HEADLIGHT DIMMER AND TURN
SIGNAL SWITCHES
G12004
For high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back for low
beam. For the headlight flasher, pull it further back.
A blue light in the instrument cluster indicates high beam or
headlight flasher is on.
The headlight flasher works even when the headlight switch is
off.
49
SWITCHES
FOG LIGHT SWITCH
G12005
G12006
For signaling turns, move the lever up or down in the
conventional manner.
The engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode.
The turn signal is self−cancelling after a turn, but after a lane
change, you may have to cancel it by hand. You can also signal
a lane change by moving the turn signal lever partway and
holding it there.
If the green light in the instrument cluster flashes faster than
normal, it indicates that the front or rear turn signal bulb has
burned out. If this indicator light does not come on, the fuse
or the indicator light itself has probably failed.
50
To turn on the fog lights, twist the band of the headlight
lever to the fog light mark. They will come on only when
the headlights are on low beam.
When the fog lights are on, the indicator lights up in the
instrument cluster.
SWITCHES
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCHES
Variable intermittent wipers
G12007
The wiper lever must be in the ”INT” position.
The time interval between sweeps is shortened when the
vehicle speed increases. When the vehicle speed reaches
more than about 20 km/h (12 mph) with the interval adjuster
twisted down to the lowest position, the time interval becomes
the shortest 1.5 seconds.
If you stop the vehicle with the wiper switch in the “LO” position,
the wiper speed automatically changes from low speed to
intermittent operation speed.* This function does not work with
the interval adjuster twisted down to the lowest position.
NOTE:
* This feature can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
For mist wiper operations (a single wipe), pull the lever up
and release it.
1 Interval adjuster
2 Washer on
To turn the wipers on, move the lever down until you reach
the desired speed setting.
The engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode.
There are 3 settings:
”INT” position: Intermittent operation
”LO” position: Low speed operation
”HI” position: High speed operation
Twist the interval adjuster upward to increase the wiping
time interval between sweeps, and downward to decrease
it.
To make the washer squirt, push the lever toward you and
release it.
If the wiper lever is in the “OFF” position, the wipers will
automatically make 3 wipes and then a single wipe later to
sweep the windshield completely.* The interval between the
3 wipes and the last wipe will depend on the vehicle speed.
The last sweep does not happen if the vehicle speed exceeds
about 170 km/h (106 mph).
NOTE:
*This function can be changed as follows:
The time before the last single wipe can be set for
about 3 seconds.
The last single wipe can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
51
SWITCHES
The warning message “LOW WASHER FLUID” is displayed in
the multi−information display when the fluid level in the tank
becomes very low. For information on adding washer fluid, see
“Adding washer fluid” on page 589.
In cold weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before
using the washer. This will help prevent icing, which could
block your vision.
Rain−sensing windshield wipers
G12008
NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may
scratch the glass.
1 Automatic control adjuster
2 Washer on
To turn the wipers on, move the lever down until you reach
the desired speed setting.
The engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode.
There are 3 settings:
“AUTO” position: Automatic operation
“LO” position: Low speed operation
“HI” position: High speed operation
52
SWITCHES
Automatic operation*
The wiper speed is determined by the vehicle speed and
the amount of raindrops and sunlight detected by the
automatic wiper control sensor.
Twist the automatic control adjuster in the “–” direction to
lower the sensitivity, and the “+” direction to boost the
sensitivity.
With the engine switch turned off, if the windshield sensor is
touched by reason of cleaning the windshield or for any other
reason, either of the following operations may cause automatic
wiper activation.
Turning the engine switch on with the wiper lever in the
“AUTO” position.
Turning the engine switch on and move the wiper lever
down in the “AUTO” position.
Even with the wiper lever in the “AUTO” position, the system
will switch to intermittent operations if the system malfunctions.
G12009
The sensor is on the inside of the windshield as shown above.
The system will turn off if the windshield gets extremely hot (at
more than 80C or 176F) or cold (at less than –10C or 14F).
When the engine switch is turned off with the wiper lever in the
“AUTO” position, and then the engine switch is turned on
again, the automatic operation may not work even if raindrops
are on the windshield.
In this case, move the lever to another position and return it to
the “AUTO” position again.
NOTE:
*Automatic operation can be changed to an intermittent
operation.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
53
SWITCHES
CAUTION
For mist wiper operations (a single wipe), pull the lever up
and release it.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught between the
wipers and windshield.
To make the washer squirt, pull the lever toward you and
release it.
When the wiper lever is in the “AUTO” position with the
engine switch on, the wipers could operate
automatically in the following cases:
If the wiper lever is in the “OFF” position, the wipers will
automatically make 3 wipes and then a single wipe later to
sweep the windshield completely.* The interval between the
3 wipes and the last wipe will depend on the vehicle speed.
The last sweep does not happen if the vehicle speed exceeds
about 170 km/h (106 mph).
If you touch the upper center of the windshield
adjacent to the sensor.
If you wipe the upper center of the windshield
(adjacent to which the sensor is located) with a towel.
If the windshield vibrates.
If you touch the sensor.
NOTE:
*This function can be changed as follows:
The time before the last single wipe can be set for
about 3 seconds.
The last single wipe can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
The warning message “LOW WASHER FLUID” is displayed in
the multi−information display when the fluid level in the tank
becomes very low. For information on adding washer fluid, see
“Adding washer fluid” on page 589.
When the headlights are on and the washers are activated by
pushing the windshield washer switch, the headlight cleaner
operates once automatically.
In cold weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before
using the washer. This will help prevent icing, which could
block your vision.
The rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger
automatically turns on when you operate the wipers.
54
SWITCHES
NOTICE
Shifting the windshield wiper position
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may
scratch the glass.
G12020
1 Rest position
2 Retracted position
The wiper blades retract under the hood when the wipers are
turned off.
In the following cases, the wipers should be shifted from the
retracted position to the rest position above the hood level.
When cleaning the windshield
When inspecting or replacing the wipers
When the retraction may be obstructed by snow, etc., at the
bottom of the windshield
Other than the above cases, keep the wipers in the retracted
position.
55
SWITCHES
G12021
More than 10 cm (3.9 in.)
To shift the windshield wipers from retracted to rest
position, hold the connection of the wiper arm and wiper
blade and pull it upward along the windshield glass with
the force of about 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf.).
NOTICE
To prevent the wiper blades from being deformed, be
sure to hold the connection of the wiper arm and wiper
blade securely.
56
G12022
To return the windshield wipers to retracted position,
push the connection of the wiper arm and wiper blade
downward.
NOTICE
To prevent the wiper blades from being deformed, be
sure to hold the connection of the wiper arm and wiper
blade securely.
SWITCHES
HEADLIGHT CLEANER SWITCH
The headlight cleaner switch is located in the switch box.
G12010
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when not in
use while driving.
NOTICE
Do not turn the headlight cleaner on with the washer
fluid tank empty. It may cause the cleaner motor to
overheat.
Push the button to use the switch box. To spray fluid on
the headlights, push the switch with the headlights on.
The engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode.
The warning message “LOW WASHER FLUID” is displayed in
the multi−information display when the fluid level in the tank
becomes very low. For information on adding washer fluid, see
“Adding washer fluid” on page 589.
After operation, be sure to close the switch box to its original
position.
57
SWITCHES
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
REAR VIEW MIRROR DEFOGGER
SWITCH
G12011
CAUTION
Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them
when the switch is on.
If further defrosting or defogging is desired, simply actuate the
switch again. When the surface has cleared, push the switch
once again to turn the defogger off. Continuous use may cause
the battery to discharge, especially during stop−and−go
driving. The defogger is not designed to dry rain water or to
melt snow.
If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use
a spray de−icer before operating the switch.
NOTICE
To turn the electric rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger on, push the switch.
The engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode.
The thin heater wires on the inside of the rear window and the
heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear
the surface. Keep your hands off the mirror faces when the
switch is on. An indicator light is on when the defogger is
operating.
The system will automatically shut off when the defogger has
operated about 15 minutes.
58
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or
connectors.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn
the switch off when the engine is not running.
SWITCHES
POWER WINDOW SWITCHES
G12023
G12012
Operating the switches
1
2
3
4
For driver’s window
For front passenger’s window
For left rear window
For right rear window
To raise or lower the windows, use the switch on each
door. The passengers’ windows can also be controlled by
the switches on the driver’s door.
To lower the window, push the switch halfway down. Pull
it up to raise the window. The window glass moves as long
as the switch is operated.
Automatic operation: To fully raise or lower the window
automatically, pull the switch fully up or push it fully down.
To stop the window partway, lightly push or pull the switch in
the opposite direction and then release it.
The power windows work when the engine switch is selected
in “IG−ON” mode.
Retained accessory power operation: Even if the engine
switch is off with all the doors closed, the window can be
operated until any of the doors is opened (or for about 45
seconds).
59
SWITCHES
Operating the window lock switch
Operating the windows from outside the
vehicle
The windows can be operated using a mechanical key.*
G12013
Indicator light
NOTE:
*This feature can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
G12014
With the window lock switch pressed in, only the driver’s
window can be raised or lowered.
The indicator lights on the switches tell you which of the
switches can be operated.
Even with the window lock switch pressed in, the windows will
be opened from outside the vehicle using a mechanical key or
wireless remote control.
Insert the mechanical key into the key hole on the driver’s
side.
To close the windows: Turn the key in the locking direction
and hold it.
After the door is locked, the windows begin to close. To stop
in the middle, return the key.
To open the windows: Turn the key in the unlocking direction
and hold it.
After the door is unlocked, the windows begin to open. To stop
in the middle, return the key.
60
SWITCHES
This function will work even with the window lock switch
pressed in.
CAUTION
The windows also can be opened using the wireless remote
control. For details, see page 29.
To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the
following.
Jam protection function
During automatic raising operation, retained accessory power
raising operation or raising operation using the mechanical key
from the outside, the window stops and is lowered if something
gets caught between the window and window frame.
If the window receives a strong impact, this function may work
even if nothing is caught.
If the battery is disconnected or run down
The power window may not operate automatically and the jam
protection function will not function correctly after you
reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. At this time, the
indicator lights of the switches will flash. In any of these cases,
you should normalize the power window on each door.
Before you close the power windows, always make
sure there is nobody around the power windows. You
must also make sure the heads, hands and other
parts of the bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If someone’s neck,
head or hands get caught in a closing window, it
could result in death or serious injury. When anyone
closes the power windows, make sure he or she
operates the windows safely.
When small children are in the vehicle, never let them
use the power window switches without supervision.
Use the window lock switch to prevent them from
making unexpected use of the switches.
To normalize the power windows:
1. Push down the power window switch of each door and lower
the windows halfway.
2. Pull up the switch until the windows close and hold the
switch for one second.
Make sure the windows open and close automatically. If the
power windows cannot be operated properly, have them
checked by your Lexus dealer.
61
SWITCHES
Be sure to turn the engine switch to “OFF” mode
when you leave your vehicle.
Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone
in your vehicle, especially when the engine switch is
on. Otherwise, he/she could use the power window
switches and get trapped in a window. Unattended
persons (particularly a small child) can be involved in
a serious accident.
EMERGENCY FLASHER SWITCH
G12015a
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate
the jam protection function intentionally, as it could
result in a serious injury.
The jam protection function may not work if
something gets caught just before the window fully
closed.
To turn on the emergency flashers, push the switch. To
turn them off, push the switch again.
All the turn signal lights will flash. The emergency flashers will
work with the engine running or off and with or without the
electronic key.
Turn on the emergency flashers to warn other drivers if you
must stop your vehicle where it might be a traffic hazard.
Always pull your vehicle as far off the road as possible.
The turn signal light switch will not work when the emergency
flashers are in operation.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the switch on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
62
SWITCHES
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
G12026
G12024
To turn on the heater, turn the dial as shown. The indicator
light (yellow) comes on.
To use the seat heater switches, pull the lever to slide the
rear console box cover backward.
The engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode.
The heating level will be increased as you turn the dial to the
higher number.
To disable this function, turn the dial to the “0” position. The
indicator light goes off. Keep the dial in this position when not
in use.
G12025
1 For driver’s seat
2 For front passenger’s seat
63
SWITCHES
CAUTION
NOTICE
Occupants must use caution when operating the seat
heater because they may experience minor burns even
at low temperatures. Use extra caution for;
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and
do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into
the seat.
Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons
or persons with physical disabilities
When cleaning the seats, do not use organic
substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol,
gasoline, etc.). They may damage the heater and seat
surface.
Persons who have sensitive skin
Persons who are exhausted
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs which
induce sleep (sleeping drug, cold remedy, etc.).
To prevent the seat from overheating, do not use the
seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating
objects which cover the seat.
64
To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn
the switches off when the engine is not running.
SWITCHES
SEAT VENTILATOR/HEATER
SWITCHES
The seats can be warmed and deliver airflow from the seat
surface using seat ventilator/heater switches.
G12027
G12028
1 For driver’s seat
2 For front passenger’s seat
To use the seat heater/ventilator switches, pull the lever to
slide the rear console box cover backward.
65
SWITCHES
Seat ventilator
NOTICE
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and
do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into
the seat.
G12029
When cleaning the seats, do not use organic
substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol,
gasoline, etc.). They may damage the seat ventilation
/ heating system and seat surface.
When cleaning the seats, fully wring out a towel to be
used.
The wet seats may cause the seat
ventilation/heating system to malfunction.
To turn on the seat ventilator, turn the dial as shown. The
indicator light (green) comes on.
The engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode.
More air will be delivered as you turn the dial to the higher
number.
After the switch is turned on, it takes several minutes until you
feel cool.
To disable this function, turn the dial to the “0” position. The
indicator light goes off. Keep the dial in this position when not
in use.
66
To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn
the switches off when the engine is not running.
SWITCHES
Seat heater
CAUTION
Occupants must use caution when operating the seat
heater because they may experience minor burns even
at low temperatures. Use extra caution for;
G12030
Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons
or persons with physical disabilities
Persons who have sensitive skin
Persons who are exhausted
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs which
induce sleep (sleeping drug, cold remedy, etc.).
To turn on the seat heater, turn the dial as shown. The
indicator light (yellow) comes on.
The engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode.
To prevent the seat from overheating, do not use the
seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating
objects which cover the seat.
The heating level will be increased as you turn the dial to the
higher number.
To disable this function, turn the dial to the “0” position. The
indicator light goes off. Keep the dial in this position when not
in use.
67
SWITCHES
NOTICE
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and
do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into
the seat.
When cleaning the seats, do not use organic
substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol,
gasoline, etc.).
They may damage the seat
ventilation/heating system and seat surface.
When cleaning the seats, fully wring out a towel to be
used.
The wet seats may cause the seat
ventilation/heating system to malfunction.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn
the switches off when the engine is not running.
68
SECTION
1–3
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Gauges, meters and service reminder
indicators
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light sensitive optitron meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi−information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
70
71
72
73
74
84
98
69
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
FUEL GAUGE
See the inner back cover for fuel capacity and recommended
fuel selection.
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
G13001
G13002
Low fuel level warning light
The gauge indicates the approximate quantity of fuel
remaining in the tank when the engine switch is selected
in “IG−ON” mode.
It is a good idea to keep the tank over 1/4 full.
If the fuel level approaches ”E” or the low fuel level warning light
comes on, fill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank,
the fuel gauge needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than usual.
If the fuel tank is completely empty, the malfunction indicator
lamp comes on. Fill the fuel tank immediately.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the
indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
70
Normal range
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature when
the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. The
engine operating temperature will vary with changes in
weather and engine load.
If the needle points to the red zone or higher, stop your vehicle
and allow the engine to cool.
Your vehicle may overheat during severe operating conditions,
such as:
Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
Reducing speed or stopping after high speed driving.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Idling for a long period with the air conditioning on in
stop−and−go traffic.
TACHOMETER
NOTICE
Do not remove the thermostat in the engine cooling
system as this may cause the engine to overheat. The
thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant
to keep the temperature of the engine within the
specified operating range.
G13003
Do not continue driving with an overheated engine.
See ”If your vehicle overheats” on page 473.
The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of
rpm (revolutions per minute). Use it while driving to
prevent engine over−revving.
Driving with the engine running too fast causes excessive
engine wear and poor fuel economy. Remember, in most
cases the slower the engine speed, the greater the fuel
economy.
NOTICE
Do not let the indicator needle get into the red zone. This
may cause severe engine damage.
71
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
ODOMETER AND TRIP METER
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. The twin trip meter records two different
distances independently.
For example, you can use one meter to calculate the fuel
economy and the other to measure the distance on each trip.
G13045
To change the trip meter indication from one trip to the
other, push the “ODO TRIP” change switch. To set the A
trip meter to zero, display the A meter reading, then push
the “RESET” switch. The same applies for the B trip
meter.
The data of trip meters will be cancelled if the electrical power
source is disconnected.
This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters. To
change the mode indication, use the “ODO TRIP” switch.
After operation, be sure to close the switch box to its original
position.
The “ODO TRIP” switch is located in the switch box.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when not in
use while driving.
G13004
Push the button to use the switch box and then push the
“ODO TRIP” switch.
72
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
LIGHT SENSITIVE OPTITRON
METER
Light sensitive optitron meter reduces unwanted glare of
the instrument cluster to provide a fine view for the driver.
The meter is originally set to “AUTO−Norm” mode, so the
reflection of the instrument cluster is adjusted
automatically by tinting the cluster glass depending on
the lighting condition of your surroundings.
Push the “MODE” switch once and then again within 6
seconds. Each time you push the button, the mode changes
in the following order:
1. “AUTO−Norm” . . . . Recommended mode
2. “AUTO−Lo” . . . . . . The cluster glass is tinted with the
surroundings darker than in “AUTO−Norm” mode.
3. “AUTO−Hi” . . . . . . . The cluster glass is tinted with the
surroundings brighter than in “AUTO−Norm” mode.
There are “AUTO” and “MANUAL” modes. To change the
mode as you like, follow the procedure below.
4. “MANUAL−1” . . . . . The cluster glass is adjusted in deep
tints.
The reflection control switch is located in the switch box.
5. “MANUAL−2” . . . . . The cluster glass is adjusted in neutral
tints.
6. “MANUAL−3” . . . . . The cluster glass is adjusted in light
tints.
G13044
7. “MANUAL−4” . . . . . The cluster glass is not tinted,
however, if the surroundings are very bright, it is automatically
adjusted in light tints.
The setting display goes off automatically about 6 seconds
after the “MODE” switch is pushed. The mode shown last is
set.
Push the button to use the switch box. When you push the
“MODE” switch, the present setting appears on the
multi−information display.
The cluster glass may not be tinted in “MANUAL−1”,
“MANUAL−2” or “MANUAL−3” mode in the night or cloudy dark
day.
When the ambient temperature in the vehicle interior is low, it
may take time for the cluster glass to be tinted.
After operation, be sure to close the switch box to its original
position.
73
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when not in
use while driving.
SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
AND WARNING BUZZERS
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
(a)
or
(Red indicator and buzzer)
G13106
(b)
(Yellow indicator)
DO THIS.
If parking brake is off,
stop immediately and
contact Lexus dealer.
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer. If brake
system warning light
(red) is also on, stop
immediately and
contact Lexus dealer.
The light sensitive optitron meter sensor is located under the
high mounted stoplight.
NOTICE
(Indicator and buzzer)
Do not apply window tint or a sticker on the rear
window. Otherwise the light sensitive optitron meter
may not operate properly.
If snow, mud, frost or the like is attached to the rear
window just behind the sensor, remove it soon, or the
light sensitive optitron meter may not operate
properly.
74
Fasten driver’s seat
belt.
(c)
(d)
WG5
Fasten front
passenger’s seat belt.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
DO THIS.
(e)
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer immediately.
(j)
(f)
Stop immediately and
contact Lexus dealer.
(k)
(g)
or
See multi−information
display.
(h)
(i)
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
or
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
If brake system
warning light (red) is
also on, stop
immediately and
contact Lexus dealer.
DO THIS.
Close all doors.
WG10
If flashing, take vehicle
to Lexus dealer.
(l)
WG6
Adjust tire inflation
pressure.
If light remains on,
contact Lexus dealer.
(m)
WG8
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
(n)
(o)
WG7
Low fuel level
warning light
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
Fill up tank.
75
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
(p)
Key reminder
buzzer
DO THIS.
Turn off the engine
switch.
(a) Brake System Warning Light (red) and
Buzzer
This light comes on in the following cases when the engine
switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode.
When the parking brake is applied ...
GS430—This light comes on for a few seconds when the
engine is started even after the parking brake is released.
GS300—This light comes on for a few seconds when the
engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode even after the
parking brake is released.
If you drive your vehicle without releasing the parking brake,
the buzzer sounds and the message “PARK BRAKE” appears
on the multi−information display.
When the brake fluid level is low ...
CAUTION
It is dangerous to continue driving normally when the
brake fluid level is low.
Have your vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer in the
following case:
The light does not come on even if the parking brake is
applied when the engine is started.
The light does not come on even if the engine is started with
the parking brake released.
76
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
CAUTION
If either of the following conditions occurs, immediately
stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
The light does not turn off even after the parking
brake is released while the engine is running.
In this case, the brakes may not work properly and
your stopping distance will become longer. Depress
the brake pedal firmly and bring the vehicle to an
immediate stop.
The brake system warning light remains on together
with the “ABS” warning light.
In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will
fail but also the vehicle will become extremely
unstable during braking.
GS430 only—Any of the following conditions may occur,
but do not indicate the malfunction:
The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the engine
is started. It is normal if it turns off after a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the
warning light and buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off and
the buzzer stops sounding after a few seconds.
You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment
after the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed
repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake
system, and it is not a malfunction.
(b) Brake System Warning Light (yellow)
The light comes on when the engine switch is selected in
“IG−ON” mode.
GS430—If the engine is started, and the traction control
system, vehicle stability control system and hill−start assist
control system work properly, the light turns off after a few
seconds. Thereafter, if any part of the system malfunctions,
the light comes on again.
GS300—If the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, and
the traction control system, vehicle stability control system and
hill−start assist control system work properly, the light turns off
after a few seconds. Thereafter, if any part of the system
malfunctions, the light comes on again.
Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
(c) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light and
Buzzer
The light and buzzer act as a reminder to have the driver buckle
up the seat belt.
77
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Once the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, the
reminder light flashes and buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat
belt is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the belt, the light
continues flashing and the buzzer stops after about 4 to 8
seconds.
If the vehicle speed exceeds about 15 km/h (10 mph) with the
driver’s seat belt reminder light flashing, beeps sound
intermittently for about 20 seconds.
(d) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Reminder
Light
The light acts as a reminder to have the front passenger buckle
up the seat belt.
Once the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, the
reminder light flashes if a passenger sits in the front passenger
seat and does not fasten the seat belt. Unless the front
passenger fastens the belt, the light continues flashing.
However, if a front passenger uses an additional seat cushion,
the indicator light may not flash even when the seat belt is not
buckled up.
If luggage or other load is placed on the front passenger seat,
depending on its weight and how it is placed on the seat,
built−in sensors in the seat cushion may detect the pressure,
causing the reminder light to flash.
78
(e) SRS Warning Light
The indicator comes on when the engine switch is
selected in “IG−ON” mode. It goes off after about 6
seconds. This means the SRS airbags and seat belt
pretensioners are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch,
occupant detection sensor, front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning
light, interconnecting wiring and power sources.
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.
When the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, the
light does not come on or remains on for more than 6
seconds.
The light comes on while driving.
If the light stays on, it indicates that the SRS driver and front
passenger airbags, SRS side and curtain shield airbags and/or
seat belt pretensioners have a problem.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(f) Charging System Warning Light
(g) Malfunction Indicator Lamp
This warning light comes on when the engine switch is
selected in “IG−ON” mode, and goes off when the engine is
started.
This lamp comes on when the engine switch is selected in
“IG−ON” mode and goes off after the engine starts. This
means that the warning light system is operating properly.
When there are problems in the charging system while the
engine is running, the warning light comes on.
If the lamp remains on, or the lamp comes on while
driving, first check the followings:
NOTICE
When the charging system warning light comes on
while the engine is running, malfunctions such as the
engine drive belt being broken may have occurred. If
the warning light comes on, immediately stop the
vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
Empty fuel tank
If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately.
Loose fuel tank cap
If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely tighten it.
These cases are temporary malfunctions. The malfunction
indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel tank cap is not
loose...
There is a problem somewhere in the engine, emission
control system, electronic throttle control system, automatic
transmission electrical system or warning light system itself.
Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the
vehicle.
If this lamp comes on and engine speed does not increase
when the accelerator pedal is depressed, there may be a
problem somewhere in the electronic throttle control system.
79
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the
accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
(i) ”ABS” Warning Light
Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system
is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and the engine switch is
selected in “ACC” or “OFF” mode.
GS430—If the anti−lock brake system and the brake assist
system work properly, the light turns off in a few seconds after
the engine is started. Thereafter, if either system malfunctions,
the light comes on again.
Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
GS300—If the anti−lock brake system and the brake assist
system work properly, the light turns off in a few seconds after
the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. Thereafter, if
either system malfunctions, the light comes on again.
Your vehicle may not pass a state emission inspection if the
malfunction indicator lamp remains on. Contact your Lexus
dealer to check your vehicle’s emission control system and
OBD (On−Board Diagnostics) system before taking your
vehicle for the inspection.
For details, see “Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M)
programs” on page 505.
(h) Master Warning Light
If any system malfunctions, this warning light comes on or
flashes together with a warning tone, and a warning message
appears on the multi−information display. When the cause of
the problem is eliminated, the warning tone and message on
the display will turn off.
The light comes on when the engine switch is selected in
“IG−ON” mode.
When the “ABS” warning light is on, the anti−lock brake system
and the brake assist system do not operate, but the brake
system still operates conventionally.
If any of the following conditions occur, this indicates a
malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by
the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible to service the vehicle.
The light does not come on when the engine switch is
selected in “IG−ON” mode.
The light remains on after the engine is started (GS430), or
remains on after the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON”
mode (GS300).
The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
80
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the
brake system warning light (red), immediately stop your
vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will fail
but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable
during braking.
GS430 only—Either of the following conditions may
occur, but does not indicate a malfunction:
The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the engine
is started. It is normal if it turns off after a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the
light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds.
(k) Adaptive Front Lighting System Off
Indicator Light
This light comes on when you turn off the Adaptive Front
Lighting System (AFS) by pushing the “AFS OFF” switch.
If there is a problem somewhere in the Adaptive Front Lighting
System (AFS) or automatic headlight leveling system, the light
flashes. At this time, both systems do not operate properly.
Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
(l) Tire pressure warning light
This light comes on when the engine switch is selected in
“IG−ON” mode. If the tire pressure warning system works
properly and tire inflation pressure is appropriate, the light
goes off after a few seconds.
(j) Open Door Warning Light
This light comes on or flashes in the following cases when the
engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode.
This light remains on until all the doors are completely closed.
When the low tire inflation pressure is detected while
driving...
If any tire has low inflation pressure, the light comes on.
The light goes off after the tire inflation pressure is adjusted
to a specified level.
When initializing the system...
If initialization is completed, the light blinks three times.
When the system malfunctions...
If the system malfunctions, the light blinks.
81
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your
vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
(m) Electric Power Steering System Warning
Light
The light comes on when the engine switch is selected in
“IG−ON” mode. If the electric power steering system works
properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. If the system
has malfunctions, the light comes on again.
If the following conditions occur, this indicates a
malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by
the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible to service the vehicle.
The light does not come on when the engine switch is
selected in “IG−ON” mode or remains on.
The light stays on while you are driving.
The warning light turning on while racing the engine for a long
time may not indicate malfunction. To turn off the light, restart
the engine and start driving.
CAUTION
If the electric power steering system warning light
comes on, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible. In this case, more effort is required
for the steering wheel to turn than usual. Drive your
vehicle while firmly gripping the steering wheel.
82
(n) Pre−Collision System Warning Light
The light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the
pre−collision system.
The light comes on when the engine switch is selected in
“IG−ON” mode. If the system works properly, the light goes off
after a few seconds.
If the light does not come on when the engine switch is selected
in “IG−ON” mode, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus
dealer.
(o) Low Fuel Level Warning Light
This light comes on when the fuel level in the tank becomes
very low. Fill the tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank,
the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual.
(p) Key Reminder Buzzer
This buzzer acts as a reminder to turn off the engine when you
bring out the electronic key from the vehicle with the engine
switch in “IG−ON” or “ACC” mode.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
How to check all the service reminder
indicators
(except the low fuel level warning light):
WG6
WG7
WG8
The following service reminder indicators go off after a few
seconds.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Open the door.
The following service reminder indicator should come on. It
goes off when you close the door completely.
WG6
WG8
WG10
GS300 only—The above and following service reminder
indicators go off after a few seconds.
3. Select the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode.
or
The following service reminder indicators should come on.
(yellow)
The following service reminder indicator goes off after about 6
seconds.
or
or
The lights other than the slip indicator light may stay on for
about 60 seconds after the engine is started. It is normal if they
go out after a while.
(red)
or
WG10
(yellow)
If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not
function as described above, have it checked by your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
83
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
MULTI−INFORMATION DISPLAY
(a) Cruise information
The following information is shown with the engine switch
in “IG−ON” mode. Each time you push the “DISP” switch,
the displayed information is changed.
Outside temperature
G13037
Available driving distance
Average fuel consumption after being refueled
Current fuel consumption
Blank
The multi−information display provides various
information, including your vehicle’s driving condition,
outside temperature, and warning messages if your
vehicle is in trouble.
During ordinary driving, cruise information or graphic
information is displayed. However, if any problem occurs
in your vehicle, the display changes to a warning message
screen.
84
The displayed cruise information values indicate the general
driving condition and may not always reflect precise and actual
conditions.
Outside temperature
g13047
The outside temperature is displayed. For details, see
“Outside temperature display” on page 109.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Available driving distance
g13039
The available driving distance is calculated and displayed
depending on the amount of remaining fuel.
Average fuel consumption after refueling
g13046
Current fuel consumption
g13040
The current fuel consumption is calculated and displayed
based on the driving distance and the fuel consumption
at 20 revolutions of the engine.
The value is updated every 0.5 seconds.
If you are driving at low speeds just before stopping, the
accurate figure may not be shown.
The average fuel consumption after refueling is
calculated and displayed based on the total driving
distance and the total fuel consumption after refueling.
The value is updated every 10 seconds.
When refueling, be sure to stop your vehicle and turn the
engine switch off.
The average fuel consumption could not be calculated in either
of the following cases:
Refueled by opening the fuel filler door using the manual
lever in the trunk
Refueled with a small quantity of gasoline
85
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(b) Graphic information
(c) Warning messages
The following graphic information is shown on the
display.
The following warning messages are shown on the
multi−information display.
Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped)
Open Door Warning
Dynamic radar cruise control display (if equipped)
See page 372 for intuitive parking assist and page 401 for
dynamic radar cruise control.
G13041
G13006
If you push the intuitive parking assist switch or turn the engine
switch on with the main switch of the intuitive parking assist on,
the intuitive parking assist screen appears for 2 seconds and
then the multi−information display returns to the previous
screen.
G13042
G13043
When you push the main switch of the dynamic radar cruise
control, the dynamic radar cruise control screen appears.
When you push the “DISP” switch with the radar cruise control
screen on the display, the screen changes to cruise
information display.
Hood Open Warning
G13008
86
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Trunk Open Warning
G13007
When any door, hood or trunk is open with the engine
switch in “IG−ON” mode, a message appears to let you
know which door, the hood or trunk is open. If you
continue driving in this condition, the master warning
light flashes and a warning tone sounds when the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 km/h (3 mph).
If any of the above warning messages appears, stop your
vehicle and close the door, hood or trunk securely.
Moon Roof Warning
G13013
If the driver’s door is opened with the engine switch
turned off and the moon roof opened, the master warning
light flashes, a warning tone sounds and the above
message appears.
Parking Brake Release Warning
G13009
If you start driving with the parking brake applied, the
master warning light flashes, a warning tone sounds and
the above message appears when the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 km/h (3 mph).
If the above warning message appears, stop your vehicle and
release the parking brake.
Headlight Leveling System Failure Warning
G13010
If there is a problem in the automatic headlight leveling
system, the master warning light comes on, a warning
tone sounds and the above message appears.
If the above warning message appears, have your vehicle
checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
When you leave your vehicle, be sure to close the moon roof.
87
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Rear Lights System Failure Warning
G13011
If there is a problem in the rear lights system (tail lights,
license plate light, stop lights, rear side marker light, high
mounted stoplight), the master warning light comes on, a
warning tone sounds and the above message appears.
If the above warning message appears, have your vehicle
checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Low Washer Fluid Warning
Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning
G13012
When the engine oil pressure becomes too low, the
master warning light flashes, a warning tone sounds and
the above message appears.
If this message appears while you are driving, pull off the road
to a safe place and stop the engine immediately. Call a Lexus
dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.
The message may appear when the oil level is extremely low.
It is not designed to indicate low oil level, and the oil level must
be checked using the oil level dipstick.
G13020
NOTICE
When the fluid level in the tank becomes very low, the
master warning light flashes, a warning tone sounds and
the above message appears.
Fill the tank as soon as possible.
88
Do not drive the vehicle while this warning message is
displayed − even for one block. It may ruin the engine.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Low Engine Oil Level Warning
Engine Oil Maintenance Reset Warning (U.S.A.
only)
G13022
G13033
When the engine oil level is too low, the master warning
light comes on, a warning tone sounds, and the above
message appears.
Add oil as soon as possible. (For instructions, see “Checking
the engine oil level” on page 530.)
While driving on steep inclines or rough roads which causes
the vehicle to substantially sway or on curves, this message
may appear due to the movement of engine oil in the engine.
In normal conditions, due to engine oil consumption, this
message may appear earlier than the specified service interval
of the scheduled maintenance. This is because the engine oil
is consumed to the low level within the scheduled maintenance
interval and does not indicate a problem. (For detailed
information, see “Facts about engine oil consumption” on page
528.)
NOTICE
This message indicates that the engine oil maintenance
data has been reset. After replacing the engine oil, be sure
to reset the maintenance data.
To reset the data, perform the following operations:
1. Push the “ODO TRIP” switch in the switch box to
change the display to blank.
2. Turn the engine switch off.
3. Turn the engine switch on with the trip meter “RESET”
switch held down.
4. Keep pushing the “RESET” switch for longer than 7
seconds after the engine switch is turned on.
After the above operation, the master warning light comes
on, a warning tone sounds and the above message
appears to inform you that the engine oil maintenance
data has been reset.
Continued engine operation with low engine oil will
damage the engine.
89
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Engine Oil Replacement Reminder (U.S.A. only)
G13035
G13034
If the driving range exceeds 4,500 miles after the engine
oil maintenance data is reset, the master warning light
comes on, a warning tone sounds and the above message
appears for about 15 seconds when you select the engine
switch in “IG−ON” mode.
90
Engine Oil Replacement Warning (U.S.A. only)
If the driving range exceeds 5,000 miles after the engine
oil maintenance data is reset, the master warning light
comes on, a warning tone sounds and the above message
appears.
This message indicates that the engine oil should be replaced
soon. If the message appears, it is recommended to inspect
the engine oil with the engine switch off. For details about
inspection, see “Checking the engine oil level” on page 530.
This message indicates that the engine oil should be replaced
as soon as possible. If the message appears, it is
recommended to inspect the engine oil with the engine switch
off. For details about inspection, see “Checking the engine oil
level” on page 530.
If the engine oil level is low, engine oil should be replaced.
Have it replaced at your Lexus dealer.
If the engine oil level is low, engine oil should be replaced.
Have it replaced at your Lexus dealer.
After the engine oil replacement, reset the engine oil
maintenance data and make sure the “OIL MAINT RESET”
appears on the display.
After the engine oil replacement, reset the engine oil
maintenance data and make sure the “OIL MAINT RESET”
appears on the display.
NOTICE
NOTICE
The warning message on the display is based on the
driving range after the engine oil maintenance data
reset. This is not based on the monitoring of dirty
condition of the engine oil.
The warning message on the display is based on the
driving range after the engine oil maintenance data
reset. This is not based on the monitoring of dirty
condition of the engine oil.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Electronic Brake System Failure Warning
G13100
Variable Gear Ratio Steering System Warning
(GS430 only)
G13028
G13027
GS430
GS300
If the above message appears and the brake system
warning light (yellow) comes on, the following systems do
not operate. (GS430 only—In some cases, the
multi−information display shows either “CHECK VSC” or
“CHECK ECB*” only.)
Traction control system
Vehicle stability control system
Hill−start assist control system
If the above message appears and the brake system
warning light (yellow) and “ABS” warning light come on,
the following systems do not operate. (GS430 only—In
some cases, the multi−information display shows either
“CHECK VSC” or “CHECK ECB*” only.)
Anti−lock brake system
Brake assist system
Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
If there is a problem in the variable gear ratio steering
system, the master warning light comes on and the above
message appears.
If this message appears, the system does not work. Although
it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked
by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Four−Wheel Drive System Warning (Four−wheel
drive models only)
G13021
If there is a problem in the four−wheel drive system, the
master warning light comes on, a warning tone sounds
and the above message appears.
If the above warning message appears, have your vehicle
checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
*: Electronically Controlled Brake System
91
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Tire Pressure Warning
G13026
G13025
When the low tire inflation pressure is detected while
driving, the tire pressure warning light and master
warning light come on, and the above message appears.
Adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning
message. If the message remains on, have your vehicle
checked by your Lexus dealer.
G13024
This message indicates the tire pressure warning system is
initialized. After replacing the tires or wheels, adjust all 4 tires
to specified tire inflation pressure and initialize the tire pressure
warning system. To initialize the system, start the engine and
push the tire pressure warning reset switch for longer than 3
seconds with the vehicle stopped. The above message
appears.
92
If there is a problem in the tire pressure warning system,
the tire pressure warning light blinks and master warning
light comes on, and the above message appears.
The tire pressure warning light system is not working properly.
In this case, it is probable that a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter is malfunctioning or the system is experiencing
signal interference. In the case of signal interference, the
warning message will turn off when the interference ends. If
the tire pressure warning light blinks and master warning light
comes on, and the above message appears frequently, have
your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Electronic Key System Warning
G13015
G13014
In the following cases, the master warning light flashes, a
warning tone sounds and the above message appears.
An electronic key is not detected in the vehicle when you
push the engine switch. In this case, the above message
appears for 8 seconds.
An electronic key is not detected in the vehicle because
someone has taken an electronic key outside of the vehicle
without turning the engine switch off. At this time, the
electronic key sounds an alarm. The above message turns
off if you turn the engine switch off or the entry function
detects an electronic key in the vehicle.
In addition to either of the above conditions, if you get out from
the vehicle, having an electronic key when the engine switch
is selected in “IG−ON” mode and the selector lever is in a
position other than “P”, “SHIFT TO P RANGE” and “KEY IS
NOT DETECTED” appear alternately.
If you get out from the vehicle, having an electronic key
when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode and
the selector lever is in a position other than “P”, the
master warning light flashes, a beep sounds inside the
vehicle and the above message appears. When you shift
the selector lever to the “P” position or start driving, the
beeping stops sounding, the above message turns off.
In addition to the above condition, if the entry function does not
detect an electronic key in the vehicle, “SHIFT TO P RANGE”
and “KEY IS NOT DETECTED” appear alternately.
G13016
If the entry function determines that the battery voltage is
low (2V to 3V) when the engine switch is turned off more
than 20 minutes after turned on, the master warning light
flashes, a warning tone sounds and the above message
appears.
If the above message appears, the battery needs to be
replaced. Although you can replace the battery referring to
“Replacing the battery ” on page 34, we recommend you have
it replaced by your Lexus dealer as it is easy to be scratched.
93
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Intuitive Parking Assist Warning
G13017
If the steering lock is malfunctioning, the master warning
light comes on, the engine switch indicator light blinks
amber and the above message appears.
The engine will not start in this case. Contact your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
G13018
If the steering lock is not unlocked due to the load applied
to the steering wheel when pushing the engine switch, the
master warning light comes on, the engine switch
indicator light blinks green and the above message
appears.
The engine will not start in this case. To start the engine, push
the engine switch again while turning the steering wheel in
either direction.
G13077
If icicles, snowflakes or mud gets on the ultrasonic
sensors of the intuitive parking assist when it is on, the
above message appears and the vehicle symbol and
indicator bars continue flashing until the suspected
sensor is cleaned.
Remove the foreign matter or deice the sensor, the intuitive
parking assist returns to normal.
G13076
If the ultrasonic sensor of the intuitive parking assist is
malfunctioning or a sensor cable is broken when it is on,
the malfunctioning sensor flashes, 2 beeps sound 5 times
and the above message appears.
The flashing sensor is disabled, but other sensors work
properly. Have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
94
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Radar Cruise Control Warning
G13074
G13073
If the system cannot easily measure the
vehicle−to−vehicle distance because of a dirty millimeter
wave radar sensor or grille cover while the dynamic radar
cruise control is on, the master warning light comes on
and the “CRUISE” indicator light flashes. At this time a
warning tone sounds and the above message appears.
If this message appears, clean the sensor and grille cover with
a soft cloth and try setting the preset speed again. If the dirt
is removed without cleaning, the system will automatically
enter the “RADAR READY” mode. If the system does not enter
the “RADAR READY” mode even after cleaning or the
message remains on the display, the system might be
malfunctioning. Although it is no problem to continue driving,
contact your Lexus dealer.
If the system cannot easily measure the
vehicle−to−vehicle distance because of the following
conditions while the dynamic radar cruise control is on,
the master warning light comes on, the “CRUISE”
indicator light flashes. At this time a warning tone sounds
and the above message appears.
The driving pattern selector switch is set to the snow
position mode.
It is determined that it is difficult to make a measurement
because of bad weather (such as extremely hot weather)
The wipers are operated at high speed with the wiper lever
in the “AUTO” position
In the following cases, the dynamic radar cruise control
switches to the “RADAR READY” mode:
The driving pattern selector switch is changed to the normal
or power position.
The wipers are stopped or are switched to low speed or
intermittent operation. (Including intermittent and stopped
wipers in the “AUTO” position)
95
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
In the above conditions, press the control lever upward in the
“+ RES” direction and release it. The dynamic radar cruise
control will be restored, however, even after the weather
clears, if the setting operation cannot be performed or if the
warning message still appears, the system might have
malfunctioned. Although it is no problem to continue driving,
contact your Lexus dealer.
G13075
If the system malfunction is detected when dynamic radar
cruise control is in the “RADAR READY” mode or
operating, the master warning light comes on and the
“CRUISE” indicator light flashes. At this time a warning
tone sounds and the above message appears.
If this message appears, stop your vehicle in a safe place, turn
the engine switch off, and then restart it to reset the system.
If the setting still cannot be made or the same message
appears again, the system might have malfunctioned.
Although it is no problem to continue driving, contact your
Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
While you are cruising with the dynamic radar cruise
control on, if the master warning light comes on, the
“CRUISE” indicator light flashes, “CHECK CRUISE
SYSTEM” appears on the multi−information display and
the warning tone sounds, turn the engine switch off and
then on again. If the function is cancelled again after
setting or if settings cannot be made, the dynamic radar
cruise control system may be malfunctioning.
Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your
vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
96
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Pre−Collision System Warning
The above conditions do not indicate a malfunction. If the
problem is removed, the warning lights and message go out
and the system returns to normal.
G13031
If the pre−collision system is malfunctioning, the
pre−collision system warning light and master warning
light comes on, a warning tone sounds and the above
message appears.
If the above message appears, the pre−collision system may
not operate. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
G13030
In the following conditions, the pre−collision system
warning light blinks, the master warning light comes on,
a warning tone sounds, and the above message appears.
The millimeter wave radar sensor or the grille cover is
dirty.
Clean the grille or sensor with a soft cloth to remove the dirt.
The pre−collision seat belts are activated repeatedly for
a short time.
The system turns off temporarily for overheating protection.
97
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT
CONTROL
The brightness of the instrument panel lights is
automatically adjusted at the maximum when the engine
switch is turned on.
Using the light control switch, you can also adjust the
brightness as you like. Perform the following operation.
Instrument panel light control switches are located in the
switch box.
However, if the brightness is automatically adjusted at the
maximum, pushing the switch cannot change the brightness.
And this switch cannot adjust the brightness of the outside
temperature display and clock on the instrument panel as well
as the touch screen.
Pushing the “MAX” switch will turn the brightness of all
indicators on the instrument panel at the maximum. The
intensity of the instrument panel lights will not be reduced when
the headlight switch is on with the brightness adjusted at the
maximum using the “MAX” switch.
When the light control switch is turned to minimum, the foot
lights and inside door handle lights will turn off.
After operation, be sure to close the switch box to its original
position.
G13005
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when not in
use while driving.
Light control switch
Push the button to use the switch box. And push the light
control switch upward to increase brightness and
downward to decrease it.
98
SECTION
1–4
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Interior equipment
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter and ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coin boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overhead console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk storage extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear electric sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tie−down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First−aid kit holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
100
101
102
106
106
109
110
111
112
113
114
118
119
120
121
122
122
123
125
125
99
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
SUN VISORS
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Front
G14002
G14003
To block out glare, move the sun visor as shown.
1
2
To block out glare from the front , swing the sun visor
down.
Rear
To block out glare from the side, remove the sun visor
from the hook and swing it to the side.
At this position, the vanity light may not come on.
3
To block out glare coming obliquely from behind you,
slide the visor backwards.
At this position, the vanity light does not come on.
100
G14052
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
To turn on or off the front and rear lights, push the interior
light switches.
“ON” switch—Keeps the lights on all the time.
PERSONAL LIGHTS
Front
“OFF” switch—Turns the lights off.
“DOOR” switch—If you get close to the vehicle (about 1 m (3
ft.) from each outside door handle, carrying an electronic key
or open a door, all the interior lights come on when the engine
switch is off. However, if the engine switch is already on, only
the interior light near the door you opened comes on.
G14004
The light(s) will go off when all the doors are closed. For
details, see “Illuminated entry system” on page 102.
Rear
G14005
To turn on the personal light, push the switch. To turn it
off, push the switch again.
101
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
For some models:
When you open a door with the interior lights in “DOOR”
position, the personal light near the door you opened will come
on. You can change this setting. For details, see the following
“Illuminated entry system”.
102
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
1 Outer foot lights
2 Steering spot light
3 Front interior lights (in “DOOR” position)
4 Selector lever spot light
5 Front personal lights
6 Inside door handle lights
7 Rear personal lights
8 Rear interior lights
9 Door courtesy lights
10 Foot lights
11 Front scuff lights
The outer foot lights, steering spot light and front and rear
interior lights will come on when you get close to the
vehicle (about 1 m (3 ft.) from the outside door handle),
carrying an electronic key, or open the door.* After all the
doors are closed, the lights remain on for about 15
seconds and then fade out.** (For details, see “Outer foot
lights” on page 212.)
NOTE:
*When you open a door other than the driver’s door, the front
and rear interior lights near the door you opened comes on.
**The duration of lighting can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
The foot lights and inside door handle lights will come on
when any of the doors are opened or the engine switch is
in “IG−ON” mode. After all the doors are closed and the
engine switch is turned off, the lights remain on for about
15 seconds and then fade out.*
NOTE:
*The duration of lighting can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
However, the lights go out immediately when all the doors are
locked and the engine switch is turned off.
The intensity of the foot lights and inside door handle lights can
be changed with the instrument panel light control switch. The
lights will be turned off when the light control switch is turned
to minimum. (For details, see “Instrument panel light control”
on page 98.)
Front scuff lights and courtesy lights
Front scuff lights and courtesy lights will come on when any of
the doors are opened. After all the doors are closed, the lights
will turn off.
However, in the following cases, the lights go out immediately:
All the doors are closed and the engine switch is selected
in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode.
All the doors are locked.
103
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Selector lever spot light
The selector lever spot light will come on when the engine
switch is selected in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode and the tail lights
are on. (For some models: The selector lever spot light will
come on when the engine switch is selected in “ACC” or
”IG−ON” mode.) When the selector lever is moved out of “P”
position, the intensity of the light will be reduced.
The intensity of the selector lever spot light can be changed
with the instrument panel light control switch. This light will be
turned off when the light control switch is turned to minimum.
Front and rear personal lights (for some models)
When you open a door, the personal light near the door you
opened will come on.
This setting can be changed. To change the setting, change
the engine switch from “OFF” to “IG−ON” mode while pushing
the front interior light switches “DOOR” and “ON” together.
Each time you perform this operation, the setting changes from
mode i to mode ii, iii and then back to i.
Mode i: When you open a door, the personal light near the door
you opened alone will come on. When you set this mode, the
front personal lights flash once.
Mode ii: When you open a door, all the personal lights will come
on. When you set this mode, the front personal lights flash
twice.
Mode iii: Opening a door will not turn on the personal lights.
When you set this mode, the front personal lights flash three
times.
104
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Lighting table
The lighting conditions are as follows: If several conditions concur, the lights may not operate as shown.
Inside door handle lights
& foot lights*
Front scuff lights, door
courtesy lights* & front
and rear personal lights
Selector lever spot light*
ON**
→Fade out about 15
seconds later
—
—
—
Locking all the doors
OFF
OFF
—
—
Opening the door(s)
ON
ON
ON
—
Closing all the doors
OFF
(ON for about 15 seconds before turned off)
OFF
(ON for about 15 seconds before turned off)
OFF
—
OFF
ON
(IG−ON only)
—
ON***
(When the tail lights
are on)
ON**
→Fade out about 15
seconds later
OFF
(ON for about 15 seconds before turned off)
—
OFF
Lighting condition
Getting close to the vehicle
with the electronic key in possession or unlocking any
doors
Turning the engine switch from
“OFF” to “ACC” or “IG−ON”
Turning off the engine switch
Steering spot light &
front and rear interior
lights
NOTE:
*The lights can be set to dim when the selector lever is moved out of “P” and the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode.
**The front and rear interior lights can be set not to be turned on.
***The selector lever spot light on some models will come on even with the tail lights off.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
105
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT
G14035a
To turn on the luggage compartment light, open the trunk
lid or push the switch. Closing the trunk lid will turn the
light off.
CLOCK
G14007
The digital clock indicates the time with the engine switch
in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode.
Vehicles with navigation system: The clock can be
corrected manually or automatically using signals from the
GPS. For details, see the separate “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.
Vehicles without navigation system: To adjust the clock or
set the daylight saving time, follow the procedures below.
106
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
G14054
1. Push the “INFO” button to display the setting screen.
G14055a
2. Touch the “Adjust Clock” switch to display the adjust
clock screen.
When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second click
stop, the brightness of the display will be reduced.
You can brighten the display. To adjust the brightness, see
“Instrument panel light control” on page 98.
107
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
(a) To adjust a clock
G14056
You can adjust the clock manually with “H”, “M” and “:00”
switches.
“H”: To set the hour.
“M”: To set the minute.
“:00”: To adjust the time to the nearest hour.
For example, if the “:00” switch is pressed when the time is
between 9:30 − 9:59 or between 10:01 − 10:29, the time will
change to 10:00.
If the electrical power source has been disconnected from the
clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00.
After adjustment, touch “OK”.
108
(b) To set the daylight saving time
G14057
You can set or cancel the daylight saving time.
“ON”: To set the daylight saving time.
“OFF”: To cancel the daylight saving time.
After setting, touch “OK”.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
G14037
G14036
Multi−information display
On the instrument panel
This display shows the outside temperature when the
engine switch is on.
The displayed temperature ranges from – 40C (– 40F) up to
50C (122F). If the temperature does not appear on the
display or it shows “− − −”, take your vehicle to your Lexus
dealer.
When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second click
stop, the brightness of the display will be reduced.
You can brighten the display. To adjust the brightness, see
“Instrument panel light control” on page 98.
When you push the “DISP” switch with the engine switch on,
another outside temperature display appears on the
multi−information display.
The displayed temperature ranges from – 40C (– 40F) up to
50C (122F). If the temperature does not appear on the
display or it shows “E” or “− −”, take your vehicle to your Lexus
dealer.
When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second click
stop, the brightness of the display will be reduced.
You can adjust the brightness of the display. To adjust the
brightness, see “Instrument panel light control” on page 98.
109
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND
ASHTRAY
G14008
Front cigarette lighter and ashtray
To use the cigarette lighter and ashtray, slide the ashtray
cover forward. Then when the ashtray opens out, press
in the cigarette lighter. After it finishes heating up, it
automatically pops out ready for use.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in.
If the engine is not running, “ACC” mode must be selected.
When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in
the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire.
After using the ashtray, close it by pushing the lid forward.
To remove the ashtray, slide the lever attached beside the
ashtray, to the right, and the ashtray will be lifted.
Use a Lexus genuine cigarette lighter or equivalent for
replacement.
110
NOTICE
If you spill a drink in the ashtray, take it out and wipe off
the spilt drink thoroughly, or the ashtray may not
activate properly.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
POWER OUTLET
G14009a
G14010
Rear ashtray
To use the ashtray, open the cover.
When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in
the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire.
After using the ashtray, close the lid completely.
The power outlet is designed for power supply for car
accessories.
The power outlet is located in the rear console box.
To remove the ashtray, press down on the lock spring plate and
pull it out.
The power outlet works when “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode is
selected.
CAUTION
NOTICE
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
sudden stop while driving, always close the ashtray
cover completely after use.
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the
electricity over the total vehicle capacity of
12V/120W.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
use the power outlet longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
111
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is
not in use. Inserting anything other than an
appropriate plug that fits the outlet, or allowing any
liquid to get into the outlet may cause electrical
failure or short circuits.
REAR CONSOLE BOX
G14028
To open the rear console box, pull the lever upward and
slide the console box lid rearward as shown in the
illustration.
The sliding lid comes once to a stop when the switches appear.
To open the box fully, pull the lever and slide the box lid again
from this position.
The rear console box light comes on when the tail lights are
turned on.
112
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
GLOVE BOX
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or a sudden stop, always keep the rear console box
closed while driving.
Do not apply excessive load over the tray with your
hand, or closing the console box lid may injure your
fingers.
G14012
Do not open the rear console box while operating the
rear vents, or closing the console box lid may injure
your fingers.
1 Unlock
2 Open
3 Lock
To open the glove box door, push the button. To lock the
glove box door, insert the mechanical key and turn it
clockwise.
With the tail lights on, the glove box light will come on.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
113
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
The garage door opener (
Universal
Transceiver) is manufactured under license from
HomeLink and can be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting
systems, and security systems, etc.
For Canadian users, follow the procedure in “Programming an
entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian
market”.
1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink buttons you want to
program.
(a) Programming the HomeLink
G14058a
G14013
2 Hand−held garage transmitter
1 HomeLink
3 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)
1 Indicator light
2 Buttons
The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3 buttons and you can
store one program for each button.
To ensure correct programming into the HomeLink, install a
new battery in the hand−held transmitter prior to programming.
The battery side of the hand−held transmitter must be pointed
away from the HomeLink during the programming process.
114
2. Place your hand−held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to
3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while
programming.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
G14059
3. Simultaneously press and hold the hand−held garage
transmitter button along with the selected HomeLink button.
Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed.
4. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a
slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both
buttons.
G14060
5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly
programmed button. If programming a garage door opener,
check to see if the garage door opens and closes.
If the garage door does not operate, identify if your garage
transmitter is of the “Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button. The garage door has the
rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink)
flashes rapidly and then remains lit after 2 seconds. If your
garage transmitter is the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the
heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLink
button to program another device.
115
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Programming a rolling code system
If your device is “Rolling Code” equipped, it is necessary
to follow steps 1 through 4 under the heading
“Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with
the steps listed below.
1. Locate the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage
door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button
may vary by brand of garage door opener. Refer to the owner’s
guide supplied by the garage door opener manufacturer for the
location of this “training” button.
2. Press the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage
door opener motor.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate
step 3 below.
INFORMATION
If you register a program in the HomeLink using a
“Rolling Code” type transmitter, the transmitter must be
reprogrammed to use it again.
Programming an entrance gate /
Programming all devices in the Canadian
market
1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink buttons you want to
program.
2. Place your hand−held gate/device transmitter 25 to 75 mm
(1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while
programming.
3. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink
button twice. The garage door may open. If the door does
open, the programming process is complete. If the door does
not open, press and release the button a third time. This third
press and release will complete the programming process by
opening the garage door.
4. Continuously press and release (cycle) the hand−held
gate/device transmitter button every two seconds until step 5
is complete.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now
recognize the HomeLink unit and be able to activate the
garage door up/down.
5. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a
slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both
buttons.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each remaining HomeLink
button to program another rolling code system.
3. Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.
6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly
programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates
correctly.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLink
button to program another device.
116
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems,
home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus
dealer for assistance.
Reprogramming a button
HomeLink
Individual
buttons cannot be erased, however, to
reprogram a single button, follow the procedure “Programming
the HomeLink”.
INFORMATION
The transmitting range from the HomeLink may differ
from that from your hand−held garage transmitter.
(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink memory
(all three programs)
INFORMATION
Keep your hand−held garage transmitter even after
programming. The hand−held garage transmitter will
be required if reprogramming is necessary.
G14061
(b) Operating the HomeLink
To operate the HomeLink, press the appropriate HomeLink
button to activate the programmed device. The HomeLink
indicator light should come on. If the “Rolling Code” type
program is registered, the HomeLink indicator light flashes
several times, then remains on. The HomeLink continues to
send the signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is
pressed.
To erase all previously programmed codes at one time, press
and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the
indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored
in the HomeLink memory.
117
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CUPHOLDERS
CAUTION
When programming the HomeLink Universal
Transceiver, you may be operating a garage door or
other device. Make sure people and objects are out
of the way of the garage door or other device to
prevent potential harm or damage.
Do not use this HomeLink Universal Transceiver
with any garage door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety
standards. (This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.) A garage
door opener which cannot detect an object
(signaling the door to stop and reverse), does not
meet current federal safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without these features increases
risk of serious injury or death.
G14014
Front
To use the cupholder, push the cupholder lid.
CAUTION
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with RSS−210 of the IC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and
complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the device.
118
Do not place anything else other than cups or
drink−cans in the cupholder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure
people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an
accident.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or sudden stop while driving, keep the cupholder
closed when not in use.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
COIN BOXES
G14015
G14016
Rear
To use the cupholder, push the cup holder portion of the
center armrest in the rear seat.
The cup holder is designed for holding cups or drink−cans
securely.
On the instrument panel
To use the coin box, push the button.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Keep the coin box closed when not in use.
Do not place anything else other than cups or
drink−cans in the cupholder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure
people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an
accident.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or sudden stop while driving, keep the cupholder
closed when not in use.
119
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
OVERHEAD CONSOLE BOX
G14034
G14020a
Under the lid of the rear console box
To use the coin box, slide the rear console box as shown.
To use the overhead console box, push the lid as shown.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or a sudden stop, always keep the overhead console
box closed while driving.
Do not place any object heavier than 100 g (0.22 lb.)
in it. Heavier objects may cause the box to open and
the contents to fly out resulting in injuries.
120
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
NOTICE
DOOR POCKETS
During hot weather, the interior of the vehicle becomes
very hot.
Do not leave anything flammable or
deformable such as a lighter, glasses, etc. inside.
G14030
To use the door pocket, open it as shown.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, always keep the door pockets closed
while driving.
121
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
TRUNK STORAGE EXTENSION
G14021
1 Lock
2 Unlock
3 Open
Pull down the center armrest in the rear seat. Push down
the handle and open the armrest door.
Access to the trunk can be prevented by locking the armrest
door with the mechanical key.
See “Stowage precautions” on page 463 for precautions when
loading luggage.
CAUTION
Be sure to close the door when the trunk storage
extension is not in use. Luggage or cargo in the trunk
may be thrown into the passenger compartment in a
sudden stop or crash resulting in injury.
122
FLOOR MAT
G14025
Use a floor mat of the correct size.
If the vehicle carpet and floor mat have 2 holes, then they are
designed for use with locking clips. Attach the floor mat to the
vehicle carpet using the clips. Lock the clips into the holes in
the vehicle carpet.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
REAR ELECTRIC SUNSHADE
The rear electric sunshade switch is located in the switch box.
G14026
G14024
CAUTION
Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle
carpet. If the floor mat slips and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an
accident.
Push the button to use the switch box and then push the
rear electric sunshade switch.
The rear electric sunshade will be raised. To lower the shade,
push the switch again.
The sunshade works when the engine switch is selected in
“IG−ON” mode.
After operation, be sure to close the switch box to its original
position.
When the selector lever is shifted into the “R” position
while the sunshade is raised, the sunshade will be
automatically lowered.
123
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
To raise the sunshade again, perform any of the following
operations:
Shift the selector lever into the “P” position.
Push the switch again.
Move the selector lever out of “R” position and drive your
vehicle over 15 km/h (9 mph).
Retained accessory power: Even after the engine switch is
turned off, the sunshade can be operated for about 60
seconds.
CAUTION
To prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged,
always operate the shade while the engine is running.
Observe the following to avoid damage and/or
malfunction:
Do not overload the shade motor and other parts
(for instance by pushing down on the sunshade
bracket while it is opening).
Do not place anything where it may hinder the
opening/closing of the shade.
Do not affix anything to the shade.
Do not touch the brackets fastening the shade to
avoid injuring your fingers or hands.
Clean the shade groove if there is any foreign
matter or dust on it.
Do not put your fingers in the shade groove while the
shade is operating to avoid getting them caught or
injured by the runner.
Do not operate the rear electric sunshade
repeatedly for a long time as its motor may
overheat.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when
not in use while driving.
124
NOTICE
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
TIE−DOWN HOOKS
FIRST−AID KIT HOLDER
G14017
To secure your luggage, use the tie−down hooks as
shown above.
See “Cargo and luggage” on page 463 for precautions when
loading luggage.
G14018
1 To loosen
2 To tighten
This belt is designed to hold the first−aid kit.
To loosen: Pull the buckle forward.
To tighten: Pull on the belt.
CAUTION
Make sure the first−aid kit is securely held.
To avoid personal injury, keep the tie−down hooks
stored under the carpet when not in use.
125
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
126
SECTION
1–5
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Exterior equipment
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
129
132
136
127
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
HOOD
G15002
G15001
2. Insert your fingers under the hood, push up the
auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.
1. To open the hood, pull the hood lock release lever
under the instrument panel. The hood will spring up
slightly.
Before closing the hood, check to see that you have not
forgotten any tools, rags, etc. Then lower the hood and make
sure it locks.
CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the hood is closed and
securely locked. Otherwise, the hood may open
unexpectedly while driving and an accident may occur.
128
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
TRUNK LID
The trunk lid can be unlocked by any of the following
ways:
Using a trunk lid opener
The trunk lid opener switch is located in the switch box.
Using a trunk lid opener
Using a mechanical key
Using a trunk button (with the entry function)
Wireless remote control
G15003
The explanation about how to unlock the trunk lid using a
mechanical key and trunk lid opener is made here. For the use
of trunk button and wireless remote control, see “Smart access
system with push−button start” on page 11 and “Wireless
remote control” on page 32.
Push the button to use the switch box and then push the
trunk lid opener switch for about 1 second.
Open the trunk lid. After operation, be sure to close the switch
box to its original position.
To close the trunk lid, lower it and press down on it. After
closing the trunk lid, try pulling it up to make sure it is securely
closed.
129
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CAUTION
Trunk lid opener main switch
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. This not only
keeps the luggage from being thrown out, but also
prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
Always lock the trunk lid and all doors, and keep
away the vehicle keys out of children’s reach.
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Un
supervised children may lock themselves in the
vehicles or trunk and suffer serious injuries or death.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when
not in use while driving.
G15005
1 Main switch
2 Operative 3 Inoperative
If you do not want to activate the trunk lid opener system,
turn off the main switch in the glove box. To turn it on,
push in the main switch.
130
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Using a mechanical key
Trunk lid closer
If the trunk lid is closed but does not latch shut, it
automatically closes completely.
CAUTION
G15004
Pay careful attention not to get your fingers trapped
as the trunk lid automatically closes when the trunk
has not been fully closed.
Never allow a child to operate the trunk lid.
To unlock the trunk lid, insert the mechanical key and turn
it clockwise.
To close the trunk lid, lower it and press down on it. After
closing the trunk lid, try pulling it up to make sure it is securely
closed.
NOTICE
Do not apply excessive force when the trunk lid closer
is operating. Doing so may damage the trunk lid closer.
Also, be careful not to leave the key inside the trunk.
CAUTION
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. This not only
keeps the luggage from being thrown out, but also
prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
Always lock the trunk lid and all doors, and keep
away the vehicle keys out of children’s reach.
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Un
supervised children may lock themselves in the
vehicles or trunk and suffer serious injuries or death.
131
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Internal trunk release handle
G15007
If a person is locked in the trunk, he/she can pull down the
phosphorescent handle on the inside of trunk lid to open
the trunk lid.
The phosphorescent (glow−in−the−dark) handle will continue
to glow for a time after the trunk lid is closed. Exposing the
handle to stronger light will cause it to glow longer.
132
FUEL TANK CAP
15G014
This indicates that the fuel filler door is on the left side of
your vehicle.
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
The fuel filler door opener switch is located in the switch box.
CAUTION
Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames
when refuelling. The fumes are flammable.
G15018
When opening the cap, do not remove the cap
quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could
cause injury by spraying out of the filler neck if the
cap is suddenly removed.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when
not in use while driving.
1. Push the button to use the switch box and then push
the fuel filler door opener switch.
After operation, be sure to close the switch box to its original
position.
When refueling, turn off the engine.
133
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
G15016
2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn the cap slowly
counterclockwise by 90 degrees (to the pressure point
1 , then turn it additional 30 degrees (to point 2 ).
Pause slightly before removing it.
It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh when the cap is
opened.
G15015
3. The removed cap can be stored on the back side of the
fuel filler door.
Position the cap so that the hooks point to the left and right, and
set it in the receptacle on the back side of the door.
When installing the cap, turn the cap clockwise until you
hear a click. When you hear the click, the cap is fully
closed.
If the cap is not installed securely, the malfunction indicator
lamp comes on. Make sure the cap is tightened securely.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the
indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
134
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CAUTION
In case the opener is not actuated
Make sure the cap is installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
Use only a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap for
replacement. It is designed to regulate fuel tank
pressure.
G15021
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the cap, apply force only in the
turning direction to the cap. Do not pull or pry it.
Remove the cover and pull up the manual lever in the
trunk.
This is used in case the fuel filler door cannot be opened due
to a discharged battery or other trouble.
135
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
MOON ROOF
To close the moon roof, push the “CLOSE” button for
about 1 second. The moon roof will fully close. To stop
partway, push the “OPEN”, “CLOSE”, “UP” or “DOWN”
button briefly.
G15010
G15011
1 Open
2 Close
To slide open the moon roof, push the “OPEN” button for
about 1 second. The moon roof will open and stop
partway 40 mm (1.6 in.) from the fully opened position.
When you push the switch once again, the moon roof will
fully open. To stop partway, push the “OPEN”, “CLOSE”,
“UP” or “DOWN” button briefly.
As driving with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind
throbs, we recommend you to drive with the moon roof partway
40 mm (1.6 in.) from the fully opened position.
The sun shade can be opened or closed manually. However,
if you open the moon roof, the sun shade will be opened with
the moon roof.
136
1 Tilt up
2 Lower
To tilt up the moon roof, push the “UP” button for about
1 second. The moon roof will fully tilt up. To stop partway,
push the “UP”, “DOWN”, “OPEN” or “CLOSE” button
briefly.
To lower the moon roof, push the “DOWN” button for
about 1 second. The moon roof will be fully lowered. To
stop partway, push the “UP”, “DOWN”, “OPEN” or
“CLOSE” button briefly.
To operate the moon roof, the engine switch must be selected
in “IG−ON” mode.
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
If the moon roof is left open when you turn the engine switch
to “OFF” mode and open the driver’s door, a buzzer will remind
you to close the moon roof.
Retained accessory power operation: Even if the engine
switch is off, the moon roof can be operated until any of the
doors is opened (or for about 45 seconds).
Operating the moon roof from outside the
vehicle
The moon roof can be closed or opened using a mechanical
key.*
NOTE:
*This feature can be deactivated, or sliding open or tilting up
can be selected.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
G15020
Insert the mechanical key into the key hole on the driver’s
door.
To close the moon roof: Turn the key in the locking direction
and hold it.
After the door is locked, the moon roof begins to close. To stop
in the middle, return the key.
137
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
To open the moon roof: Turn the key in the unlocking
direction and hold it.
CAUTION
After the door is unlocked, the moon roof begins to open. To
stop in the middle, return the key.
To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the
following.
Jam protection function
If something gets caught into the roof opening during closing
operation, the moon roof stops and is open.
If the moon roof receives a strong impact, this function may
work even if nothing is caught.
If the battery is disconnected or run down
The moon roof may not operate automatically and the jam
protection function will not function correctly after you
reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these
cases, you should normalize the moon roof.
To normalize the moon roof, push and hold the “UP” button until
the moon roof tilts all the way up and then down a little
automatically.
Make sure the moon roof opens and closes automatically. If
the moon roof cannot be operated properly, have it checked by
your Lexus dealer.
While the vehicle is moving, always keep the heads,
hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants
away from the roof opening. Otherwise, they could
be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
Before you close the moon roof, always make sure
there is nobody around the moon roof. You must also
make sure nobody places his or her head, hands and
other parts of the body in the roof opening. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get caught in the
closing roof, it could result in death or serious injury.
When anyone closes the moon roof, first make sure
it is safe to do so.
Be sure to turn the engine switch to “OFF” mode
when you leave your vehicle.
Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone
in your vehicle, especially when the engine switch is
on. Otherwise, he/she could use the moon roof
switches and get trapped in the roof opening.
Unattended persons (particularly a small child) can
be involved in a serious accident.
Never sit on top of the vehicle around the roof
opening.
138
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate
the jam protection function intentionally, as it could
result in a serious injury.
The jam protection function may not work if
something gets caught just before the moon roof
fully closed.
139
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
140
SECTION
1–6
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Occupant restraint systems
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front passenger seat position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
142
147
148
148
151
162
172
182
202
204
141
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
SEATS
While the vehicle is being driven, all vehicle occupants should
have the seatback upright, sit well back in the seat and properly
wear the seat belts provided.
FRONT SEATS
Front seat precautions
Driver seat
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle unless the occupants are
properly seated. Do not allow any passengers to sit
in the luggage compartment or cargo area. Persons
not properly seated and/or not properly restrained by
seat belts can be severely injured in the event of
emergency braking or a collision.
The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force,
and can cause death or serious injury especially if the
driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (”NHTSA”) advises:
During driving, do not allow any passengers to stand
up or move around between seats. Otherwise, severe
injuries can occur in the event of emergency braking
or a collision.
Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 50−75
mm (2−3 in.) of inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.)
from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin
of safety. This distance is measured from the center of
the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less
than 250 mm (10 in.) away now, you can change your
driving position in several ways:
Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still
reaching the pedals comfortably.
Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle
designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 250 mm
(10 in.) distance, even with the driver seat all the way
forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat
somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes
it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm,
non−slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle
has that feature.
142
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward.
This points the airbag toward your chest instead of
your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by
NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot
pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument
panel controls.
Front seats
CAUTION
The SRS front side airbags are installed in the driver and
front passenger seats.
Observe the following
precautions.
Do not lean against the front door when the vehicle
is in use, since the front side airbag inflates with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may
be killed or severely injured.
Front passenger seat
CAUTION
The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with
considerable force, and can cause death or serious
injury especially if the front passenger is very close to
the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far
from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted,
so the front passenger sits upright.
Do not use seat accessories which cover the area
where the front side airbags inflate.
Such
accessories may prevent the front side airbags from
activating correctly, causing death or serious injury.
Do not modify or replace the front seats or upholstery
of the seats with front side airbags. Such change
may prevent the side airbag system from activating
correctly, disable the system or cause the front side
airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or
serious injury.
143
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Seat adjustment precautions
Adjusting front seats
CAUTION
Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving as
the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Be careful that the seat does not hit a passenger,
luggage or the rear seat.
NOTICE
Do not operate the control switch in more than one
dimension at a time. It may cause electrical overload.
G16001
1 Seat position, seat cushion angle and height control
switch
2 Seatback angle control switch
3 Lumbar support control switch
144
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Adjusting seat position
G16072
G16002
For passenger’s seat
For driver’s seat
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat and head restraint in
that position. Do not place anything under the seat, as this
might interfere with the seat movement.
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat in that position. Do not
place anything under the seat as this might interfere with the
seat movement.
You can adjust the head restraint in the desired position. To
adjust the head restraint, see “Head restraints” on page 148.
145
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Adjusting seatback angle
g16003
G16004
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seatback in that position.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat cushion in that position.
CAUTION
Avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed.
The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal
or rear collision when the driver and the front passenger
are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you
are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and
apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your
neck may contact the shoulder belt. In the event of a
frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the
greater the risk of death or personal injury .
146
Adjusting seat cushion angle and height
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Adjusting lumbar support
REAR SEATS
Rear seat precautions
Rear seats (with SRS rear side airbags)
G16005
CAUTION
The SRS rear side airbags are installed in the outboard
rear seats. Observe the following precautions.
Push the control switch on either side.
The amount of lumbar support will change while the switch is
pushed.
Do not lean against the rear door when the vehicle is
in use, since the rear side airbag inflates with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may
be killed or severely injured.
Do not use seat accessories which cover the area
where the rear side airbags inflate. Such accessories
may prevent the rear side airbags from activating
correctly, causing death or serious injury.
Do not modify or replace the outboard rear seats or
the upholstery of the seats with rear side airbags.
Such change may prevent the side airbag system
from activating correctly, disable the system, or
cause the rear side airbags to inflate accidentally,
resulting in death or serious injury.
147
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
ARMREST
HEAD RESTRAINTS
For your safety and comfort, adjust the head restraint
before driving.
Front seats
G16125
G16002
To use the armrest, pull it down as shown above.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the armrest, avoid putting heavy
loads on it.
Driver’s seat
The height of the driver’s head restraint is automatically
adjusted along with the seat position movement when the
seat position control switch is used.
When the seat is adjusted to the foremost (or rearmost)
position, the head restraint is adjusted to the lowest (or
highest) position.
The height of the head restraint can be adjusted manually.
148
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
G16250
G16130
To adjust the height of the head restraint manually, adjust
it while pushing the button located on the shoulder.
To move the head restraint forward or rearward, move the
head restraint as shown.
After adjusting the head restraint manually, even if you adjust
the seat to the foremost (or rearmost) position using seat
position control, the head restraint may not be adjusted to the
lowest (or highest) position. And if the head restraint reaches
the highest (or lowest) position while the seat is being adjusted
backward (or forward), the head restraint will be fixed in that
position.
The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your
head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not
recommended.
CAUTION
Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is
closest to the top of your ears.
149
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Rear seats
G16006
G16007
Front passenger seat
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the
lock release button and push the head restraint down. To
move the head restraint forward or rearward, move the
head restraint as shown.
The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your
head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not
recommended.
CAUTION
Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is
closest to the top of your ears.
After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is
locked in position.
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
150
Outboard rear seats
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the
lock release button and push the head restraint down. To
move the head restraint forward or rearward, pull or push
on the top.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt precautions
G16008
Lexus strongly urges that the driver and passengers in the
vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts
provided. Failure to do so could increase the chance of injury
and/or the severity of injury in accidents.
The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for
people of adult size, large enough to properly wear them.
Center rear seat
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the
lock release button and push the head restraint down.
Center rear head restraint: When an occupant sits on the
center rear seat, always pull up the head restraint to the lock
position.
The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your
head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not
recommended.
CAUTION
Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is
closest to the top of your ears.
After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is
locked in position.
Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child
until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belts. See ”Child restraint” on page 182 for
details.
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should
sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s
seat belt. According to accident statistics, the child is safer
when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
If a child must sit in the front seat, the seat belts should be worn
properly. If an accident occurs and the seat belts are not worn
properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag may cause
death or serious injury to the child.
Do not allow any children to stand up or kneel on either rear or
front seats. An unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or
death during emergency braking or a collision. Also, do not let
the child sit on your lap. Holding a child in your arms does not
provide sufficient restraint.
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
151
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Pregnant woman. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt.
Ask your doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips
and not on the waist.
Injured person. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt.
Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
CAUTION
Persons should ride in their seats properly wearing
their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious
bodily injury or death in the event of sudden braking or
a collision.
When using the seat belts, observe the following:
Use the belt for only one person at a time. Do not use
a single belt for two or more people − even children.
Avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed.
The seat belts provide maximum protection in a
frontal or rear collision when the driver and the front
passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the
seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past
your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the
abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt.
In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is
reclined, the greater the risk of death or personal
injury.
152
Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or
hardware. Take care that they do not get caught or
pinched in the seat or doors.
Inspect the belt system periodically. Check for cuts,
fraying, and loose parts. Damaged parts should be
replaced. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Keep the belts clean and dry. If they need cleaning,
use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never
use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners, or allow them
to come into contact with the belts − they may
severely weaken the belts. (See “Cleaning the
interior” on page 604 for instructions.)
Replace the belt assembly (including bolts) if it has
been used in a severe impact. The entire assembly
should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Fastening front and rear seat belts
G16009
When a seat belt is completely extended and is then retracted
even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be
extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint
system securely. (For details, see ”Child restraint” on page
182.) To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull
the belt out once more.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull
the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
the belt out of the retractor.
CAUTION
Adjust the seat as needed and sit up straight and well back
in the seat. To fasten your belt, pull it out of the retractor
and insert the tab into the buckle.
You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt length automatically adjusts to your size and the
seat position.
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on
impact. It also may lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow,
easy motion will allow the belt to extend, and you can move
around freely.
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the belt is not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent you from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally,
immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use
the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot
protect an adult occupant or your child from injury.
153
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
G16010
Adjust the position of the lap and shoulder belts.
1
Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips − not
on your waist.
2
Adjust it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder portion
upward through the latch plate.
G16011
Front seat belts only
Adjust the shoulder anchor position to your size.
To raise the anchor position, push the anchor up. To lower the
anchor position, support the anchor while you push the lock
release button then slide the anchor down. After adjustment,
make sure the anchor is locked in position.
CAUTION
Both high−positioned lap belts and loose−fitting
belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding
under the lap belt during a collision or other
unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as
low on hips as possible.
Do not place the shoulder belt under your arm.
154
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from your neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of
protection in an accident and cause serious injuries in
a collision.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Seat belt comfort guides
G16012
G16013
To release the belt, press the buckle release button and
allow the belt to retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for
kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it
retracts.
The seat belt comfort guides are installed on the outboard
rear seats to relieve uncomfortableness from the
shoulder belt when it is applied closer to a child’s neck (at
the age of 10 or so), by pulling the shoulder belt a little
forward.
Slide the seat belt comfort guide forward to adjust the
shoulder belt.
The seat belt comfort guide should not be in the forward
position for other purposes.
155
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of the shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the neck, and should not fall off the
shoulder. Failure to observe these precautions could
reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in an accident,
causing death or serious injury.
Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they
are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is
available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.
Please contact your local Lexus dealer so that the dealer can
order the proper required length for the extender. Bring the
heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and
selection of length. Additional ordering information is available
at your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
When using the seat belt extender, observe the
following precautions.
Failure to follow these
instructions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat
belt restraint system in case of an accident, increasing
the chance of personal injury.
Remember that the extender provided for you may
not be safe when used on a different vehicle, for
another person, or at a different seating position than
the one originally intended.
156
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Be sure to wear the seat belt without the seat belt
extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
G16018
Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a
child restraint system on the front or rear passenger
seat. If installing a child restraint system with the
seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat
belt will not securely hold the child restraint system,
which could cause death or serious injury to the child
or other passengers in the event of collision.
If the seat belt extender has been connected to the
driver’s seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender
has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the
driver’s seat belt, the SRS driver’s airbag system will
judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt even
though the seat belt has not been connected. In this
case, the driver’s airbag may not activate correctly,
causing death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender. Otherwise, there will also not be any effective protection in a sudden stop or a collision provided by the seat belt.
157
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
G16014
To connect the extender to the seat belt, insert the tab into
the seat belt buckle so that the ”PRESS” signs on the
buckle release buttons of the extender and the seat belt
are both facing outward as shown.
You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release
button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.
When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle
for future use.
158
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt and the seat belt extender are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent you from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally,
immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use
the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot
protect an adult occupant or your child from death or
serious injury.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Seat belt pretensioners
G16016
G16015
Both front seats and the two outboard rear seats are
equipped with seat belt pretensioners and are designed to
be activated in response to a severe frontal impact.
When the sensor detects a severe frontal impact, the seat belts
are quickly drawn back by the retractor so that the belts snugly
restrain the occupants.
The front passenger seat belt pretensioner will not activate if
there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat.
However, the front passenger seat belt pretensioner may
activate if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled
up regardless of the presence of the occupant in the seat.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Front airbag sensors
Occupant detection sensor
Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
Front seat belt pretensioner assembly
SRS warning light
Rear seat belt pretensioner assembly
Airbag sensor assembly
The seat belt pretensioner system consists mainly of the
above components, and their locations are shown in the
illustration.
The seat belt pretensioners are controlled by the airbag sensor
assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing
sensor and airbag sensor.
The outboard rear seat belt pretensioners are activated even
with no passengers in the outboard rear seats.
The seat belt pretensioners and SRS airbags may not operate
together in all collisions.
159
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
When the seat belt pretensioners are activated, an operating
noise may be heard and a small amount of non−toxic gas may
be released. This does not indicate that a fire is occurring. This
gas is normally harmless.
Once the seat belt pretensioners have been activated, the seat
belt retractors remain locked.
Do not perform any of the following changes without
consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the seat belt
pretensioners in some cases.
CAUTION
Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile
two−way radio, cassette tape player or CD player.
Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt
pretensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding
area or wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may
prevent the seat belt pretensioners from activating
correctly, cause sudden operation of the system or
disable the system, which could result in death or
serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any
repair and modification.
160
NOTICE
Repairs on or near the seat belt retractor assemblies.
Modification of the suspension system.
Modification of the front end structure.
Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar,
etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to
the front end.
Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end
structure or console.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
16G017
When the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, the
light does not come on or remains on for more than 6
seconds.
The light comes on while driving.
If any seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due
to a malfunction or activation of the relevant seat belt
pretensioner.
This indicator comes on when the engine switch is
selected in “IG−ON” mode. It goes off after about 6
seconds. This means the seat belt pretensioners are
operating properly.
The seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area
has been damaged.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch,
occupant detection sensor, front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning
light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details,
see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 74.)
161
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
SRS DRIVER AIRBAG AND FRONT
PASSENGER AIRBAG
G16019
G16020
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was
involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause
the seat belt pretensioners to operate.
The seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
1 Driver airbag 2 Front passenger airbag
3 Front passenger knee airbag 4 Driver knee airbag
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags
are designed to provide further protection for the driver
and front passenger in addition to the primary safety
protection provided by the seat belts.
In response to a severe frontal impact, the SRS front airbags
work with the seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The
SRS front airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or
front passenger’s head or chest or knees caused by hitting the
vehicle interior.
162
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no
passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the
front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat,
or the seat belt is buckled up, regardless of the presence of an
occupant in the seat.
Always wear your seat belt properly.
CAUTION
The SRS front airbag system is designed only as a
supplement to the primary protection of the driver
and front passenger seat belt systems. The driver
and front passenger can be killed or seriously injured
by the inflating airbags if they do not wear the
available seat belts properly. During sudden braking
just before a collision, an unrestrained driver or front
passenger can move forward into direct contact with
or close proximity to the airbag which may then
deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum
protection in an accident, the driver and all
passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of death or serious
injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For
instructions and precautions concerning the seat
belt system, see ”Seat belts” on page 151.
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and
children can be killed or seriously injured by the
deploying airbags. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using
a child restraint system.
Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed
in the rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained.
The rear seat is the safest for infants and children.
For instructions concerning the installation of a child
restraint system, see ”Child restraint” on page 182 .
163
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The SRS front airbags are designed to deploy in severe
(usually frontal) collisions where the magnitude and
duration of the forward deceleration of the vehicle
exceeds the designed threshold level.
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the impact
is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an
approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision in the U.S.A. and 30
km/h (18 mph) collision in Canada when the vehicle has the
impact straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or
deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if
the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign
pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is
involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the
front of the vehicle ”underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a
truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions where the forward
deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed
threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt
pretensioners may not activate together.
Always wear your seat belts properly.
164
G16021
1 Collision from the side
3 Vehicle rollover
2 Collision from the rear
The SRS front airbags are not generally designed to inflate
if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls
over, or if it is involved in a low−speed frontal collision.
But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient
forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the
SRS front airbags may occur.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
G16022
1 Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface.
2 Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3 Landing hard or vehicle falling
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples
are shown in the illustration.
G16023
1 Occupant detection sensor
2 Airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
3 Knee airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
4 Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
5 SRS warning light
6 Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)
7 Knee airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)
8 Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
9 Driver’s seat position sensor
10 Airbag sensor assembly
11 Front airbag sensors
The SRS front airbag system consists mainly of the above
components, and their locations are shown in the illustration.
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and
airbag sensors.
165
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The front airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward
deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward
deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the system
triggers the airbag inflators. At this time a chemical reaction in
the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to
help restrain the forward motion of the occupants. The front
airbags then quickly deflate, so that there is no obstruction of
the driver’s vision should it be necessary to continue driving.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a loud noise and
release some smoke and residue along with non−toxic gas.
This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside
the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation
to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue
as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit from the vehicle, you
should do so immediately.
166
Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second,
so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the
head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries
to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the
nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force
of a deploying airbag can cause more serious injuries,
especially if an occupant’s hands, arms, chest or head is in
close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment.
This is why it is important for the occupant to; avoid placing any
object or part of the body between the occupant and the airbag
module; sit straight and well back into the seat; wear the
available seat belt properly; and sit as far as possible from the
airbag module, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, lower portion
of instrument panel, dashboard and inflator) may be hot for
several minutes after deployment, so do not touch! The
airbags inflate only once. The windshield may be damaged by
absorbing some of the force of the inflating airbag.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
The driver or front passenger who is too close to the
steering wheel, lower portion of instrument panel or
dashboard during airbag deployment can be killed or
seriously injured. Lexus strongly recommends that:
G16024
The driver sit as far back as possible from the
steering wheel while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
The front passenger sit as far back as possible from
the dashboard.
All vehicle occupants be properly restrained using
the available seat belts.
If the seat belt extender has been connected to the
driver’s seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender
has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the
driver’s seat belt, the SRS driver’s airbag system will
judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt even
though the seat belt has not been connected. In this
case, the driver’s airbag may not activate correctly,
causing death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender. Otherwise, there will also not be any effective protection in a sudden stop or a collision provided by the seat belt.
Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the
dashboard when the vehicle is in use, since the front
passenger airbag could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, an airbag when it inflates, can be killed or
seriously injured. Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, and always use your seat belt properly.
For instructions and precautions concerning the
seating position, see “Front seat precautions” on page
142.
167
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
G16025
Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and
children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and
be properly restrained.
Do not allow a child to stand up or kneel on the front
passenger seat, since the front passenger airbag
could inflate with considerable speed and force.
Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
Do not hold a child on your lap or in your arms. Use
a child restraint system in the rear seat. For
instructions concerning the installation of a child
restraint system, see ”Child restraint” on page 182.
168
G16026a
Do not put anything or any part of your body on or in
front of the dashboard, lower portion of instrument
panel, steering wheel pad that houses the front
airbag system or in the areas where the SRS knee
airbags will inflate. They might restrict inflation or
cause death or serious injury as they are projected
rearward by the force of the deploying airbags.
Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not
hold objects in their arms or on their knees.
If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee
airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not attach any objects except Lexus genuine
parts in the area where the SRS knee airbag for the
front passenger will inflate. When using an ashtray
or auxiliary box on the front passenger’s console
box, be sure to keep it closed. The attached object, or
opened ashtray or auxiliary box might restrict
inflation of the airbag or be thrown away by the force
of the deploying airbag, causing a danger.
Do not modify or remove any wiring. Do not modify,
remove, strike or open any components, such as the
steering wheel pad, steering wheel, column cover,
dashboard near the front passenger airbag, front
passenger airbag cover, knee airbags or airbag
sensor assembly. Doing so may prevent the front
airbag system from activating correctly, cause
sudden activation of the system or disable the
system, which could result in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death
or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any
repair and modification.
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following changes without
consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the SRS front airbag
system in some cases.
Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile
two−way radio, cassette tape player or CD player.
Modification of the suspension system.
Modification of the front end structure.
Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar,
etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to
the front end.
Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end
structure, console, steering column, steering wheel,
lower portion of instrument panel or dashboard near
the front passenger airbag.
169
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
16G017
When the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, the
light does not come on or remains on for more than 6
seconds.
The light comes on while driving.
This indicator comes on when the engine switch is
selected in “IG−ON” mode. It goes off after about 6
seconds. This means the SRS front airbags are operating
properly.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch,
occupant detection sensor, front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning
light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details,
see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 74.)
170
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The pad section of the steering wheel, dashboard or lower
portion of instrument panel (shaded in the illustration) is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting
your Lexus dealer.
G16027a
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible:
The SRS front airbags have been inflated.
The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was
involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS front airbags to inflate.
171
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
SRS SIDE AIRBAGS AND CURTAIN
SHIELD AIRBAGS
G16028
In response to a severe side impact, the SRS side airbags and
curtain shield airbags work with the seat belts to help reduce
injury by inflating. The SRS front side airbags help reduce
injuries mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s chest. The
SRS curtain shield airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the
driver’s, front passenger’s or rear outboard passenger’s head.
The SRS front side airbag on the passenger seat will not
activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger
seat. However, the front side airbag on the passenger seat
may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is
buckled up, regardless of the presence of an occupant in the
seat.
The SRS curtain shield airbags may activate even when the
side airbags are not activated.
1 Curtain shield airbag
2 Front side airbag
3 Rear side airbag (for some models)
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side airbags
and curtain shield airbags are designed to provide further
protection for the driver, front passenger and rear
outboard passengers in addition to the primary safety
protection provided by the seat belts.
172
Always wear your seat belt properly.
Vehicles equipped with SRS rear side airbags—
The SRS rear side airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the
rear outboard passenger’s chest.
The SRS rear side airbags will activate regardless of the
presence of the occupant.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system
is designed only as a supplement to the primary
protection of the driver, front passenger and rear
outboard passenger seat belt systems. To ensure
maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all
passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of death or serious
injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For
instructions and precautions concerning the seat
belt system, see “Seat belts” on page 151.
Do not allow anyone to lean his/her head or any part
of his/her body against the door or the area of the
seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof side rail from which
the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag deploy
even if he/she is a child seated in the child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbag and
curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact of the
deploying airbag could cause death or serious injury
to the occupant.
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and
children can be killed or seriously injured by the
deploying airbags. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using
a child restraint system.
Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed
in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly
restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants
and children. For instructions concerning the
installation of a child restraint system, see “Child
restraint” on page 182 .
173
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
G16029
1 Collision from the side to the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment
2 Collision from the side at an angle
1 Collision from the front
2 Collision from the rear
3 Vehicle rollover
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may
not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from
the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the
vehicle body other than the passenger compartment as
shown in the illustration.
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not
generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
front or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in
a low−speed side collision.
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed
to inflate when the passenger compartment area suffers a
severe impact from the side.
Always wear your seat belts properly.
174
G16030
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
G16031
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Curtain shield airbag modules (airbag and inflator)
Front side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)
Curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies
Side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies
Occupant detection sensor
Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
SRS warning light
Airbag sensor assembly
Vehicles with rear side airbag only:
Rear side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)
In a severe side impact, the side and curtain shield airbag
sensor and/or the curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the
side airbag inflators and/or the curtain shield airbag inflators.
At this time a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the
airbags with non−toxic gas to help restrain the lateral motion
of the occupants.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a fairly loud noise and
release some smoke and residue along with non−toxic gas.
This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside
the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation
to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue
as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit from the vehicle, you
should do so immediately.
Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second,
so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, it may also
cause minor burns or abrasions and swelling.
Front (and outboard rear) seats as well as the parts of the front
and rear pillars, and roof side rail may be hot for several
minutes, but the airbags themselves will be hot. The airbags
are designed to inflate only once.
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system consists
mainly of the above components, and their locations are
shown in the illustration.
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system is
controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor
assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.
175
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate with
considerable force. To reduce the possibility of death
or serious injury when they inflate, the driver, front
passenger and rear outboard passengers must:
G16137
Wear their seat belts properly.
Remain properly seated with their backs upright and
against the seats at all times.
Do not allow anyone to lean against the door when
the vehicle is in use, since the side airbag and curtain
shield airbag could inflate with considerable speed
and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or
seriously injured. Special care should be taken
especially when you have a small child in the vehicle.
Sit up straight and well back in the seat, distributing
your weight evenly in the seat. Do not apply
excessive weight to the outer side of the seats with a
side airbag, and to the front pillar, rear pillar and roof
side rail with a curtain shield airbag.
176
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
G16033
Do not allow anyone to get his/her head close to the
area where the side airbag and curtain shield airbag
inflate, since these airbags could inflate with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured. Special care
should be taken especially when you have a small
child in the vehicle.
G16034
Do not allow anyone to get his/her head or hands out
of windows since the curtain shield airbags could
inflate with considerable speed and force.
Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you
have a small child in the vehicle.
Do not allow anyone to kneel on the front passenger
(and outboard rear )seat, facing the front passenger’s
side (and rear outboard passenger’s side) door, since
the side airbag and curtain shield airbag could inflate
with considerable speed and force. Otherwise,
he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special
care should be taken especially when you have a
small child in the vehicle.
177
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
G16035a
Do not attach a cupholder or any other device or
object on or around the doors. When the side airbag
inflate, the cupholder or any other device or object
will be thrown with great force, or the side airbag may
not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury. Likewise, the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their arms or on their
knees.
G16036
Do not attach a microphone or any other device or
object around the area where the curtain shield
airbag activates such as on the windshield glass,
side door glass, front and rear pillars, roof side rail
and assist grips. When the curtain shield airbag
inflates, the microphone or other device or object will
be thrown away with great force or the curtain shield
airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death
or serious injury.
Do not hook a hanger, heavy or sharp pointed objects
on the coat hook. If the curtain shield airbag inflates,
those items will be thrown away with great force or
the curtain shield airbag may not activate correctly,
resulting in death or serious injury. When you hang
clothes, hang them on the coat hook directly.
178
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts
where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly,
causing death or serious injury.
Do not modify or replace the front (and outboard rear)
seats or upholstery of the seats with front (and rear)
side airbags. Such changes may prevent the side
airbag system from activating correctly, disable the
system or cause the side airbags to inflate
accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
Do not disassemble or repair the front and rear pillars
and roof side rail containing the curtain shield
airbags. Such changes may disable the system or
cause the curtain shield airbags to inflate
accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following changes without
consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the SRS side airbag
and curtain shield airbag system in some cases.
Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile
two−way radio, cassette tape player or CD player.
Modification of the suspension system.
Modification of the structure of the passenger
compartment.
Repairs made on or near the console, front (or
outboard rear) seats.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death
or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any
repair and modification.
179
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
16G017
When the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, the
light does not come on or remains on for more than 6
seconds.
The light comes on while driving.
The indicator comes on when the engine switch is
selected in “IG−ON” mode. It goes off after about 6
seconds. This means the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch,
occupant detection sensor, front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning
light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details,
see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 74.)
180
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The portion of the doors (shaded in the illustration) was
involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.
The surface of the seats with the side airbag (shaded in the
illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail
garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags
inside (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.
G16037
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting
your Lexus dealer.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible:
Any of the SRS front (and rear) side airbags and curtain
shield airbags have been inflated.
181
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CHILD RESTRAINT
Child restraint precautions
Lexus strongly urges the use of appropriate child
restraint systems for children.
The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A. and Canada now require
the use of a child restraint system.
Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should
sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s
seat belt. See ”Seat belts” on page 151 for details.
CAUTION
For effective protection in automobile accidents and
sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained,
using a seat belt or child restraint system depending
on age and size of the child. Holding a child in your
arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system.
In an accident, the child can be crushed against the
windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.
Lexus strongly urges use of a proper child restraint
system which conforms to the size of the child,
installed on the rear seat. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front seat.
182
Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat. In the event of an accident,
the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger
airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child
if the rear−facing child restraint system is installed
on the front passenger seat.
A forward−facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat
as far back as possible, because the front passenger
airbag could inflate with considerable speed and
force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a
child restraint system on the front or rear passenger
seat. If installing a child restraint system with the
seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat
belt will not securely hold the child restraint system,
which could cause death or serious injury to the child
or other passengers in the event of collision.
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part
of his/her body against the door or the area of the
seat, front or rear pillar or roof side rail from which the
side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if
the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is
dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag
inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious
injury to the child.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Make sure you have complied with all installation
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer and that the system is properly
secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause
death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
Child restraint system
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must
itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap
portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must carefully
consult the manufacturer ’s instructions which
accompany the child restraint system.
To provide proper restraint, use a child restraint system
following the manufacturer ’s instructions about the
appropriate age and size of the child for the child restraint
system.
Install the child restraint system correctly following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer. General directions
are also provided under the following illustrations.
The child restraint system should be installed on the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
When not using the child restraint system, keep it secured with
the seat belt or place it in the trunk or somewhere other than
the passenger compartment. This will prevent it from injuring
passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
183
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Types of child restraint system
(A) Infant seat
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
depending on the child’s age and size.
(A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
(C) Booster seat
Install the child restraint system following the instructions
provided by its manufacturer.
G16038
Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of
a child restraint system.
For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see
“Using a top strap” on page 197.
(B) Convertible seat
Child restraint lower anchorages approved for your vehicle
may also be used. See “Installation with child restraint lower
anchorages” on page 199.
G16039
184
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(C) Booster seat
INSTALLATION WITH 3−POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
(A) Infant seat installation
G16040
G16038
An infant seat must be used in rear−facing position only.
185
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
G16042
CAUTION
Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat. In the event of an accident,
the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger
airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child
if the rear−facing child restraint system is installed
on the front passenger seat.
186
G16043
If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient
space for safe installation, install the child restraint
system on the rear right seat.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
G16044
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the infant
seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer
and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.
G16045
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode.
When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be
extended.
To hold the infant seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock
mode before letting the belt retract.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent your child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot
protect your child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not
install the child restraint system on the seat until the
seat belt is fixed.
187
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
G16046
3. While pressing the infant seat firmly against the seat
cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it
will go to hold the infant seat securely.
G16047
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
188
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(B) Convertible seat installation
G16048
4. To remove the infant seat, press the buckle release button
and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child
passenger.
G16039
A convertible seat must be used in forward−facing or
rear−facing position depending on the age and size of the
child. When installing, follow the manufacturer ’s
instructions about the appropriate age and size of the
child as well as directions for installing the child restraint
system.
189
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
G16050
G16051
Move seat fully back
CAUTION
Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat. In the event of an accident,
the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger
airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child
if the rear−facing child restraint system is installed
on the front passenger seat.
A forward−facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the front passenger
airbag could inflate with considerable speed and
force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part
of his/her body against the door or the area of the
seat, front or rear pillar or roof side rail from which the
front (or rear) side airbags or curtain shield airbags
deploy even if the child is seated in a child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the front (and rear) side
airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the
impact could cause death or serious injury to the
child.
190
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
G16052
If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient
space for safe installation, install the child restraint
system on the rear right seat.
G16053
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the
convertible seat following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not
to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent your child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot
protect your child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not
install the child restraint system on the seat until the
seat belt is fixed.
191
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
G16054
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode.
When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be
extended.
To hold the convertible seat securely, make sure the belt is in
the lock mode before letting the belt retract.
192
G16055
3. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat
cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it
will go to hold the convertible seat securely.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
G16056
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
G16057
4. To remove the convertible seat, press the buckle release
button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older
child passenger.
193
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(C) Booster seat installation
G16040
G16059
Move seat fully back
A booster seat must be used in forward−facing position
only.
CAUTION
A forward−facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat
as far back as possible, because the front passenger
airbag could inflate with considerable speed and
force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
194
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part
of his/her body against the door or the area of the
seat, front or rear pillar or roof side rail from which the
front (or rear) side airbags or curtain shield airbags
deploy even if the child is seated in a child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the front (and rear) side
airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the
impact could cause death or serious injury to the
child.
G16060
1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the lap and shoulder belt
through or around the booster seat and across the child
following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and
insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly across the child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible
on the child’s hips. See ”Seat belts” on page 151 for details.
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder. The belt should
be kept away from child’s neck, but not falling off
child’s shoulder. Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a
collision.
195
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Both high−positioned lap belts and loose−fitting
belts could cause death or serious injuries due to
sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other
unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as
low on a child’s hips as possible.
For child’s safety, do not place the shoulder belt
under child’s arm.
G16061
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent your child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot
protect your child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not
install the child restraint system on the seat until the
seat belt is fixed.
196
2. To remove the booster seat, press the buckle release button
and allow the belt to retract.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Using a top strap
G16063
G16062
1 Anchor bracket
Follow the procedure below for a child restraint system
that requires the use of a top strap.
2 Symbol
Use the anchor bracket on the package tray behind the rear
seat to attach the top strap.
Anchor brackets are installed for each rear seating position.
This symbol indicates the locations of the anchor brackets.
197
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
G16121
TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET
1. Lower the head restraint to the lowest position.
198
G16122
2. Push the lid of the anchor bracket to open it.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Installation with child restraint lower
anchorages
G16064
G16065
3. Fix the child restraint system with the seat belt.
4. Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the
top strap.
For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Types
of child restraint system” on page 184.
Lower anchorages for the child restraint systems
complying with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2
specifications are installed in the rear seat.
CAUTION
The anchorages are installed in the gap between the seat
cushion and seatback of both outboard rear seats.
Make sure the top strap is securely latched, and check
that the child restraint system is secure by pushing and
pulling it in different directions.
Follow all the
installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
Child restraint system complying with the FMVSS213 or
CMVSS213 specification can be fixed to these anchorages. In
this case, it is not necessary to fix the child restraint system
with a seat belt on the vehicle.
199
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION
G16067a
G16066a
Canada only
Canada only
Type A
200
Type B
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
1. Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback
slightly and confirm the position of the lower anchorages
near the button on the seatback.
Type A—
2. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto the anchorages
and tighten the lower straps.
Type B—
2. Latch the buckles onto the anchorages
For owners in Canada—The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
CAUTION
When using the lower anchorages for the child
restraint system, be sure that there are no irregular
objects around the anchorages or that the seat belt is
not caught.
Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation
instructions
provided
by
its
manufacturer.
If your child restraint system has a top strap, it should be
anchored. (For the installation of the top strap, see “Using a top
strap” on page 197.)
For installation details, refer to the instruction manual
equipped with each product.
201
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY
SYSTEM
A microcomputer will memorize the position of the driver’s
seat, and the positions of the tilt and telescopic steering, and
outside rear view mirrors. Three different driving position
profiles can be entered into the computer’s memory.
Recording a driving position in the computer’s memory can
only be done when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON”
mode and the selector lever is in the ”P” position.
Setting the driving position
G16068
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, tilt and telescopic steering and
outside rear view mirrors to the desired position.
2. While pushing the ”SET” button, push button ”1”,”2” or
“3” until the signal beeps.
202
The beep sound means that the positions are recorded in the
computer’s memory.
By repeating these two steps and pressing the remaining
button, the driving position for another driver can be recorded.
To set a new memorized position, select the desired position
and perform step 2. The previous memory will be erased and
the new position will be set.
To make only slight changes to an already memorized position,
the easiest way is to first activate the memorized position, then
make the desired changes and perform step 2 above.
Recalling the memorized position
G16069
When you push button ”1”, ”2” or “3”, the driving position
will be automatically adjusted to the position recorded for
that button.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Conditions for memorized position activation
MEMORY RECALL FUNCTION
Engine switch in “IG−ON” mode and selector lever in ”P”
position, with the vehicle stopped.
You can recall the memorized position using the entry
function or wireless remote control.
Engine switch in “OFF” mode and within 30 seconds of
opening driver’s door.
The memorized position can be activated, except for the tilt
and telescopic steering.
If you unlock the door using the entry function or wireless
remote control, the memorized seat position is recalled when
the driver’s door is opened. The memorized steering wheel
position will be recalled when you push the engine switch.
If any driving position memory switch is pushed while one of
the memorized driving position profiles is being activated, the
operation will stop.
This function can be used after setting by the following
procedure.
To activate the system, push the desired button (“1”, “2” or “3”)
again.
The driving position memory control system cannot be
operated while the vehicle is moving.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the computer’s
memory will be erased and the memorized positions will have
to be set again.
CAUTION
Do not start the vehicle while the adjustments are
being made.
Take care not to select the wrong button, or the seat
could strike the rear passenger or hit your body
against the steering wheel. If this happens, you can
stop the movement by pressing another driving
position memory switch.
Setting the driving position onto the electronic key
The driver’s door must be closed with the engine switch turned
off.
1. Push and hold the previously memorized driving position
button “1”, “2” or “3”.
2. While depressing the button above, push and hold the
“LOCK” or “UNLOCK” button on the electronic key until a beep
sounds.
If you wish to set other driving position, repeat the above
procedure. The previous setting will be erased and the new
position will be set.
Resetting the driving position on the electronic key
The driver’s door must be closed with the engine switch turned
off.
1. Push and hold the “SET” button.
2. Push and hold the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” button on the
electronic key until two beeps sound.
203
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM
A microcomputer can memorize the position of the front
passenger seat. Three different seat position profiles can be
entered into the computer’s memory.
Recording a seat position in the computer’s memory can only
be done when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode
and the selector lever is in the ”P” position.
Setting the front passenger seat position
The beep sound means that the positions are recorded in the
computer’s memory.
By repeating these two steps and pressing the remaining
button, the seat position for another passenger can be
recorded.
To set a new memorized position, select the desired position
and perform step 2. The previous memory will be erased and
the new position will be set.
To make only slight changes to an already memorized position,
the easiest way is to first activate the memorized position, then
make the desired changes and perform step 2 above.
Recalling the memorized position
G16123
G16124
1. Adjust the front passenger seat to the desired position.
2. While pushing the ”SET” button, push button ”1”,”2” or
“3” until the signal beeps.
204
When you push button ”1”, ”2” or “3”, the seat position
will be automatically adjusted to the position recorded for
that button.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Conditions for memorized position activation
Engine switch in “IG−ON” mode and selector lever in ”P”
position, with the vehicle stopped.
Engine switch in “OFF” mode and within 30 seconds of
opening front passenger’s door.
If any seat position memory switch is pushed while one of the
memorized seat position profiles is being activated, the
operation will stop.
To activate the system, push the desired button (“1”, “2” or “3”)
again.
The seat position memory control system cannot be operated
while the vehicle is moving.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the computer’s
memory will be erased and the memorized positions will have
to be set again.
CAUTION
Do not start the vehicle while the adjustments are
being made.
Take care not to select the wrong button, or the seat
could strike the rear passenger . If this happens, you
can stop the movement by pressing another driving
position memory switch.
205
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
206
SECTION
1–7
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Steering wheel and mirrors
Tilt and telescopic steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
208
209
213
218
207
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
TILT AND TELESCOPIC STEERING
COLUMN
Adjustment of telescopic steering column
Adjustment of steering column tilt
G17002
G17001
To adjust the steering column length, push the control
switch forward or backward to set the steering wheel to
the desired position.
To adjust the tilt of the steering column, push the control
switch upward or downward to set it to the desired
position.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the steering column while the vehicle is
moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle
the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death
or serious injuries.
208
CAUTION
Do not adjust the steering column while the vehicle is
moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle
the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death
or serious injuries.
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
Automatic tilt away*
G17003
When the engine switch is off, the steering column moves
forward away from the driver and also tilts up for easy exit
and entry.
When you turn on the engine switch, the steering column
returns to the previously set position.
NOTE:
*This feature can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRRORS
G17004
Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the side of your
vehicle in the mirror.
Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen
in the outside rear view mirror on the passenger’s side
because it is a convex mirror. Any object seen in a convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than if seen in a normal
flat mirror.
When the inside rear view mirror darkens in ”AUTO” mode, the
outside rear view mirrors also darken to reduce the reflection
of the headlights of the following vehicle. For details, see
”Inside rear view mirror” on page 213.
When you push the rear window and outside rear view mirror
defogger switch, the heater panels in the outside rear view
mirrors will quickly clear the mirror surface. (See “Rear window
and outside rear view mirror defogger switch” on page 58.)
209
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the
vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death
or serious injuries.
Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch
them when the rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch is on.
Power rear view mirror control
The power rear view mirror control switch is located in the
switch box.
G17013
1 Master switch
2 Control switch
Push the button to use the switch box. Push “L” (left
mirror) or “R” (right mirror) on the master switch and then
push the control switch on the desired side.
The indicator light of the switch you selected comes on when
you push “L” or “R”.
When you move the selector lever to “R” position with “L” or “R”
switch on, the rear view mirrors will be automatically adjusted
down to help backing up.
While the indicator light is on, the mirror can be adjusted.
When you push the same side again, the light goes out and the
mirror cannot be adjusted. After adjustment, be sure to close
the switch box to its original position.
210
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
The power rear view mirrors can be adjusted when the engine
switch is in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode.
Folding rear view mirrors
The power rear view mirror folding switch is located in the
switch box.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when not in
use while driving.
NOTICE
G17014
If ice should jam the mirror, do not operate the control
or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de−icer to free the
mirror.
Push the button to use the switch box and then push the
folding switch.
The rear view mirrors are folded backward. When you push
the switch again, the mirrors will be extended to their original
position. After adjustment, be sure to close the switch box to
its original position.
The engine switch must be selected in “ACC” or “IG−ON”
mode.
The rear view mirrors can be folded backward for parking in
compact areas.
211
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
CAUTION
Outer foot lights
To avoid personal injury and any mirror malfunction,
do not touch the mirror while it is moving.
Do not drive with the mirrors folded backward. Both
the driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must
be extended and properly adjusted before driving.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when
not in use while driving.
G17015
The outer foot lights illuminate the ground near the doors
for about 15 seconds to ensure safe footing for the driver
and passengers who are about to get in the vehicle.*
The outer foot lights come on in the following conditions:
You are getting closer to the vehicle carrying an electronic
key and you enter the effective range of the entry function
(about 1 m (3 ft) from each outside door handle).
The doors are unlocked with the wireless remote control.
The doors are unlocked with the power door lock switch on
the driver’s side.
212
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
The outer foot lights go off 15 seconds after the lights come on
or when:
INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR
Pushing the lock switch on the outside door handle with an
electronic key in possession,
the doors are locked with the wireless remote control
function,
the doors are locked by inserting a mechanical key into the
door keyhole,
G17007
the doors are locked with the power door lock switch on the
driver’s side, or
the selector lever is moved out of “P” position when the
engine switch is on.
NOTE:
* The outer foot lights illuminating time can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the rear of your
vehicle in the mirror.
Pushing the “AUTO” button changes the mode between
”AUTO” and ”DAY”.
The indicator comes on when the ”AUTO” mode is selected.
”DAY” mode: The mirror surface is normal.
”AUTO” mode: If the mirror detects light from the
headlights of the vehicle behind you, the mirror surface
darkens slightly to reduce the reflected light.
When the inside rear view mirror surface changes, the outside
rear view mirror surfaces will also become darker.
When the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, the
inside rear view mirror always turns on in the ”AUTO” mode.
213
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
When the outside air temperature is low, it may take a little
longer for the mirror to darken in response to the detection of
headlights.
Compass
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle
and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
G17008
To ensure correct functioning of anti−glare mirror sensors
located on both sides of the mirror, do not touch or cover
the sensors with your finger or a piece of cloth, etc.
214
G17009
The compass indicates the direction in which the vehicle
is heading. The illustration shown above indicates the
vehicle is heading north.
Displays
Directions
N
North
NE
Northeast
E
East
SE
Southeast
S
South
SW
Southwest
W
West
NW
Northwest
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
Pushing the “AUTO” button for longer than 3 seconds
turns on or off the compass display.
The compass may not show the correct direction in the
following conditions:
The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
The compass does not adjust while the vehicle is stopped.
The engine switch is turned off immediately after turning.
The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is
subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel tower, between
buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large
vehicle, etc.).
The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a magnet or a metal
object near the inside rear view mirror.)
NOTICE
Do not put magnets or a metal object near the inside rear
view mirror. Doing this may cause malfunction of the
compass sensor.
CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation calibration)
The direction display on the compass deviates from the true
direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The
amount of deviation varies according to the geographic
position of the vehicle.
To adjust for this deviation, stop the vehicle and push the
“AUTO” button for longer than about 6 seconds until the zone
number (1−15) appears on the display. Then push the button
again, referring to the following map to select the number of the
zone where the vehicle is.
The battery has been disconnected.
Any door is open.
If the deviation is small, the compass works to calibrate the
direction automatically while the vehicle is in motion.
For obtaining additional precision or for complete calibrating,
see “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS” below.
215
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving.
Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling calibration)
G17016
G17011
“CAL” appears on the display in case the circling calibration is
required due to a drastic change in the magnetic field. To
rectify this, follow the calibration procedure below.
Zone number
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment,
the calibration is finished.
216
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
CAUTION
G17012
When doing the circling calibration, be sure to secure
a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles
in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic
rules while performing circling calibration.
Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving.
Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Drive the vehicle slowly (at 8 km/h (5 mph) or lower) in a circle
until the direction is displayed. If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is
displayed.
After driving in 1 to 3 circles in the above method, calibration
is complete with the “CAL” off the display and the direction
shown on the display.
If calibration cannot be performed because of the vehicle is
magnetized, take your vehicle to a Lexus dealer.
Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place
where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by
artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a
steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a
crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.).
During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon
roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the
calibration.
217
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
VANITY MIRRORS
G17017
To use the vanity mirror, swing the sun visor down and
slide the cover.
The vanity light comes on when you slide the cover. However
if the sun visor is not hooked securely, the light may not come
on.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the cover open for a long time while the engine is
stopped.
218
SECTION
1–8
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Touch screen
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Information menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
219
TOUCH SCREEN
OVERVIEW
G18042
Vehicles with Navigation system
G18043
Vehicles without Navigation system
220
1
Touch screen
2
“CLIMATE” button
The air conditioning operation screen is
shown.
(See page 258 for details.)
3
“AUDIO” button
The audio operation screen is shown.
(See page 280 for details.)
4
“INFO”button
The information menu screen is shown.
(See page 222 for details.)
5
“DISP” button
The display adjustment screen is
shown.
(See page 255 for details.)
TOUCH SCREEN
Initial screen
Touch switch operation
This system is operated mainly by the switches on the screen.
To prevent damage to the screen, lightly touch switches on the
screen with your finger. When you touch a switch on the
screen, a beep sounds.
G18001
Do not use objects other than your finger to touch the screen.
INFORMATION
If the system does not respond to a touch of a switch,
move your finger away from the screen and then
touch it again.
When you select the engine switch in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode,
the initial screen appears and the system begins operating.
After a few seconds, the initial screen disappears.
CAUTION
When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running,
always apply the parking brake for safety.
You cannot operate dimmed switches.
Wipe off fingerprints on the surface of the display
using a glass cleaning cloth.
The displayed image may become darker and moving
images may be slightly distorted when the display is
cold.
When you look at the screen through polarized
material such as polarized sunglasses, the screen
may be dark and hard to see. If so, change the angle
of the screen or take off your sunglasses.
221
TOUCH SCREEN
INFORMATION MENU
For “LEXUS Park Assist”, see “Setting the intuitive parking
assist” on page 391. For “Adjust clock”, see “Clock” on page
106.
Trip information
G18044a
Trip information such as driving time, driving distance,
average vehicle speed, fuel consumption, etc. can be
displayed on the screen.
1. Push the “INFO” button to display the Information
Menu screen.
Vehicles with Navigation system*
G18045a
G18045a
2. Touch the “Trip Info.” switch.
Vehicles without Navigation system
*For other functions such as Maintenance and Calender, see
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
222
TOUCH SCREEN
Cruising Range
How far you can drive with the remaining fuel is displayed.
G18003
Even though the display indicates sufficient miles to run, if the
fuel level on the fuel gauge approaches “E” or the low fuel level
warning light comes on, fill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
INFORMATION
Consumption
The consumption is calculated and displayed based on
the driving distance and the fuel consumption for 2
seconds with engine running.
When you first start driving your new vehicle, the
correct cruising range may not be shown. One or
more refills of 10 gallons or more may be required for
the system to set its calibration.
The cruising range displayed is calculated based on
past fuel consumption and may vary according to
your driving style and road condition.
The value is updated every 0.5 seconds.
If you are driving at low speeds just before stopping, the
accurate figure may not be shown.
After Refueling
The consumption after refueling is calculated and
displayed based on the total driving distance and the total
fuel consumption after refueling.
The value is updated every 10 seconds.
When refueling, be sure to stop your vehicle and turn the
engine switch off.
223
TOUCH SCREEN
Average Speed
Hands−free system
The Average Speed is displayed. The average vehicle
speed is calculated and displayed based on the total
driving distance and the total driving time after the engine
is started.
Hands−free system allows you to make or receive a call
without taking your hands off the steering wheel by
connecting your cellular phone.
The displayed value is updated every 10 seconds.
To calculate from the beginning, touch the “Reset” switch.
Distance
The distance after engine starting is displayed.
When refueling, be sure to stop your vehicle and turn the
engine switch off.
This system supports the Bluetooth. Bluetooth is a wireless
data system by which you can call without your cellular phone
connecting with a cable or placing on a cradle.
If your cellular phone does not support the Bluetooth, this
system can not function.
CAUTION
While you are driving, do not use a cellular phone or
connect the Bluetooth phone.
NOTICE
Do not leave your cellular phone in the vehicle. The
temperature indoor may be high and damage the phone.
224
TOUCH SCREEN
INFORMATION
In the following conditions, the system may not
function.
The cellular phone is turned off.
The current position is outside the communication
area.
G18047
The cellular phone is not connected.
The cellular phone has a low battery.
By pushing the telephone button above, you can receive
a call or hang up without taking your hands off the
steering wheel.
225
TOUCH SCREEN
INFORMATION
G18005a
Talk alternately with your party on the phone. If you
talk at the same time, the voice may not reach each
other. (It is not a malfunction.)
Keep the volume of receiving voice down. Otherwise,
echo is coming up. When you talk on the phone,
speak clearly towards the microphone.
In the following situations, your voice may not reach
the party.
226
You can use the microphone above when talking on the
phone.
Driving on unpaved road. (Making a traffic noise.)
Driving at the high speed.
The party’s voice outputs from the driver’s speaker. When the
received calls or received voice outputs, the audio from the
audio system or voice guidance from the Navigation system
will be muted.
The window is open.
Turning the air conditioning vents towards the
microphone.
The sound of the air conditioning fan is loud.
TOUCH SCREEN
3
Indicates the level of reception.
Too bad
G18006
Excellent
The level of reception does not always correspond with the one
of your cellular phone.
4
“A” is displayed when calling in analogue.
“D” is displayed when calling in digital.
Nothing is displayed when the system can get no information
from your cellular phone.
1
Indicates a condition of Bluetooth connection.
“Blue” indicates excellent condition of Bluetooth connection.
INFORMATION
“Yellow” indicates the condition easy to disconnect the
Bluetooth, causing a deterioration in voice.
This system supports the following service.
Not displayed: no connection to the Bluetooth.
OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1
2
Indicates the receiving area.
“Rm” is displayed when receiving in Roaming area.
“Hm” is displayed when receiving in Home area.
HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0
If your cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot
enter the Bluetooth phone, and take OPP service individually.
227
TOUCH SCREEN
An antenna for the Bluetooth connection is built in the
display. The indication of the Bluetooth connection may
turn yellow and the system may not function when you
use the Bluetooth phone in the following conditions and
places.
Your cellular phone is hiding behind the display (behind the
seat or in the glove box and console box).
Your cellular phone touches (or is covered with) metal
materials.
Leave the Bluetooth phone on the place where “Blue”
indication is displayed.
Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
FCC ID: HYQBTA01A
IC ID:
1551A−BTA01A
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and RSS−210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
228
TOUCH SCREEN
(a) Entering the Bluetooth phone
To use a hands−free system, you need to enter your phone
in the system. Once you registered it, you can make a
hands−free call.
1. Push the “INFO” button to display the “Information
Menu” screen.
G18045a
2. Touch the “Telephone” switch to display “Telephone”
screen.
G18008
3. Touch the “Settings” switch to display “Settings”
screen.
G18009
of the telephone button to display this
You can also push
screen when the vehicle is stopped.
4. Touch the “Add Phone” switch to connect your cellular
phone to the system.
229
TOUCH SCREEN
G18010
5. When this screen is displayed, input the Passkey
displayed on the screen into the phone.
6. When the connection is completed, device name and
Bluetooth Device Address is displayed.
For the operation of the phone, see the manual that comes with
your cellular phone.
You do not need to enter it in case of using the same phone.
If you want to cancel it, touch “Cancel”.
230
G18011
TOUCH SCREEN
(b) Selecting the Bluetooth phone
In case of registering a number of Bluetooth phones, you
need to select the usual phone.
G18009
G18008
2. Touch the “Select” switch to display “Select
Telephone” screen. You can select the Bluetooth phone
from a maximum of 4 numbers.
1. Touch the “Settings” switch to display “Settings”
screen.
“Empty” is displayed when you do not register the Bluetooth
phone yet.
Bluetooth mark is displayed when you choose the Bluetooth
phone.
231
TOUCH SCREEN
To connect the Bluetooth phone
G18012
Although you can register up to 4 Bluetooth phones in the
system, one Bluetooth phone can only function.
G18013
When you select the engine switch in “ACC” or “IG−ON”
mode, the selected Bluetooth phone will be automatically
connected and the connection result is displayed.
Always leave the Bluetooth phone in a condition where
connection can be established.
This screen appears when the Bluetooth phone is first
connected after you select the engine switch in “ACC” or
“IG−ON”.
232
TOUCH SCREEN
To reconnect the Bluetooth phone
To confirm the Bluetooth information
If the Bluetooth phone is disconnected with a poor
reception from the Bluetooth network when the engine
switch is selected in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode, the system
automatically reconnects the Bluetooth phone. In this
case, the connection result is not displayed.
You can confirm or change the detailed setting of the
Bluetooth phone.
If the Bluetooth is disconnected on purpose such as you turned
your cellular phone off, this does not happen. Reconnect it by
the following methods.
Select the Bluetooth phone again.
G18009
Enter the Bluetooth phone.
Touch the “Settings” switch of Bluetooth to display
“Bluetooth Information” screen.
233
TOUCH SCREEN
To change the Device Name—
You can change the Device Name to the desired one from
the name already registered in the system.
G18014
G18014
You can change the Device Name and Passkey.
BD_ADDR is Bluetooth device address. Do not change the
Device Name to the same name as the one of the other
Bluetooth phones. They cannot be identified.
BD_ADDR is different depending on the system. You can
confirm the address when it cannot be identified.
Touch the “Change” switch of Device Name to display the
“Device Name List” screen.
G18015
Select the desired name and touch “OK”.
234
TOUCH SCREEN
To change the Passkey—
The Passkey in the system is initially fixed. You can
change the Passkey within 4−8 figures.
G18016
G18014
Touch the desired key to input the Passkey.
Each time you touch “ ”, an inputted number is deleted.
Touch “Enter”.
Touch the “Change” switch of Passkey to display “Enter
Bluetooth Passkey” screen.
235
TOUCH SCREEN
(c) Deleting the Bluetooth phone
G18008
G18017
Select the desired phone from the list and touch “OK”.
1. Touch the “Settings” switch to display “Settings”
screen.
G18009
2. Touch the “Delete” switch to display “Delete
Telephone” screen. You can delete the Bluetooth phone
which you registered.
236
TOUCH SCREEN
(d) Calling on the Bluetooth phone
By phone book—
After you enter the Bluetooth phone, you can call by using
hands−free system. This system has 6 methods below by
which you call.
You can call by phone book data which is transferred from
your cellular phone.
By dial—
The system has two phone books. You can register up to
500 numbers in each book.
You can call by inputting the telephone number.
This cannot be operated while you are driving.
This cannot be operated while you are driving.
G18008
G18008
Touch the desired key to input the telephone number.
Touch the desired key to input the telephone number.
Each time you touch “ ”, an inputted number is deleted.
Touch “
” or push
1. Touch the “Phone Book” switch to display “Phone
Book” screen.
of the telephone button.
237
TOUCH SCREEN
By dialed numbers—
You can call by dialed number. The system memorizes up
to 5 dialed numbers. If it is over 5, the oldest number is
deleted.
G18018
2. Select the desired number from the list.
G18019
Touch “
238
” or push
of the telephone button.
This cannot be operated while you are driving.
G18008
1. Touch the “Log” switch to display “Outgoing Calls”
screen.
TOUCH SCREEN
G18020
When you call by phone book, the name (if registered) is
displayed.
G18019
Touch “
” or push
of the telephone button.
When you call the same number continuously, the newest
number is only registered.
2. Select the desired number from the list.
239
TOUCH SCREEN
By received calls—
You can call by received calls. When a call is received, the
system memorizes up to 5 numbers. If it is over 5, the
oldest number is deleted.
This cannot be operated while you are driving.
G18008
1. Touch the “Log” switch to display.
240
G18020
2. Touch the “Incoming Calls” switch to display
“Incoming Calls” screen.
TOUCH SCREEN
G18021
When a telephone number registered in phone book is
received, the name and the number is displayed.
Received calls which you did not answer are also
memorized in the system and “Abs.” is displayed on the left
side of the number.
G18019
Touch “
” or push
of the telephone button.
An international phone call may not be made depending on
the cellular phone which you have.
Unnotified telephone number such as a public telephone is
not memorized in the system.
3. Select the desired number from the list.
241
TOUCH SCREEN
By one touch call—
You can call by registered telephone number which you
selected from a phone book, dialed numbers and received
calls. (See page 248 for registering the one touch dial.)
G18022
G18008
2. Touch the desired number to call. You can change the
page by touching “1−touch Dial 2” or “1−touch Dial 3”.
1. Touch the “1−touch Dial” switch to display “1−touch
Dial” screen.
When you push the telephone button while you are driving, the
screen above appears. Touch the desired name to call. (The
telephone number is not displayed.)
By POI call—
You can call by operating a switch when “Call” is
displayed on the screen from Navigation system. (See the
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.)
242
TOUCH SCREEN
(e) Receiving on the Bluetooth phone
G18023
When a call is received, this screen is displayed with a
sound. Touch “
” or push
of the telephone button
to talk on the phone.
To hang up the phone:
Touch “
” or push
of the telephone button again.
To refuse to receive the call:
” and hold it.
Touch “
To adjust the volume of received call:
Touch “–” or “+”.
On the international phone call, the party’s name may not be
displayed correctly depending on the cellular phone which you
have.
(f) Talking on the Bluetooth phone
G18024
While you are talking on the phone, this screen is
displayed. You can do the operation below on the screen.
To adjust the volume of the party’s voice:
Touch “–” or “+” switch.
To hang up the phone:
Touch the “
” switch or push
button.
of the telephone
To mute your voice:
Touch the “Mute ON” switch.
To input the Key:
Touch the “0−9” switch.
243
TOUCH SCREEN
G18025
Touch the desired number to input the key.
To hang up the phone:
” or push
Touch “
of the telephone button.
This cannot be operated while you are driving.
G18026
If the continuous tone signal is registered in a phone
book, this screen appears. (If not registered, “Send” and
“Exit” is not displayed.)
Confirm the number displayed on the screen and touch
“Send” switch. The number to the marked sign will be
sent.
When you touch “Exit”, this function will be finished and normal
tone screen appears.
To hang up the phone:
” or push
Touch “
of the telephone button.
The continuous tone signal is the marked sign (p or w) and the
number following telephone number. (ex. 056133p0123w#1 )
When you call the number registered in phone book and input
a code number and the like to operate an answering machine
or use a telephone service in bank, you can do this operation.
244
TOUCH SCREEN
(g) Changing the settings of the Bluetooth phone
G18008
G18009
You can change the settings of the phone.
Touch the “Settings” switch to display “Settings” screen.
245
TOUCH SCREEN
To change the phone book—
To transfer the telephone number—
The system has two phone books. You can select either
phone book.
You can transfer the telephone numbers in your Bluetooth
phone to the system. Up to 500 numbers can be registered
in one phone book.
Transfer it while the engine is running.
G18009
G18009
Touch the “Phone Book 1” or “Phone Book 2” switch.
1. Touch the “Start Transfer” switch to display “Data
Transfer” screen.
246
TOUCH SCREEN
G18027
2. Touch the “Overwrite” or “Add” switch.
G18028
3. Transfer the phone book data to the system using the
Bluetooth phone.
This screen appears while transferring. To cancel it, touch the
“Cancel” switch. If the transferring is interrupted on the way,
the phone book data transferred until then can be memorized
in the system.
247
TOUCH SCREEN
To register the one touch dial—
You can register the desired telephone number from
phone books, dialed numbers and received calls. Up to 17
one touch dial numbers a phone book can be registered.
G18030
G18029
2. Touch the desired telephone number.
1. Touch the “Set One Touch” switch in which you want to
register the phone number.
G18031
Select the new registration from 1−18 except 6 and touch
the switch.
A latest received number is registered in the 6th item.
248
TOUCH SCREEN
To delete the memory—
To delete the telephone number in the phone book.
G18033
G18029
Touch “YES” switch.
When you touch “NO”, the previous screen returns.
Touch the “Delete” switch of “Phone Book”.
G18032
Select the desired number from the list.
If you want to delete all the phone numbers in phone book,
touch the “Delete All” switch.
249
TOUCH SCREEN
To delete the dialed number
G18029
G18033
Touch “YES” switch.
Touch the “Delete” switch of “Outgoing Calls”.
G18034
Select the desired number from the list.
If you want to delete all the dialed numbers, touch the “Delete
All” switch.
250
When you touch “NO”, the previous screen returns.
TOUCH SCREEN
To delete the received calls
G18029
G18033
Touch “YES” switch.
Touch the “Delete” switch of “Incoming Calls”.
When you touch “NO”, the previous screen returns.
G18034
Select the desired number from the list.
If you want to delete all the received calls, touch the “Delete All”
switch.
251
TOUCH SCREEN
To delete the one touch dial
G18029
G18033
Touch “YES” switch.
Touch the “Delete” switch of “1−touch Dial”.
G18034
Select the desired number from the list.
If you want to delete all the one touch dial numbers, touch the
“Delete All” switch.
252
When you touch “NO”, the previous screen returns.
TOUCH SCREEN
Language
You can select the language shown on the screen.
1. Push the “INFO” button on the bezel to display the
“Information Menu” screen.
G18045a
G18041
3. Touch the desired switch to select the language.
When you select the language, touch “OK”.
2. Touch the “Language” switch.
253
TOUCH SCREEN
Setting screen
(a) Automatic transition
1. Push the “INFO” button on the bezel to display the
“Information Menu” screen.
You can select a function that enables automatic return to
the navigation screen from the audio screen.
G18045a
2. Touch the “Screen Setting” switch.
G18035
Select the “ON” or “OFF” and then touch the “OK”.
ON: The navigation screen automatically returns from the
audio or air conditioning screen 20 seconds after the end of
audio or air conditioning screen operation.
OFF: The audio or air conditioning screen remains on.
254
TOUCH SCREEN
(b) Background color
Screen adjustment
You can select a background color.
You can adjust the brightness or contrast of the screen
depending on the brightness of your surroundings. You
also can turn the display off.
To display the “Display” screen, push the “DISPLAY”
button.
G18035
G18036
Select the desired background color and then touch the
“OK”.
Contrast and brightness adjustment
CONTRAST “+”: Strengthens the contrast of the screen.
CONTRAST “–”: Weakens the contrast of the screen.
BRIGHTNESS “+”: Brightens the screen.
BRIGHTNESS “–”: Darkens the screen.
The screen turns off when you push the “SCREEN OFF”. To
turn the display screen back on, push any bezel switch such
as “INFO”, etc. The selected screen appears.
255
TOUCH SCREEN
G18037
Depending on the position of the headlight switch, the
screen changes to either day mode or night mode.
To display the screen in the day mode even with the headlight
switch on, touch “DAY MODE” on the adjustment screen for
brightness and contrast control.
However, if the instrument panel light control switch is turned
fully to the right, mode switching cannot be done. It remains in
the day mode. In this case, “DAY MODE” is not shown on the
screen.
If the screen is set in the day mode with the headlight switch
turned on, this condition is memorized in the system even with
the engine turned off.
256
G18038
Color and tone adjustment
You can adjust the color and the tone while the DVD video and
video CD are being played.
COLOR “RED”: Strengthens the red color of the screen.
COLOR “GREEN”: Strengthens the green color of the screen.
TONE “+”: Strengthens the tone of the screen.
TONE “–”: Weakens the tone of the screen.
SECTION
2–1
AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
Air conditioning
Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
257
AIR CONDITIONING
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS
G21001
A Vehicles with Navigation system
258
B Vehicles without Navigation system
AIR CONDITIONING
1
Driver side temperature display (in degrees
Fahrenheit or Centigrade)
2
Passenger side temperature display (in degrees
Fahrenheit or Centigrade)
3
“DUAL” (temperature setting mode change) switch
4
“A/C” switch
5
Air flow control switches
6
Fan speed control switches
7
Air conditioning operation screen display button
8
“TEMP” (driver side temperature control) buttons
(At the independent mode that display shows
“DUAL”; mainly for driver and secondarily for front
passenger)
(At the linked mode that display does not show
“DUAL”; for driver)
9
“OFF” button
10
“AUTO” button
11
Micro dust and pollen filter button
12
Windshield air flow button
13
Air intake control button
14
“PASSENGER TEMP” (passenger side temperature
control) buttons
(Only for the independent mode that display shows
“DUAL”; mainly for front passenger and
secondarily for driver)
The automatic air conditioning automatically maintains
the set temperature.
In the automatic operation mode, the air conditioning selects
the most suitable fan speed, air flow, air intake and on−off of
the air conditioning according to the temperature.
The engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode.
“CLIMATE”: Push this button to display switches for
automatic air conditioning control.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the air conditioning on longer than necessary
when the engine is not running.
259
AIR CONDITIONING
Vehicles with navigation system only:
G21047a
By pushing the button above, you can operate the speech
command system.
For the operation of the speech command system, see the
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
260
AIR CONDITIONING
G21002a
Air flow selection
Automatic air flow mode only
261
AIR CONDITIONING
(a) Climate control
SETTING OPERATION − automatic control
G21003
1. Push the “AUTO” button.
An indicator light will illuminate to show that the automatic
operation mode has been selected.
Air flow quantity, switching of the diffusers, on−off of the air
conditioning, and switching of the air intake between
RECIRCULATED AIR and OUTSIDE AIR are automatically
adjusted. The operation status is shown by each indicator.
When one of the manual control buttons is depressed while
operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to the
depressed button is set. Other conditions continue to be
adjusted automatically.
Push the ”OFF” button to turn the air conditioning off.
262
INFORMATION
This automatic control had additional functions as
described below, when the “AUTO” button is pushed.
The fan is stopped for a little while until warm air
preparation, when outside temperature is low like a
winter season in the “Floor”, “Bi−level” or
“Floor/Windshield” air flow mode. If quick removal
for exterior frost, fog and inside fog on the windshield
is desired, use the high fan speed setting after the
“Windshield” air flow mode has been selected.
The fan is stopped few seconds until cool air
preparation, when outside temperature is high like a
summer season in the “Panel” or “Bi−level” air flow
mode.
The internal circulation may be applied for maximum
cooling in the automatic operation mode, when
outside temperature is high like a summer season.
If fresh outside air is desired into the vehicle, push
the air intake control button to select the OUTSIDE
AIR mode.
AIR CONDITIONING
The “Floor/Windshield” air flow mode may be applied
automatically, if the outside temperature is lowered
down to below 0C (32F).
This is not a malfunction. The “Floor/Windshield” air
flow mode turns on the defogging and defrosting
function with the purpose of clearing your front view
for safe driving.
If the “Floor” air flow mode is desired with the main
purpose of heating, “Floor” air flow mode can be
selected manually by touching the air flow control
switch.
G21004
2. Use the “TEMP” or ”PASSENGER TEMP” buttons to set
the desired vehicle interior temperature.
The “TEMP” or “PASSENGER TEMP” (“ ”, “ ”) buttons are
used to set the desired interior temperature. The interior
temperature will be controlled on the driver and passenger side
simultaneously or individually.
To increase the interior temperature, push the “ ” button, to
decrease it, push the “ ” button.
If quick heating or cooling is desired—
“LO” appears when you hold “ ” until maximum cooling, and
“HI” appears when you hold “ ” until maximum heating.
“TEMP” buttons—Changes the temperature on the driver
and passenger sides simultaneously or the driver side only.
“PASSENGER TEMP” buttons—Changes the temperature
settings separate from the driver side.
263
AIR CONDITIONING
“DUAL” switch—
This switch is used to set the temperatures independently for
the driver’s seat and front passenger seat.
Touching the switch changes from the independent mode to
the linked mode.
Independent mode: Temperatures can be set
independently for the driver’s seat and front passenger’s
seat. The indicator light will come on to show that the
independent mode has been selected.
Linked mode: The same temperature is set for the driver’s
seat and front passenger’s seat. The indicator light will turn
off to show that the simultaneous temperature setting mode
has been selected.
When the temperature for the front passenger’s seat is
changed in linked mode, the mode is changed automatically to
independent mode.
264
INFORMATION
Knowledge for the two−temperature selector operation
This air conditioning system has two independent
temperature selectors: left and right (for the use of
driver and front passenger respectively).
There are cases where the temperature of the air flow
may not accurately correlate on the driver and front
passenger side according to circumstances, even if
the left and right temperature selectors are set at the
same temperature. If this situation occurs, use the
fine tune operation to adjust the air temperature on
one side.
There are cases where one or both of the air flow
temperatures may not accurately correlate with the
set temperature according to circumstances, when
the air flow temperature settings on the left and right
are substantially different. For example, if the left
controller is set at central or neutral temperature
while the right one is set at maximum heating or
maximum cooling, or vice versa. If this situation
occurs, use the fine tune operation to adjust the air
temperature on each side.
AIR CONDITIONING
SETTING OPERATION—manual control
When one of the manual control switches is depressed
while operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to
the depressed switch is set. Other conditions continue to
be adjusted automatically.
If manual air flow selection is desired—
G21006
G21005a
The outlets from which air is delivered can be selected
manually by touching the switch. The function of each mode
is as follows:
1
Panel—Air flows mainly from the instrument panel vents
and rear vents.
2
Bi−level—Air flows from the floor vents, the instrument
panel vents and rear vents.
Driver side setting
Passenger side setting
Mixed setting
When you set the temperature selector setting at about
the middle in automatic operation, warm air flows out of
the floor vents and relatively low−temperature air flows
out of the instrument panel vents and rear vents.
265
AIR CONDITIONING
3
Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor vents and rear
vents.
4
Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly from the floor vents,
windshield vents and rear vents.
If manual switching of air intake is desired—
Take in the fresh air by selecting the OUTSIDE AIR mode with
the air intake control button.
G21008
If manual fan speed control is desired—
G21007
1 Fan speed at low
2 Fan speed at high
Each time you push the air intake control button, the mode
changes in order from the RECIRCULATED AIR mode to
AUTOMATIC mode to OUTSIDE AIR mode, then back to the
RECIRCULATED AIR mode. Each indicator light shows which
mode is now selected.
1
RECIRCULATED AIR mode—If quick circulation of
cooled air is desired, select this mode.
2
EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode—If the outside air
contains harmful substances like exhaust gas (i.e., when
the vehicle running just in front of your vehicle accelerates
rapidly), the system changes automatically from the
OUTSIDE AIR mode (with indicators 2 and 3 on) to
the RECIRCULATED AIR mode (with indicators 1 and
2 on).
3
OUTSIDE AIR mode—The system will take fresh outside
air into the vehicle.
The fan speed can be set to your desired speed by touching
the appropriate air flow control switch. The higher the fan
speed is, the more air is delivered. Pushing the ”OFF” button
turns off the fan.
To remove exterior windshield frost and interior windshield fog,
use the high speed setting.
266
AIR CONDITIONING
To prevent fogging up of the windshield, the air intake mode
may change automatically to the OUTSIDE AIR mode
depending on the condition of the air conditioning system.
For example, when the ambient temperature is low, the air
intake mode may change automatically to the OUTSIDE AIR
mode. This is not a malfunction.
When the air conditioning is on, if the engine coolant
temperature becomes extremely high, the RECIRCULATED
AIR mode is automatically selected. This is not a malfunction.
When the engine coolant temperature is lowered, the previous
mode resumes.
Turning off the air conditioning manually will cancel the
EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode. If you select the “AUTO”
mode during fan operating, the air conditioning turns on and
the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode will operate.
To change the sensitivity of the sensor switching between
the RECIRCULATED AIR and OUTSIDE AIR in the
AUTOMATIC mode, push the air intake control button and
hold it for a few seconds. The display changes to the one
illustrated below.
The sensitivity of the sensor can be adjusted only while the
vehicle has been stopped.
G21023
For normal use, it is best to keep the air intake control button
set to OUTSIDE AIR mode. If recirculated air is used during
heating, the windows will fog up more easily.
The sensitivity of the switches is set to be higher toward “HI”
and lower toward “LO”.
Touch the desired switch on the screen.
When you push any button except the air intake control button,
the above screen goes off.
267
AIR CONDITIONING
If manual on−off of the air conditioning is desired—
(b) Windshield defogging and defrosting
Touch the ”A/C” switch to turn the air conditioning on and touch
it again to turn the air conditioning off. If you turn off the air
conditioning manually, the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC
mode will be cancelled.
If the outside temperature is lowered down to around 0C
(32F), the air conditioning will turn off automatically. At this
time, the indicator on the A/C switch is off and the EXHAUST
GAS AUTOMATIC indicator light remains on. However, the
EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode does not operate. When
the air conditioning turns on as with the raised temperature, the
EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode resumes.
268
G21010
If the system is used for ventilation, heating in dry weather or
removing frost or exterior fog on the windshield, turn the air
conditioning off once it is no longer required. This will improve
fuel economy. The air conditioning can be used for year−round
automatic temperature control including cooling and
dehumidifying operation.
To remove interior fog on the windshield—
If the air conditioning compressor does not operate, the
indicator of the ”A/C” switch will blink. If the indicator of the
”A/C” switch blinks even when the ”A/C” switch is touched
again, have the compressor checked by your nearest Lexus
dealer.
2. Push the windshield air flow button.
Push the windshield air flow button.
To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield—
1. Push the “TEMP” (” ”) button to set the “HI”.
3. Touch fan speed control switch on the right side to obtain a
maximum air flow.
4. Leave the “A/C” switch off.
AIR CONDITIONING
When the windshield air flow button is pushed while operating
in automatic mode, the air conditioning is set to operate and the
OUTSIDE AIR mode is set. This is to clean up the front view
more quickly. If you want to return the setting to the
RECIRCULATED AIR mode, push the air intake control button
once again.
Touch the “A/C” switch for dehumidified heating or cooling.
This setting clears the front view more quickly.
(c) Micro dust and pollen filter
This vehicle is equipped with a micro dust and pollen filter
mode. When this mode is activated, air from the vents will
remove pollen on the driver and passengers.
Use this mode to remove pollen quickly carried by the
driver or passengers or through the window in the days
with much pollen.
If you push the windshield air flow button once again while in
the windshield air flow mode, the mode then returns to the last
mode used.
CAUTION
G21073
Do not use the windshield air flow button during cooled
air operation in extremely humid weather.
The
difference between the temperature of the outside air
and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface
of the windshield to fog up blocking your vision.
Push the micro dust and pollen filter button.
The indicator light comes on and RECIRCULATED AIR mode
is turned on. Air is delivered from the instrument panel vents
to the areas near the driver and passengers to remove pollen
on them. When the interior is purified sufficiently with fresh air
after about 3 minutes, this mode will be turned off automatically
and the indicator light will go out.
269
AIR CONDITIONING
However, when the outside temperature is low, the indicator
light comes on and the “A/C” switch turns on, but the air intake
control remains the same. When the interior is purified
sufficiently with fresh air after about 1 minute, this mode will be
turned off automatically and the indicator light will go out, but
the “A/C” switch remains on.
When the micro dust and pollen filter is activated, this mode will
be turned off by pushing any of the following buttons:
Micro dust and pollen filter button
“A/C” button
Windshield air flow button
The indicator light will go out when the mode is turned off.
INFORMATION
Use and push the windshield air flow button to
remove the fog on the windshield in rainy days.
Fresh air is delivered even when the micro dust and
pollen filter button is turned off.
270
(d) Operating tips
To help cool down the interior after parking in the hot sun,
drive for the first few minutes with the windows open. After
the excess heat has blown away, close the windows.
Make sure the air inlet grilles in front of the windshield are
not blocked by leaves or other obstructions.
If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the dashboard
vents and rear vents. (See (e) “Center vents, side vents and
rear vents”.)
Only humid days, do not blow cold air on the windshield.
The windshield could fog up because of the difference in air
temperature on the inside and outside of the windshield.
Keep the area under the front seats clear to allow air to
circulate throughout the vehicle.
On cold days, set the fan speed to high for a minute to help
clear the intake ducts of snow or moisture. This can reduce
the amount of fogging on the windows.
When driving on dusty roads, close all windows. If dust
thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake
control button be set to the OUTSIDE AIR mode to take in
the fresh air and the fan speed selector to any setting except
OFF.
AIR CONDITIONING
If following another vehicle on a dusty road, or driving in
windy and dusty conditions, it is recommended that the air
intake control button be temporarily pressed in to the
RECIRCULATED AIR mode, which will close off the outside
passage and prevent outside air and dust from entering the
vehicle interior.
Heating
For best results, set controls to:
For automatic operation—
Push in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—To the desired temperature
Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR
Air conditioning—OFF
For manual operation—
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards high temperature
Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow—FLOOR
Air conditioning—OFF
For quick heating, select RECIRCULATED AIR mode for a
few minutes. To keep the windows from fogging, select
OUTSIDE AIR mode after the vehicle interior has been
warmed.
Touch the “A/C” switch on for dehumidified heating.
Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat the vehicle interior
while defrosting or defogging the windshield.
Air conditioning
For best results, set controls to:
For automatic operation—
Push in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—To the desired temperature
Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR
Air conditioning—ON
271
AIR CONDITIONING
For manual operation—
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards low temperature
Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—ON
For quick cooling, select RECIRCULATED AIR mode for a
few minutes.
Defogging and defrosting
—The inside of the windshield
For best results, set controls to:
For automatic operation—
Temperature— Towards high temperature to heat;
low temperature to cool
Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Ventilation
For best results, set controls to:
For automatic operation—
Push in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—Towards low temperature
Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR
Air conditioning—OFF
For manual operation—
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards low temperature
Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—OFF
272
For manual operation—
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature— Towards high temperature to heat;
low temperature to cool
Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
When the windshield air flow button is pushed, air flows mainly
from the windshield vents and turns on the defogging function
with the purpose of clearing the front view.
Pushing this button once again returns the air flow mode to the
last one used.
This button allows the air intake to select OUTSIDE AIR mode
automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATED AIR mode,
push the air intake control button once again.
AIR CONDITIONING
Touch the “A/C” switch for dehumidified heating or cooling.
This setting clears the front view more quickly.
Only humid days, do not blow cold air on the
windshield—the difference between the outside and inside
temperatures could make the fogging worse.
—The outside of the windshield
For best results, set controls to:
This button allows the air intake to select OUTSIDE AIR mode
automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATED AIR mode,
push the air intake control button once again.
Touch the “A/C” switch for dehumidified heating or cooling.
This setting clears the front view more quickly.
To heat the vehicle interior while defrosting the windshield,
choose floor/windshield air flow.
For automatic operation—
Temperature— Towards high temperature
Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
(e) Center vents, side vents and rear vents
For manual operation—
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature— Towards high temperature
Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
When the windshield air flow button is pushed, air flows mainly
from the windshield vents and turns on the defogging function
with the purpose of clearing the front view.
G21015
Center vents
Pushing this button once again returns the air flow mode to the
last one used.
273
AIR CONDITIONING
G21016
Side vents (driver’s side)
G21017
Rear vents
If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the center
vents, side vents and rear vents. They may be opened or
closed as shown.
G21064
When outside temperature is low like a winter season, air flow
temperature from the center vents, side vents and rear vents
may not be warmed up enough for a while until the engine
coolant temperature becomes high enough.
If air flow from the center vents, side vents and rear vents is not
satisfactory, air flow direction can be changed manually by
adjusting the vents fin direction or the vents may be closed.
Side vents (front passenger’s side)
274
AIR CONDITIONING
(f) Replacing the air conditioning filter
G21012
G21011
The air conditioning filter is behind the glove box.
The air conditioning filter information label is placed in the
glove box as shown and indicates that a filter has been
installed.
The air conditioning filter, in addition to removing odors,
prevents dust and pollen from entering the vehicle through the
air conditioning vent.
The air conditioning filter may clog after long use. The filter
may need to be replaced if the air flow of the air conditioning
and heater experiences extreme reductions in operating
efficiency, or if the windows fog up easily.
If the symptoms of air conditioning efficiency problems occur,
contact your nearest Lexus dealer to have the filter cleaned or
replaced.
To maintain the air conditioning efficiency, replace the air
conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In
dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, such as inner city
or desert areas, early replacement may be required. (For
scheduled maintenance information, see the “Owner’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”).
275
AIR CONDITIONING
1. Turn the air intake control to RECIRCULATED AIR
mode.
The filter case cannot be removed in the OUTSIDE AIR mode.
2. Turn off the engine switch.
3. When you replace the filter, be sure to turn off the fan.
G21013
4. Open the glove box and remove the partition by pulling.
G21019
5. Pull the filter cover toward you.
G21020
6. Push the tabs and pull the filter case toward you.
276
AIR CONDITIONING
9. Inspect the filter on the surface.
If it is dirty, it should be replaced.
G21021
7. Take out the filter.
NOTICE
When setting the filter to the filter case, the UP marks
shown on the filter and filter case should be noted and
fitted as shown.
INFORMATION
The air conditioning filter should be installed properly
in position. The use of air conditioning with the filter
removed may cause deteriorated dustproof performance and then affect air conditioning performance.
G21022
8. Remove the filter from the filter case.
277
AIR CONDITIONING
278
SECTION
2–2
AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
Audio
Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
279
AUDIO
AUDIO SYSTEM
Quick reference for your audio system
G22108
A Vehicles with Navigation system
280
B Vehicles without Navigation system
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Audio operation screen display button
The audio operation screen is shown.
Function switch display screen
(See page 286 for details.)
CD slot
(See page 306 or details.)
Mode selectors
(See page 285 for details.)
Frequency turning knob
(See page 291 for details.)
CD load button
(See page 306 for details.)
Radio mode:
Preset tuning
(See page 291 for details.)
Tape mode:
Side change of cassette tape
(See page 304 for details.)
CD mode:
Disc selection
(See page 309 for details.)
Scan button
(See page 292 for details.)
Cassette tape slot
(See page 302 for details.)
Stopping and ejecting a cassette tape
(See page 302 for details.)
11
12
13
Seek tuning
(See page 292 for details.)
Tape/CD mode: Direct access to a desired
program
(See page 305 or 310 for details.)
Ejecting a CD
(See page 307 or details.)
Turning the system on and adjusting the volume
(See page 285 for details.)
Radio mode:
281
AUDIO
Quick reference for your audio system
G22109
A Vehicles with Navigation system B Vehicles without Navigation system
For a Mark Levinson brand audio system
282
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Audio operation screen display button
The audio operation screen is shown.
Touch screen
(See page 286 for details.)
Disc slot
(See page 306 or details.)
Mode selectors
(See page 285 for details.)
Frequency turning knob
(See page 291 for details.)
Disc load button
(See page 306 for details.)
Radio mode:
Preset tuning
(See page 291 for details.)
Tape mode:
Side change of cassette tape
(See page 303 for details.)
DISC mode:
Disc selection
(See page 309 for details.)
Scan button
(See page 292 for details.)
Cassette tape slot
(See page 302 for details.)
Stopping and ejecting a cassette tape
(See page 302 for details.)
11
Radio mode:
Tape/DISC
mode:
12
13
Seek tuning
(See page 292 for details.)
Direct access to a desired
program
(See page 305 or 310 for details.)
Ejecting a disc
(See page 307 or details.)
Turning the system on and adjusting the volume
(See page 285 for details.)
283
AUDIO
Using your audio system: some basics
Vehicles with navigation system only:
This section describes some of the basic features of the Lexus
audio system. Some information may not pertain to your
system.
Your audio system works when the engine switch is selected
in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode.
G21047a
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the audio system on longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
By pushing the button above, you can operate the speech
command system.
For the operation of the speech command system, see the
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
284
AUDIO
(a) Turning the system on, volume control and mode
selection
G22003
G22002
Push the “AM (AM·SAT)”, “FM”, “TAPE” or “DISC” button
to turn on that mode. The selected mode turns on directly.
POWER−VOL: Push this knob to turn the audio system on and
off. Turn this knob to adjust the volume. The system turns on
in the last mode used.
Push these buttons if you want to switch from one mode to
another.
If the tape or disc is not set, the tape mode or disc mode does
not turn on.
You can turn off the cassette player by ejecting the cassette
tape. If the audio system was previously off, then the entire
audio system will be turned off when you eject the cassette
tape. If another function was previously playing, it will come on
again.
285
AUDIO
G22004
Radio mode
Disc mode
G22067
Tape mode
G22052
G22062
Disc mode (for a Mark Levinson audio system)
The switches for radio, cassette tape and CD player or
DVD player (if a Mark Levinson audio system is installed)
operation are displayed on the liquid crystal display.
Touch them lightly and directly on the screen.
286
AUDIO
The selected switch is highlighted in green, or the bar on the
upper side is highlighted in yellow.
(b) Tone and balance
How good an audio program sounds to you is largely
determined by the mix of the treble, mid−range, and bass
levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs
usually sound better with different mixes of treble, mid−range,
and bass.
G22007
A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the
front and rear sound levels is also important.
Keep in mind that if you are listening to a stereo recording or
broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the
volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume
of another.
BASS “+” or “–”: Adjusts low−pitched tones.
MID “+” or “–”: Adjusts mid−pitched tones.
TREB “+” or “–”: Adjusts high−pitched tones.
“FRONT” or “REAR”: Adjusts sound balance between the
front and rear speakers.
“L” or “R”: Adjusts sound balance between the left and right
speakers.
G22004
“OK”: The previous screen returns.
Touching the “SOUND” switch on the screen displays the
sound adjustment screen.
287
AUDIO
(c) DSP control
Positioning selector:
By selecting the listening position, the system controls the
output timing of the speakers to allow sound to be heard
evenly, creating the ideal music environment.
Touching “CHANGE” the position switches in the following
order; all seats, driver’s seat, front seats and rear seats.
G22008
To display the DSP control mode, touch the “DSP” switch
displayed on the audio control mode screen. You can turn
on/off the automatic sound levelizer, or select the position
on the DSP screen.
Automatic sound levelizer (ASL):
When the audio sound becomes difficult to be heard due to
road noise, wind noise, etc. during driving, touch the “ASL”
switch. The system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone
quality according to the noise level.
When the system is on, the sound adjustment level is
displayed on the screen.
288
The POSITION currently selected is displayed on the screen.
AUDIO
If a Mark Levinson brand audio system is installed:
(d) Your radio antenna
The wire antenna is mounted inside the rear window.
NOTICE
G22066
Automatic sound levelizer (ASL):
When the audio sound becomes difficult to be heard due to
road noise, wind noise, etc. during driving, touch the “ASL”
switch. The system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone
quality according to the noise level.
When the system is on, the sound adjustment level is
displayed on the screen.
SURROUND:
If you touch “SURROUND”, surround sound will be enabled.
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the wire antenna.
Putting a film (especially a conductive or metallic
film) on the rear window may affect the reception of
radio or mobile telephone. For the installation of the
film, consult with your Lexus dealer.
(e) Your cassette player
When you insert a cassette, the exposed tape should be to the
right.
NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the cassette
player. Do not insert anything other than cassette tapes
into the slot.
289
AUDIO
(f) Your automatic changer
Radio operation
(a) Listening to the radio
G22046
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic changer which can
store up to 6 discs, and play selected discs or continuously play
all the discs set in the player.
When you insert discs into the player, make sure their labels
face upward. If the disc is inserted incorrectly, the player will
display “CD CHECK” or “DISC CHECK”.
NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the CD
player or DVD player. Do not insert anything other
than discs into the slot.
Do not insert a disc upon another one, or it will
damage to the automatic changer. Insert only one
disc into the slot at a time.
Your CD player or DVD player is intended for use with 12 cm
(4.7 in.) discs only.
290
G22009
Push “AM (AM·SAT)” or “FM” button to choose either an
AM or FM band.
The “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” screen appears on the display.
If your vehicle is equipped with satellite radio broadcast
system, when you push the “AM·SAT” button, “AM”,
“SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” station appears on the display. For
details about satellite radio broadcast, see “Radio operation
(XM satellite radio broadcast)” on page 295
AUDIO
(b) Presetting a station
G22010
G22004
Turn this knob to step up or down the frequency.
Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a
stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If
the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of
channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating
noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio
switches from stereo to mono reception. In this case, “ST”
disappears from the display.
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Touch one of the station selector switches (1−6) and
hold it until a beep is heard. This sets the station to the
switch and the frequency appears on the switch.
Each switch can store AM, FM1 and FM2. To change the
preset station to a different one, follow the same procedure.
The preset station memory is cancelled when the power
source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse.
291
AUDIO
(c) Selecting a station
Your Lexus has an electronic tuning radio (ETR). Tune in the
desired station using one of the following methods.
G22021
G22073
Scan tuning:Push the “SCAN” button. “SCAN” appears on
the display. The radio will find the next station up or down the
band, stay there for a few seconds, and then scan again. To
select a station, push the “SCAN” button a second time.
Preset tuning: Touch the switch (1−6) or push the “CH DISC
” or “ ” button for the station you want. The switch (1−6)
is highlighted in green and station frequency appears on the
display.
Manual tuning: Turn the “TUNE” knob briefly. When you turn
the knob, the radio will step up or down to another frequency.
Seek tuning: Push the “SEEK TRACK
” or “
” button.
The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the
nearest frequency and will stop on reception. Each time you
push the button, the stations will be searched out one after
another.
292
Preset scan tuning: Push the “SCAN” button and hold it until
you hear a beep. “P. SCAN” appears on the display. The radio
will tune in the next preset station up or down the band, stay
there for a few seconds, and then move to the next preset
station. To select a station, push the “SCAN” button a second
time.
AUDIO
(d) RDS (Radio Data System)
MISC.
Program type
ALERT (Emergency message)
G22053
G22012
When you touch the “TYPE ” or “TYPE ” switch on the
screen, the current program type receiving from RDS station
appears on the display.
When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” switch appears. Touch
the switch and the system starts to seek the station in the
relevant program type.
If the system receives no RDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on
the display.
Traffic program: A station that regularly broadcasts traffic
information is automatically located.
When you touch the “TRAF” switch, “TRAF SEEK” appears on
the display and the radio will start seeking any traffic program
station.
Each time you touch the “TYPE ” or “TYPE ” switch, the
program type changes as in the following:
ROCK
EASY LIS (Easy listening)
CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)
R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
INFORM (Information)
If any traffic program station is not found, “NOTHING” appears
and the previous mode returns.
If the traffic program station is found, the name for traffic
program station is displayed and “TRAF” is lit for a while until
traffic announcement is received.
RELIGION
293
AUDIO
Radio text
G22004
If the system receives a radio text from RDS station, “MSG”
appears on the display. Touch the “MSG” switch, and a text
message is displayed on the screen.
294
G22013
In case a text message is not accepted in a screen, you can
touch the “MSG” switch and hold it to display the rest of the
message.
When the system can show the station name, “RDS” appears
on the display. Each time you touch the “MSG” switch,
indication on the display changes from the band to the station
name, a radio text in this order. After six seconds passes,
indication returns to the band.
AUDIO
Radio operation
(XM satellite radio broadcast)
Customers should have their radio ID ready; the radio ID can
be found by selecting the “channel 000” on the radio. For
details, see the “Displaying the radio ID” that follows.
To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in your vehicle, an
additional genuine Lexus satellite receiver and antenna must
be purchased and installed, and the subscription to the XM
satellite radio is necessary.
All fees and programming are the responsibility of the XM
satellite radio and are subject to change.
(a) How to subscribe to an XM satellite radio
An XM satellite radio is a tuner designed exclusively to
receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription.
Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous states.
How to subscribe:
You must enter into a separate service agreement with the
XM radio in order to receive satellite broadcast programming
in the vehicle. Additional activation and service subscription
fees apply that are not included in the purchase price of the
vehicle and optional digital satellite tuner. For complete
information on subscription rates and terms, or to subscribe to
the XM radio, visit XM on the web at www.xmradio.com or
call an XM’s Listener Care at (800) 967−2346. The XM radio
is solely responsible for the quality, availability and content of
the satellite radio services provided, which are subject to the
terms and conditions of the XM radio customer service
agreement.
Satellite tuner technology notice:
Lexus satellite radio tuners are awarded Type Approval
Certificates from XM Satellite Radio Inc. as proof of
compatibility with the services offered by the XM satellite
radio.
(b) Displaying the radio ID
Each XM tuner is identified with a unique radio ID. You will
need the radio ID when activating XM service or when
reporting a problem.
If you select the “CH 000” using the “TUNE” knob, the ID code
of 8 alphanumeric characters appears. If you select another
channel, display of the ID code is canceled. The channel (000)
alternates the display between the radio ID and the specific
radio ID code.
295
AUDIO
(c) Listening to the satellite radio
G22014
Push the “AM·SAT” button to choose a SAT channel.
Besides “AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” appears on the
display.
296
G22010
Turn this knob to select the next or previous channel.
If you turn continuously, you can rapidly scroll forward or down
through the channels.
AUDIO
(d) Presetting a channel
(e) Selecting a channel
Tune in the desired channel using one of the following
methods.
G22015
1. Tune in the desired channel.
2. Touch one of the channel selector switches (1−6) and
hold it until a beep is heard. This sets the channel to the
switch and the frequency appears on the switch.
Each switch can store three SAT channels. To change the
preset channel to a different one, follow the same procedure.
Preset tuning: Touch the switch (1−6) or push the “CH DISC
” or “ ” button for the channel you want. The switch (1−6)
is highlighted in green.
Manual tuning within the channel category: Turn the
“TUNE” knob. The radio will step up or down the channel.
Manual tuning within the current channel category: Push
” or “
” button. The radio will step up
the “SEEK TRACK
or down the channel within the current channel category.
Touch the “TYPE SEEK” switch. The radio will step up the
channel within the current channel category.
The preset channel memory is cancelled when the power
source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse.
297
AUDIO
(f) Channel category
G22016
To scan the currently selected channel category: Touch the
“TYPE SCAN” switch or push the “SCAN” button briefly.
“SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will find the next
channel in the same channel category, stay there for a few
seconds, and then scan again. To select a channel, push the
“SCAN” button a second time.
To scan the preset channels: Touch the “TYPE SCAN”
switch or push the “SCAN” button and hold it until you hear a
beep. “P.SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will find the
next preset channel, stay there for a few seconds, and then
move to the next preset channel. To select a channel, push the
“SCAN” button a second time.
298
G22017
Touch either “TYPE ” or “TYPE ” switch to switch to the next
or previous category.
AUDIO
(g) Displaying the title and name
G22018
When you touch the “TEXT” switch, the song/program title and
the artist name/feature are displayed.
Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can be displayed. (Some
information will not be fully displayed.)
299
AUDIO
(h) If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions
When problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the display. Referring to the table below to identify the problem,
take the suggested corrective action.
The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna cable is attached securely.
ANTENNA
A short−circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified
dealer.
You have not subscribed to the XM satellite radio. The radio is being updated with the latest
encryption code. Contact the XM satellite radio for subscription information. When a contact
is canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all free−to−air channels.
UPDATING
NO SIGNAL
The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio
returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another
channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM satellite radio.
The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location
with a stronger signal.
LOADING
The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the
information.
OFF AIR
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.
−−−−−
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time.
No action needed.
−−−
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio
returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another
channel.
The XM Listener Care Center is also available on the phone, please call (800) 852−9696 during the following hours:
Monday – Saturday: 7 a.m. – 1 a.m. Sunday: 12 p.m – 12 a.m.
300
AUDIO
NOTICE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation.
This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
Information to user
Alternation or modifications carried out without
appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s
right to operate the equipment.
301
AUDIO
NOTICE
Cassette tape player operation
(a) Playing a cassette tape
This XM tuner supports “Audio Services” (Music and
Talk) of only XM satellite radio and “Text Information”,
linked to the respective “Audio Services”.
*Text Information includes, Station Name, (Artist)
Name, (Song) Title and Category Name.
G22019
When you insert a cassette tape, the exposed tape should
face to the right.
The player will automatically start when you insert a cassette
tape. At this time, the “TAPE” screen appears on the display.
If a metal or chrome equivalent cassette tape is put in the
cassette player, the player will automatically recognize it and
“MTL” appears on the display.
To stop or eject the cassette tape, push the “
button.
302
” (eject)
AUDIO
(b) Manual program selection
G22068
G22069
If a cassette is already in the slot, push the “TAPE” button.
Dolby Noise Reduction* feature: If you are listening to a
tape that was recorded with Dolby Noise Reduction, touch
” switch. The bar on the upper side will be highlighted
the “
in yellow. Touch the switch again to turn off Dolby NR.
The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise by about 10 dB. For
best sound reproduction, play your tapes with this switch on or
off according to the mode used for recording the tape.
To play a tape recorded without Dolby NR, touch the switch
again to turn off the Dolby NR.
Reverse switch: You can reverse the tape by touching the
” switch or pushing the “CH DISC
“
” or “ ” button.
The display will show the opposite direction after reversing the
tape. Also if the tape reaches the end of one side, it is
automatically reversed to the other side.
Fast forward and Rewind switches: You can fast forward or
fast rewind by touching the “
” or “” switch.
To stop the tape while it is fast forwarding, touch “”, to stop
the tape while it is rewinding, touch “
”.
* Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
double−D symbol
Licensing Corporation.
303
AUDIO
If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette player will stop and
then play the same side. If a tape fast forwards completely, the
cassette player will play the other side of the tape using the
auto−reverse feature.
Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the
end of a tape, it automatically reverses and begins to play the
other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or
fast forwarding.
(c) Automatic program selection
G22070
“RPT” switch: The repeat feature automatically replays the
current program.
Touch the “RPT” switch while the program is playing. When the
program ends, it will automatically be rewound and replayed.
Touch the switch again to turn off the repeat feature.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between
programs for the repeat feature to work correctly.
“SKIP” switch: The skip feature allows you to fast forward
past long stretches of blank tape. This is especially useful at
the end of cassettes.
Touch the “SKIP” switch. The player will automatically skip any
blank portions of 15 seconds or more and play the next
program. To cancel it, touch the switch once again.
304
AUDIO
When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically
reverses sides and resumes normal play.
G22134
“Automatic program selection” button: The automatic
program selection feature allows you to program your cassette
player to skip forward or backward to locate the song you want
to hear. You can skip up to 9 programs at a time.
Push the “SEEK TRACK
”button to skip forward. “FF” and
the number will appear on the display. Push the button until the
number you want to skip appears on the display. After that, the
player will automatically skip forward.
” button on the lower side to skip
Push the “SEEK TRACK
backward. Push the button until “REW” and the number you
want to skip appear on the display.
If you set “REW 1”, the player will rewind to the beginning
of the current program.
When counting the number of programs you want to rewind,
remember to count the current program as well. For
example, if you want to rewind to a song that is two before
the song you are listening to, push this button until “REW
3” appears on the display.
When the beginning of the tape is reached, the player
automatically resumes normal play.
There must be at least 5 seconds of blank space between
programs for this feature to work correctly.
“RPT”, “SKIP” or “Automatic program selection”
features: These features may not work well with some spoken
word, live or classical recordings.
305
AUDIO
CD player operation
2. Insert only one disc while the CD door is open.
(a) Inserting or ejecting CDs
You can set a disc at the lowest empty disc number.
The engine switch must be in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode.
After insertion, the set disc is automatically loaded.
Your automatic changer can store up to 6 discs.
If the label faces downward, the disc cannot be played. In this
case, “CD CHECK” appears on the display.
If you need to insert the next disc, repeat the same procedure
to insert another disc.
Setting all the discs:
G22022
1. Push the “LOAD” button until you hear a beep.
The green indicators at both ends of the slot start blinking and
“WAIT” appears on the display. After the blinking indicators
stay on and the “WAIT” changes to the “LOAD”, the CD door
opens.
2. Insert only one disc while the CD door is open.
Setting a single CD:
The CD door closes and “WAIT” appears again.
1. Push the “LOAD” button briefly.
3. Insert the next disc after the “WAIT” changes to the
“LOAD” and the CD door opens.
The green indicators at both ends of the slot start blinking and
“WAIT” appears on the display. After the blinking indicators
stay on and the “WAIT” changes to the “LOAD”, the CD door
opens.
4. Repeat this procedure until you insert all the discs.
To cancel the operation, push the “LOAD” or “DISC” button.
If you do not insert the discs within 15 seconds after pushing
the “LOAD” button and “LOAD” is displayed, the operation will
be canceled automatically.
306
AUDIO
NOTICE
Do not insert one disc stacked on top of another one or
feed them in continuously, to prevent discs from getting
stuck in the player.
G22023
Ejecting a single CD:
1. Push the “CH DISC ” or “ ” button to highlight the
disc number you want to eject.
2. Push the “
” (eject) button for the CD briefly.
At this time, the green indicators of the slot start blinking.
Ejecting all the discs:
Push the “
beep.
” (eject) button for the CD until you hear a
307
AUDIO
(b) Playing a CD
G22052
G22026
The numbers of the trays where the CD is not set are dimmed.
Push the “DISC” button if CDs are already loaded in the
player.
The “CD CHANGER” screen appears on the display.
The discs set in the player are played continuously, starting
with the last disc you inserted. The disc number of the disc
currently being played, the track number and the time from the
beginning of the program are shown on the display.
When play of one disc ends, the first track of the following disc
starts. When play of the final disc ends, play of the first disc
starts again.
The player will skip any empty disc trays.
308
AUDIO
(c) Selecting a desired disc
(d) Searching for a desired disc
G22118
G22056
On the screen: Touch the desired disc number.
Touch the “DISC SCAN” switch.
The selected disc number is highlighted in green.
With the bar on the upper side highlighted in yellow, the
program at the beginning of each disc will be played for 10
seconds. To continue listening to the program of your choice,
touch the “DISC SCAN” switch a second time.
The player will start playing the selected disc from the first
track.
On the audio panel: Push the “CH DISC
” or “
” button.
When you release the button, the player will start playing the
selected disc from the first track.
After all the tracks are scanned in one pass, normal play
resumes.
309
AUDIO
(e) Selecting a desired track
G22115
“SEEK TRACK” button: Use for direct access to a desired
track.
Push the “SEEK TRACK ” or “ ”button and hold it until the
desired track number appears on the display. As you release
the button, the player will start playing the selected track from
the beginning.
Fast forward: Touch the “ ” switch and hold it to fast forward
the disc. When you release the switch, the CD player will
resume playing from that position.
Reverse: Touch the “ ” switch and hold it to reverse the disc.
When you release the switch, the CD player will resume
playing.
310
(f) Searching for a desired track
G22058
Touch the “SCAN” switch.
The bar on the upper side is highlighted in yellow. The CD
player will play the next track for 10 seconds, then scan again.
To select a track, touch the “SCAN” switch a second time. If
the player reaches the end of the disc, it will continue scanning
at track 1.
After all the tracks are scanned in one pass, normal play
resumes.
AUDIO
(g) Other CD player functions
“DISC RAND” switch: Use it for automatic track selection for
all the discs and play by the system.
When the switch is touched, the system selects a track in all
the discs which are set and plays it. To cancel it, touch the
switch once again.
G22072
When a track is skipped or the system is inoperative, touch the
switch to reset.
“RAND” switch: Use it for automatic and random selection
of the disc which you are currently listening to.
“RPT” switch: Use it for automatic repeat of the track you are
currently listening to.
Touch the switch while the track is playing. When the track is
finished, the player will automatically go back to the beginning
of the track and play the track again. To cancel it, touch the
switch once again.
When the switch is touched, the system selects a track in the
disc you are currently listening to. To cancel it, touch the switch
once again.
“TITLE” switch: Use it for displaying the disc title and track
title while the CD−TEXT disc is playing.
“DISC RPT” switch: Use it for automatic repeat of the disc you
are currently listening to.
Touch the switch while the disc is playing. When the disc is
finished, the player will automatically go back to the beginning
of the disc and play the disc again. To cancel it, touch the
button once again.
311
AUDIO
(h) If the player malfunctions
If the player or another unit equipped with the player
malfunctions, our audio system will display one of the following
error messages.
G22078
If “CD CHECK” appears on the display: It indicates that the
disc is dirty, damaged or it was inserted up side down. Clean
the disc or insert it correctly.
If “CD ERROR” appears on the display: The following
causes are possible.
Up to 29 letters can be displayed. “NO TITLE” is displayed
while the CD−TEXT disc is not playing. To cancel it, touch the
“TITLE OFF” switch.
There is trouble inside the system. Eject the disc.
The inside of the player unit may be too hot due to the very
high ambient temperature. Eject the disc and allow the
player to cool down.
If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your
Lexus dealer.
312
AUDIO
DVD player operation (For a Mark Levinson
brand audio system)
(a) Inserting or ejecting discs
The DVD player can play audio CDs, DVD video discs and
video CDs.
Your automatic changer can store up to 6 discs.
The engine switch must be in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode.
For appropriate discs for this paper, see “Audio system
operating hints” on page 339.
For safety reasons, you can enjoy DVD video discs and video
CDs only when the vehicle is completely stopped with the
engine switch in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode and the parking
brake applied. While you are driving, you can hear audio alone
even in the DVD video or video CD mode.
G22048
The DVD player can play the discs labeled as shown below.
Setting a single disc:
1. Push the “LOAD” button briefly.
The green indicators at both ends of the slot start blinking and
“WAIT” appears on the display. After the blinking indicators
stay on and the “WAIT” changes to the “LOAD”, the DVD door
opens.
313
AUDIO
2. Insert only one disc while the DVD door is open.
You can set a disc at the lowest empty disc number.
After insertion, the set disc is automatically loaded.
If the label faces downward, the disc cannot be played. In this
case, “DISC CHECK” appears on the display.
If you need to insert the next disc, repeat the same procedure
to insert another disc.
Setting all the discs:
1. Push the “LOAD” button until you hear a beep.
The green indicators at both ends of the slot start blinking and
“WAIT” appears on the display. After the blinking indicators
stay on and the “WAIT” changes to the “LOAD”, the DVD door
opens.
2. Insert only one disc while the DVD door is open.
The DVD door closes and “WAIT” appears again.
3. Insert the next disc after the “WAIT” changes to the
“LOAD” and the DVD door opens.
4. Repeat this procedure until you insert all the discs.
To cancel the operation, push the “LOAD” or “DISC” button.
If you do not insert the discs within 15 seconds after pushing
the “LOAD” button and “LOAD” is displayed, the operation will
be canceled automatically.
314
NOTICE
Do not insert one disc stacked on top of another one or
feed them in continuously, to prevent discs from getting
stuck in the player.
AUDIO
G22049
Ejecting a single disc alone:
G22062
The numbers of the trays where the disc is not set are dimmed.
1. Push the “CH DISC ” or “ ” button to highlight the
disc number you want to eject.
2. Push the “
” (eject) button for the disc briefly.
At this time, the green indicators of the slot start blinking.
Ejecting all the discs:
Push the “
a beep.
” (eject) button for the disc until you hear
315
AUDIO
(b) Playing a disc
G22050
Push the “DISC” button if discs are already loaded in the
player.
The “DVD CHANGER” screen appears on the display.
The discs set in the player are played continuously, starting
with the last disc you inserted. The disc number of the disc
currently being played, the track number and the time from the
beginning of the program are shown on the display.
When play of one disc ends, the first track of the following disc
starts. When play of the final disc ends, play of the first disc
starts again.
The player will skip any empty disc trays.
316
(c) Selecting a desired disc
G22114
On the screen: Touch the desired disc number.
The selected disc number is highlighted in green.
The player will start playing the selected disc from the first
track.
On the audio panel: Push the “CH DISC
” or “
” button.
When you release the button, the player will start playing the
selected disc from the first track.
AUDIO
(d) Operating an audio CD
Selecting a desired track—
Playing an audio CD—
G22062
Push the “AUDIO” button to display this screen. You can
operate the switches and choose the number of the disc
you want to play. The selected disc is automatically
played.
G22112
“SEEK TRACK” button: Use for direct access to a desired
track.
Push the “SEEK TRACK ” or “ ” button and hold it until the
desired track number appears on the display. As you release
the button, the player will start playing the selected track from
the beginning.
Fast forward: Touch the “ ” switch and hold it to fast forward
the disc. When you release the switch, the player will resume
playing from that position.
Reverse: Touch the “ ” switch and hold it to reverse the disc.
When you release the switch, the player will resume playing.
317
AUDIO
Searching for a desired track or a disc—
G22061
Touch the “SCAN” switch.
The bar on the upper side will be highlighted in yellow. The
player will play the next track for 10 seconds, then scan again.
To select a track, touch the “SCAN” switch a second time. If
the player reaches the end of the disc, it will continue scanning
at track 1.
G22111
“RPT” switch: Use it for automatic repeat of the track you are
currently listening to.
Touch the switch while the track is playing. When the track is
finished, the player will automatically go back to the beginning
of the track and play the track again. To cancel it, touch the
switch once again.
After all the tracks are scanned in one pass, normal play
resumes.
“DISC RPT” switch: Use it for automatic repeat of the disc
you are currently listening to.
Touch the “DISK SCAN” switch.
Touch the switch while the disc is playing. When the disc is
finished, the player will automatically go back to the beginning
of the disc and play the disc again. To cancel it, touch the
switch once again.
The bar on the upper side will be highlighted in yellow. The
program at the beginning of each disc will be played for 10
seconds. To continue listening to the program of your choice,
touch the “DISC SCAN” switch a second time.
After all the audio disc are scanned in one pass, normal play
resumes.
318
Other functions—
“RAND” switch: Use it for automatic and random selection
of the disc which you are currently listening to.
AUDIO
When the switch is touched, the system selects a track in the
disc you are currently listening to. To cancel it, touch the switch
once again.
“DISC RAND” switch: Use it for automatic track selection for
all the audio discs and play by the system.
When the switch is touched, the system selects a track in all
the audio discs which are set and plays it. To cancel it, touch
the switch once again.
G22079
“TITLE” switch: Use it for displaying the disc title and track
title while the CD−TEXT disc is playing.
Up to 29 letters can be displayed. “NO TITLE” is displayed
while the CD−TEXT disc is not playing. To cancel it, touch the
“TITLE OFF” switch.
319
AUDIO
(e) Operating a DVD video disc
NOTE: The playback condition of some DVD video discs
may be determined by a DVD video software producer.
This DVD player plays a disc as the software producer
intended. So some functions may not work properly. Be
sure to read the instruction manual for the DVD video disc
separately provided. For the detailed information about
DVD video discs, see “(h) DVD player and DVD video disc
information”
Precautions on DVD video disc
When recording with a DVD video or video CD, audio tracks
may not record in some cases while the menu is displayed. As
audio will not play in this case, verify that the video tracks are
playing and then activate playback.
When playback of a disc is completed:
If an audio CD is playing, the next CD will be selected and
playback will begin automatically.
If a DVD video or video CD is playing, playback will stop or
the menu screen will be displayed. The next disc will not
play back automatically. (Audio tracks cannot be heard
while the disc is stopped)
The title/chapter number and playback time display may not
appear while playing back certain DVD video discs.
320
CAUTION
Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a
low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects.
If you adjust the volume assuming that the
conversations represent the maximum volume level
that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder
sound effects or when you change to a different audio
source. The louder sounds may have a significant
impact on the human body or pose a driving hazard.
Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume.
AUDIO
Playing a DVD video disc—
G22117
The “DVD Hint !” screen appears when the video screen
is first displayed after you select the engine switch in
“ACC” or “IG−ON” mode.
Touch the “OK” switch when you read the message.
G22064
Push the “AUDIO” button to display this screen. You can
operate the switches and choose the number of the disc
you want to play. The selected disc is automatically
played.
When you touch the “WIDE MODE” switch, the screen mode
can be changed.
When you touch the “PICTURE” switch, the video screen
returns.
321
AUDIO
Displaying operation switches—
“Page 2” switch: Use this switch to display the operation
switches on the second page.
“Page 1” switch: Use this switch to display the operation
switches on the top page.
G22033
G22034
If you touch a part of the screen, where switches are not
located while you are watching video, DVD video operation
switches will appear.
322
“Hide Buttons” switch: Use this switch to turn off the
operation switches from the display.
If “ ” appears on the display when you touch a switch, the
operation relevant to the switch is not permitted.
AUDIO
Description of each switch—
Switches on top page
“Menu” and “Top Menu” switches: If you touch any of the
above switches, the menu screen for DVD video appears. (For
the operation, see the manual that come with the DVD video
disc provided separately.)
” switch: The menu control key appears on the screen.
“
(See page 324.)
” switch: Use this switch to pause the video screen.
“
When you touch this switch again, the video screen advances
frame by frame.
“
” switch: Touch this switch to fast reverse during
playback and reverse slowly during pause.
Switches on second page
“Set Up” switch: The initial setup screen appears. (See page
326.)
“Search” switch: The title search screen appears. (See
page 324.)
“Return” switch: Use this switch to display the
predetermined scene and start playing from there.
“Audio” switch: The audio changing screen appears. (See
page 325.)
“Sub Title” switch: The subtitle changing screen appears.
(See page 325.)
“Angle” switch: The angle selection screen appears. (See
page 326.)
“” switch: Use this switch to resume normal play after stop
or pause.
“” switch: Touch this switch to fast forward during
playback and forward slowly during pause.
323
AUDIO
Selecting a menu item—
G22035
Enter the menu item using “ ”, “”, “ ” or “ ” switches
and touch “Enter”. The player starts playing video for that
menu item. (For details, see the manual that comes with
the DVD video disc provided separately.)
Each time you touch“Move Buttons” switch, the switches
on the screen move upward and downward.
When you touch “OFF” switch, the displayed switches are not
displayed. To display them again, touch “ON” switch.
Touch “Back”, and the previous screen returns.
324
Searching by title—
G22036
Enter the title number using “–”, “+” and “+10” switches
and touch “Enter”. The player starts playing video for that
title number.
When you push “SEEK TRACK
select a chapter.
” or “
” button, you can
Touch “Back”, and the previous screen returns.
AUDIO
Changing the subtitle language—
G22037
Changing the audio language—
G22038
Each time you touch “Sub title”, the language is selected
from the ones stored in the discs and changed.
Each time you touch “Audio”, the language is selected
from the ones stored in the discs and changed.
To turn off the subtitle, touch “Hide”.
Touch “Back”, and the previous screen returns.
Touch “Back”, and the previous screen returns.
325
AUDIO
Changing the angle—
G22039
326
Setup menu—
G22040
The angle can be selected for discs that are multi−angle
compatible when the angle mark appears on the display.
The initial setting can be changed.
Each time you touch “Angle”, the angle changes.
You can change the audio language.
Touch “Back”, and the previous screen returns.
1. Touch “Audio Lang.”.
2. Touch the language you want to hear on the “Select
Audio Lang.” screen and “Enter”.
If you cannot find the language you want to hear on this screen,
touch “Others” and enter a language code. For the entry of
language code, see the following “Entry of language code—”
on page 328.
Audio language
AUDIO
Subtitle language
You can change the subtitle language.
1. Touch “Subtitle Lang.”.
2. Touch a language you want to read on the “Select
Subtitle Lang.” screen and “Enter”.
If you cannot find the language you want to read on this screen,
touch “Others” and enter a language code. For the entry of
language code, see the following “Entry of language code—”
on page 328.
DVD language
You can change the language on the DVD video menu.
1. Touch “DVD Language”.
2. Touch the language you want to read on the “Select
DVD Language” screen and “Enter”.
If you cannot find the language you want to read on this screen,
touch “Others” and enter a language code. For the entry of
language code, see the following “Entry of language code—”
on page 328.
Angle mark
The multi−angle mark can be turned on or off on the
screen while the disc which is multi−angle compatible is
being played.
Each time you touch “Angle Mark”, the angle mark on the
display turns on or off alternately.
Parental
The level of viewer restrictions can be changed.
1. Touch “Parental”.
2. Touch the numbers of your personal code on the
“Enter personal code” screen and touch “Enter”. If you
enter the wrong numbers, touch “Clear” to delete the
numbers.
10 touches of “Clear” will initialize the personal code.
3. Touch a parental level (1−8) on the “Select Restriction
Level” and “Enter”.
When you touch “Default”, all the settings except “Parental”of
this menu will be initialized.
327
AUDIO
Entry of language code—
G22041
If you touch “Others” on the “Select Audio Lang.” screen,
“Select Subtitle Lang.” screen or “Select DVD language”
screen, you can select the language you want to hear or
read by entering a language code.
1. Touch the numbers of the language code.
If you enter the wrong numbers, touch “Clear” to delete
the numbers.
2. Touch “Enter”.
328
Code
Language
1001
Japanese
0514
English
0618
French
0405
German
0920
Italian
0519
Spanish
2608
Chinese
1412
Dutch
1620
Portuguese
1922
Swedish
1821
Russian
1115
Korean
0512
Greek
0101
Afar
0102
Abkhazian
0106
Afrikaans
0113
Amharic
0118
Arabic
0119
Assamese
0125
Aymara
0126
Azerbaijani
0201
Bashkir
0205
Byelorussian
0207
Bulgarian
0208
Bihari
AUDIO
0209
Bislama
0714
Guarani
0214
Bengali
0721
Gujarati
0215
Tibetan
0801
Hausa
0218
Breton
0809
Hindi
0301
Catalan
0818
Croatian
0315
Corsican
0821
Hungarian
0319
Czach
0825
Armenian
0325
Welsh
0901
Interlingua
0401
Danish
0905
Interlingue
0426
Bhutani
0911
Inupiak
0515
Esperanto
0914
Indonesian
0520
Estonian
0919
Icelandic
0521
Basque
0923
Hebrew
0601
Persian
1009
Yiddish
0609
Finnish
1023
Javanese
0610
Fiji
1101
Georgian
0615
Faroese
1111
Kazakh
0625
Frisian
1112
Greenlandic
0701
Irish
1113
Cambodian
0704
Scots−Gaelic
1114
Kannada
0712
Galician
1119
Kashmiri
329
AUDIO
330
1121
Kurdish
1513
(Afan)Oromo
1125
Kirghiz
1518
Oriya
1201
Latin
1601
Panjabi
1214
Lingala
1612
Polish
1215
Laothian
1619
“Pashto,Pushto”
1220
Lithuanian
1721
Quechua
1222
Latvian
1813
Rhaeto−Romance
1307
Malagasy
1814
Kirundi
1309
Maori
1815
Romanian
1311
Macedonian
1823
Kinyarwanda
1312
Malayalam
1901
Sanskrit
1314
Mongolian
1904
Sindhi
1315
Moldavian
1907
Sangho
1318
Marathi
1908
Serbo−Croatian
1319
Malay
1909
Sinhalese
1320
Maltese
1911
Slovak
1325
Burmese
1912
Slovenian
1401
Nauru
1913
Samoan
1405
Nepali
1914
Shona
1415
Norwegian
1915
Somali
1503
Occitan
1917
Albanian
AUDIO
1918
Serbian
2209
Vietnamese
1919
Siswati
2215
Volapük
1920
Sesotho
2315
Wolof
1921
Sundanese
2408
Xhosa
1923
Swahili
2515
Yoruba
2001
Tamil
2621
Zulu
2005
Telugu
2007
Tajik
2008
Thai
2009
Tigrinya
2011
Turkmen
2012
Tagalog
2014
Setswana
2015
Tonga
2018
Turkish
2019
Tsonga
2020
Tatar
2023
Twi
2111
Ukrainian
2118
Urdu
2126
Uzbek
331
AUDIO
(f) Operating a video CD
Displaying operation switches—
Playing a video CD—
G22065
G22043
Push the “AUDIO” button to display this screen. You can
operate the switches and choose the number of the disc
you want to play.
When you touch the “WIDE MODE” switch, the screen mode
can be changed.
When you touch the “PICTURE” switch, the video screen
returns.
G22044
If you touch the part where switches are not located while you
are watching video on the video CD, video CD operation
switches will appear.
332
AUDIO
“Page 2” switch: Use this switch to display the operation
switches on the second page.
Description of each switch—
Switches on top page
“Page 1” switch: Use this switch to display the operation
switches on the top page.
“Select Number” switch: The track or number search screen
appears. (See “Searching by track” that follows.)
“Hide Buttons” switch: Use this switch to turn off the
operation switches from the display.
“Prev. Menu” switch: When you touch this switch while the
disc menu is displayed, the previous page appears on the
screen. If you touch this switch while the player is playing
video, the previous track is searched and played.
If “ ” appears on the display when you touch the switch, the
operation is not permitted.
“Next Menu” switch: When you touch this switch while the
disc menu is displayed, the next page appears on the display.
If you touch this switch while the player is playing video, the
next track is searched and played.
“Main/Sub” switch: A multiplex transmission changing
switch. The mode changes from Main/Sub to Main, to Sub and
back to Main/Sub by touching this switch.
333
AUDIO
Switches on second page
Searching by track—
“
” switch: Use this switch to pause the video screen.
When you touch this switch again, the video screen advance
frame by frame.
“
” switch: Touch this switch to fast reverse during
playback.
“” switch: Touch this switch during pause to resume
playing.
G22045
“” switch: Touch this switch to fast forward during the
playback and start playing slowly during pause.
Enter the track numbers using “–”, “+” and “+10”
switches and touch “Enter”. The player starts playing
video for that title number.
You can select a track number by pushing “SEEK TRACK
or “
” button.
Touch “Back”, and the previous screen returns.
334
”
AUDIO
(g) If the player malfunctions
(h) DVD player and DVD video disc information
If the player or another unit equipped with the player
malfunction, your audio system will display the following
messages.
DVD video discs—
If “DISC CHECK” appears on the display: It indicates that
the disc is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted upside down.
Clean the disc or insert it correctly.
If “NO DISC” appears on the display: It indicates that there
is no disc in the DVD player.
If “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on the display: It
indicates that the DVD region code is not set properly.
If “DVD ERROR” appears on the display: It indicates that the
inside of the player unit may be too hot due to the very high
ambient temperature. Eject a disc from the player and allow the
player to cool down.
If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your
Lexus dealer.
This DVD player conforms to NTSC color TV formats. The
DVD video disc conforming to another formats such as
PAL or SECAM cannot be used.
Region codes: Some DVD video discs have a region code
indicating a country where you can use the DVD video disc on
this DVD player. If the DVD video disc is not labeled as “ALL”
or “1”, you cannot use it on this DVD player. If you attempt to
play an inappropriate DVD video disc on this player, “REGION
CODE ERROR” appears on the screen. Even if the DVD video
disc does not have a region code, there is a case that you
cannot use it.
Marks shown on DVD video discs:
Indicates NTSC format of color TV.
Indicates the number of audio tracks.
Indicates the number of language
subtitles.
Indicates the number of angles.
335
AUDIO
Indicates the screen to be selected.
Wide screen: 16 : 9
Standard: 4 : 3
Indicates a region code by which this
video disc can be played.
ALL: in all countries
Number: region code
DVD video disc glossary—
DVD video discs: Digital versatile disc that holds video. DVD
video discs have adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world
standards of digital compression technologies. The picture
data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored. Variable
rate encoded technology in which the volume of data assigned
to the picture is changed depending on the picture format has
also been adopted. Audio data is stored using PCM and Dolby
digital, which enables higher quality of sound. Furthermore,
multi−angle and multi−language features will also help you
enjoy the more advanced technology of DVD video.
Viewer restrictions: This feature limits what can be viewed
in conformity with a level of restrictions of the country. The level
of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc. Some
DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are
skipped or replaced with other scenes.
Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.
Level 2 − 7: DVD video discs for children and G−rated movie
can be played.
Level 8: All types of the DVD video discs can be played.
Multi−angle feature: You can enjoy the same scene at
different angles.
Multi−language feature: You can select a language of the
subtitle and audio.
Region codes: The region codes are provided on DVD
players and DVD discs. If the DVD video disc does not have
the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot play the
disc on the DVD player. For region codes, see page 335.
336
AUDIO
Audio: This DVD player can play liner PCM, Dolby digital and
MPEG audio format DVD. Other decoded type cannot be
played.
Audio remote control (steering switches)
Title and chapter: Video and audio programs stored in DVD
video disc are divided in parts by title and chapter.
Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored
on DVD video discs. Usually, one piece of movie, one album,
or one audio program is assigned as a title.
G22051
Chapter: The unit smaller than that of title. A title comprises
plural chapters.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double−D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential
unpublished works.
1992−1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of certain
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned
by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use
of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
The steering switches are installed on the left side of the
steering wheel.
“MODE” switch: Use this switch to change the mode. If a tape
or disc is not inserted, the “TAPE” or “DISC” mode is skipped.
When you push the switch with the audio system turned off, the
audio system turns on.
“VOL” switches: Use these switches to adjust the volume.
Push “ +” to increase the volume and “ – ” to decrease the
volume. The volume continues to increase or decrease while
the switch is being pressed.
“DTS” is a trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
337
AUDIO
(a) When the radio mode is selected
<DVD player>
” or “
”switch: Push this switch for seek tuning or to
“
select a station.
“ ” or “ ”switch: Use this switch to select a desired track,
disc or chapter.
Push this switch briefly to select a station that you assigned
to a switch on the audio system.
Push this switch briefly to select a desired track or chapter.
Push this switch and hold it until you hear a beep. The radio
will begin seeking up or down for a station, and will stop on
reception.
(b) When the “TAPE” mode is selected
” or “
”switch: Push this switch to fast forward, rewind
“
the tape or for automatic program selection.
Push this switch until you hear a beep to fast forward or
rewind the tape. To stop fast forwarding or rewinding, push
the same side on the switch until you hear a beep.
Push this switch briefly for automatic program selection.
When automatically selecting a program, you can skip up to
9 programs at a time. See page 305 for details.
(c) When the “DISC” mode is selected
<CD player>
“ ” or “
or disc.
”switch: Use this switch to select a desired track
Push this switch briefly to select a desired track.
Push and hold this switch until you hear a beep to select a
desired disc.
338
Push and hold this switch until you hear a beep to select a
desired disc.
CAUTION
Operate the steering switches with due care while you
are driving to avoid accidents.
AUDIO
Audio system operating hints
Caring for your cassette player and tapes
For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes:
NOTICE
To ensure correct audio system operations:
Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio
system.
Do not put anything other than a cassette tape or disc
into the cassette tape slot or disc slot.
The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle
may cause a noise from the speakers of the audio
system which you are listening to. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
Radio reception
FM broadcasts have a range of about 40 km or 25 miles. When
driving away from a station, you may have to fine−tune your
radio and turn up the volume as the station gets weaker.
Because FM uses a line−of−sight signal, tall buildings or hills
may sometimes block reception. These are all normal
characteristics of FM reception and do not indicate any
problem with the radio itself.
Clean the tape head and other parts regularly.
A dirty tape head or tape path can decrease sound quality
and tangle your cassette tapes. The easiest way to clean
them is by using a cleaning tape. (A wet type is
recommended.)
Use high−quality cassettes:
Low−quality cassette tapes can cause many problems,
including poor sound, inconsistent playing speed, and
constant auto−reversing. They can also get stuck or
tangled in the cassette player.
Do not use a cassette if it has been damaged or tangled or
if its label is peeling off.
Do not leave a cassette in the player if you are not listening
to it, especially if it is hot outside.
Store cassettes in their cases and out of direct sunlight.
Avoid using cassettes with a total playing time longer than
100 minutes (50 minutes per side). The tape used in these
cassettes is thin and could get stuck or tangled in the
cassette player.
339
AUDIO
Caring for your CD player or DVD player, and discs
Your CD player or DVD player is intended for use with 12 cm
(4.7 in.) discs only.
Extremely high temperature can keep your CD player or
DVD player from working. On hot days, use air conditioning
to cool the vehicle interior before you listen to a disc.
20L037
Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make your CD player
or DVD player skip.
If moisture gets into your CD player or DVD player, you may
not hear any sound even though the player appears to be
working. Eject all discs from the player and wait until the
player dries.
CAUTION
CD players or DVD players use an invisible laser beam
which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if
directed outside the unit. Be sure to operate the player
correctly.
340
CD player
Use only CDs marked as shown above. The following
products may not be playable on your CD player.
Copy−protected CD
CD−R (CD−Recordable)
CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)
CD−ROM
AUDIO
Audio CDs
DVD video discs
20L480
Video CDs
DVD player
Special shaped discs
Use only discs marked as shown above. The following
products may not be playable on your DVD player.
SACD dts−CD
Copy−protected CD
CD−R(CD−Recordable)
CD−RW(CD−Re−writable)
CD−ROM
DVD−R
DVD+R
DVD−RW
DVD+RW
DVD−ROM
DVD−RAM
21z017
Transparent/translucent discs
341
AUDIO
20L481
Low quality discs
20L482
Labeled discs
NOTICE
Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent,
low quality or labeled discs such as those shown in
the illustrations. The use of such discs may damage
the player or changer, or it may be impossible to eject
the disc.
This system is not designed for use of dual discs. Do
not use dual discs because it may cause damage to
the player or changer.
342
AUDIO
20L038
Correct
Wrong
Handle discs carefully, especially when you set them into
the player. Hold them on the edge and do not bend them.
Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny
side.
20L039
To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint−free cloth that has been
dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line from the center
to the edge of the disc (not in a circle). Do not use a
conventional record cleaner or anti−static device.
Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or other disc damage
could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a
track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)
343
AUDIO
344
SECTION
3–1
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting and driving
Three−way catalytic converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating the engine switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic throttle control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intuitive parking assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear view monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic radar cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adaptive variable suspension system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle stability control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill−start assist control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable gear ratio steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle dynamics integrated management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pre−collision system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
346
347
348
358
359
371
372
395
398
401
424
424
427
429
431
432
433
438
438
440
449
345
STARTING AND DRIVING
THREE−WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTERS
Three−way catalytic converters are emission control
devices installed in the exhaust system.
The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the exhaust gas.
CAUTION
G31042
GS430
Keep people and combustible materials away from
the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The
exhaust gas is very hot.
Do not drive, idle or park your vehicle over anything
that might burn easily such as grass, leaves, paper or
rags.
NOTICE
A large amount of unburned gases flowing into the
three−way catalytic converter may cause it to overheat
and create a fire hazard. To prevent this and other
damage, observe the following precautions:
G31043
GS300
346
Use only unleaded gasoline.
Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level; running
out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, creating
an excessive load on the three−way catalytic
converter.
Do not allow the engine to run at idle speed for more
than 20 minutes.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Avoid racing the engine.
ENGINE EXHAUST CAUTION
Do not push−start or pull−start your vehicle.
Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is moving.
CAUTION
Keep your engine in good running order.
Malfunctions in the engine electrical system,
electronic ignition system or fuel system could cause
an extremely high three−way catalytic converter
temperature.
Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust. It contains
carbon monoxide, which is a colorless and odorless
gas. It can cause unconsciousness or even death.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls
frequently, take your vehicle in for a check−up as
soon as possible. Remember, your Lexus dealer
knows your vehicle and its three−way catalytic
converter system best.
To ensure that the three−way catalytic converter and
the entire emission control system operate properly,
your vehicle must receive the periodic inspections
required by the Lexus Maintenance Schedule. For
scheduled maintenance information, refer to the
“Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled
Maintenance”.
Make sure the exhaust system has no holes or loose
connections. The system should be checked from
time to time. If you hit something, or notice a change
in the sound of the exhaust, have the system checked
immediately.
Do not run the engine in a garage or enclosed area
except for the time needed to drive the vehicle in or
out. The exhaust gases cannot escape, making this
a particularly dangerous situation.
Do not remain for a long time in a parked vehicle with
the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however, do
so only in an unconfined area and adjust the heating
or cooling system to force outside air into the vehicle.
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. An open or
unsealed trunk lid may cause exhaust gases to be
drawn into the vehicle.
347
STARTING AND DRIVING
To allow proper operation of your vehicle’s
ventilation system, keep the inlet grilles in front of the
windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other
obstructions.
OPERATING THE ENGINE SWITCH
If you smell exhaust fumes in the vehicle, open the
windows and close the trunk lid to ensure plenty of
fresh air enters the vehicle. If you can smell exhaust
fumes even though there are no other vehicles in the
surrounding area, have your vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer. Continued inhalation of exhaust fumes
can lead to death by gas poisoning.
G31030a
1 Electronic key 2 Engine switch
3 Automatic transmission selector lever
4 Brake pedal
348
STARTING AND DRIVING
Engine switch
In the following conditions, the system malfunctions. Contact
your Lexus dealer.
If the engine switch is not illuminated when the clearance
lights are turned on.
If the engine switch indicator light flashes amber.
G31031a
If the switch movement seems unusual.
If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the
vehicle is moving, press the engine switch for more than 3
seconds. At this time, “ACC” mode is selected.
CAUTION
By pushing the engine switch with an electronic key in
possession, you can select “ACC”, “IG−ON” or “OFF”
mode and start or stop the engine. (For details, see
“Selecting the mode” on page 350 and “Starting the engine” on
page 356 and “Stopping the engine” on page 357.)
Do not press the engine switch during driving, except
in an emergency situation.
If you leave your vehicle in hot weather, the switch
surface may get hot. Take care not to get burned.
When an electronic key is in the vehicle, it is automatically
detected and checked if it corresponds to the registered ID
code for the vehicle, thereby allowing engine operation and
mode selection.
Press the engine switch slowly and firmly. Quick operation
may not activate the desired mode.
349
STARTING AND DRIVING
NOTICE
Observe the following instructions, or the engine switch
may not work properly.
The switch should be operated with your clean finger.
Do not use an oily or dirty finger.
Be careful not to spill water or other liquid on the
switch.
Do not modify the engine switch without consulting
your Lexus dealer. Doing so may cause system
problem.
Selecting the mode
“OFF” mode
G31076 “ACC” mode
“IG−ON” mode
To select “ACC”, “IG−ON” or “OFF” mode, press the
engine switch while carrying an electronic key with the
selector lever in the “P” position, and the brake pedal not
depressed.
Each time you press the engine switch, the mode changes in
order of “OFF”, “ACC”, “IG−ON” mode then back to “OFF”
mode.
To start the engine in each mode, push the engine switch while
the brake pedal is depressed. For details, see “Starting the
engine” on page 356.
350
STARTING AND DRIVING
“ACC” mode
“IG−ON” mode
G31033
G31034
This mode allows some accessories to be operable such
as the radio, even if the engine is not running. An amber
indicator light turns on at the engine switch.
“IG−ON” mode has two conditions: all gauges, meters
and accessories on and the engine is not running, or
engine running.
To select the “ACC” mode from “OFF” mode, push the engine
switch once without depressing the brake pedal. The engine
immobilizer is disabled and the security indicator light goes
out. (For details, see “Engine immobilizer” on page 12.)
To select the “IG−ON” mode while the engine is not running:
If you cycle once through all the modes (“OFF”, “ACC”,
“IG−ON”) with the driver’s door closed, the second time you
select the “ACC” mode, the above message will appear for a
few seconds.
If the vehicle is left in “ACC” mode for about an hour, the engine
switch is automatically off.
From “OFF” mode—push the engine switch twice without
depressing the brake pedal.
From “ACC” mode—push the engine switch once without
depressing the brake pedal.
The engine switch indicator light will be illuminated amber if the
engine is not running, and will turn off when the engine is
running.
If the driver’s door is opened with the transmission in “P”, a
buzzer will remind you in “ACC” mode.
351
STARTING AND DRIVING
If you push the engine switch while the brake pedal is
depressed with the transmission not in “P” or “N”, “IG−ON”
mode is selected with the engine not running.
“OFF” mode
It is not a malfunction if the needles on all meters and gauges
move slightly when selected in “IG−ON” mode.
NOTICE
G31032
Do not leave the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode while
the engine is not running.
The battery will be
discharged.
This mode turns the engine and all accessories off.
To select the “OFF” mode, be sure that the selector lever
is in “P” and then turn the engine switch to “OFF”.
To select the “OFF” mode from “IG−ON” mode:
If the engine is not running, push the engine switch once
while the brake pedal is not depressed.
If the engine is running, push the engine switch once
regardless of brake pedal position while the vehicle is
completely stopped.
To select the “OFF” mode from “ACC” mode, push the engine
switch twice while the brake pedal is not depressed.
The engine immobilizer is automatically set, the security
indicator light blinks and the engine switch indicator light is
turned off. (For details, see “Engine immobilizer” on page 12.)
352
STARTING AND DRIVING
Steering lock
The steering wheel is locked when the engine switch is
turned to “OFF” from “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode and any
door is opened.
When the steering lock is activated, you may hear a sound
coming from the steering column, it is not a malfunction. If you
select the “OFF” mode while any door is open, the steering
wheel is not locked until it is closed.
G31045
If you select the mode other than “OFF” or start the engine, the
steering lock is disabled.
If there is trouble somewhere in the steering lock system, either
of the following warning messages will appear on the
multi−information display.
S/T IS NOT UNLOCKED
CHECK S/T LOCK
When pushing the engine switch while the brake pedal is
depressed, the steering lock is not unlocked if load is
applied to the steering wheel, and the above message
appears.
The engine will not start. At this time, the master warning light
comes on and the engine switch indicator light blinks green.
353
STARTING AND DRIVING
G31046
To start the engine in this condition, push the engine
switch again while turning the steering wheel in either
direction as shown in the above illustration.
The steering wheel is unlocked, and the engine will start.
354
G31047
If the steering lock system is malfunctioning, the above
message appears.
At this time, the master warning light comes on and the engine
switch indicator light blinks amber. The engine will not start.
In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.
STARTING AND DRIVING
How to start the engine
BEFORE CRANKING
Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions.
1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
CRANKING HOLD FUNCTION
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
Once you push the engine switch while the brake pedal is
depressed, the cranking hold function continues to crank the
engine in “IG−ON” mode until it starts.
3. Put the selector lever in ”P”. If you need to restart the engine
while the vehicle is moving, put the selector lever in ”N”. A
starter safety device will prevent the starter from operating if
the selector lever is in any drive position.
The function stops cranking the engine after about 25 seconds
at maximum if the engine has not started yet. When you crank
the engine again, wait a few seconds and restart it.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it.
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle, seat cushion angle,
seat cushion height, head restraint height and steering wheel
angle.
4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to the floor until driving
off.
The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system in your engine automatically controls the
proper air−fuel mixture for starting. You can start a cold or hot
engine as follows:
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.
4. Lock all doors.
5. Fasten seat belts.
Remember to check that the service reminder indicators
function when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode,
and check the fuel gauge to see that you have sufficient fuel.
355
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the engine
If the engine stalls ...
Normal starting procedure
Simply restart it , using the correct procedure given in normal
starting.
If the engine will not start
See ”If your vehicle will not start” on page 468.
G31035
NOTICE
Do not race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls
frequently, have the engine checked immediately.
When depressing the brake pedal while carrying an
electronic key, make sure the green engine switch
indicator light comes on. And then push the engine
switch to start the engine.
If you press the engine switch while the brake pedal is
depressed and the transmission is in “P” or “N”, the engine will
start even if initially in “OFF”, “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode.
If you start the engine in “OFF” mode, the engine immobilizer
is disabled, and the security indicator light goes off.
If you push the engine switch while the brake pedal is
depressed with the transmission not in “P” or “N”, “IG−ON”
mode will be selected with the engine not running.
356
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING THE ENGINE WHEN THE ELECTRONIC KEY
BATTERY IS DISCHARGED
In addition, we recommend that the electronic key battery be
changed as soon as possible.
If the electronic key battery is discharged, the engine can
be started using the following procedure.
Stopping the engine
5. Unlock the door with the mechanical key and bring the
electronic key into the vehicle.
G31036
G11038
If you press the engine switch while the selector lever is
in “P” and the engine is running, regardless of brake pedal
position, the engine will be turned off.
6. While the brake pedal is depressed, hold the ornament side
of the electronic key about 10 mm (0.4 in.) over the engine
switch as shown.
With the transmission not in “P”, the engine switch is selected
in “ACC” mode.
7. Within 5 seconds of the chime sounding, push the engine
switch with the brake pedal depressed to start the engine.
If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the
vehicle is moving, press the engine switch for more than 3
seconds. At this time, “ACC” mode is selected.
When you push the engine switch with the brake pedal not
depressed at this time, the engine will not start, but it is possible
to select “ACC”, “IG−ON” and “OFF” mode.
If it is not possible to start the engine or change the mode using
this procedure, contact your Lexus dealer.
Several hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear a
sound coming from underneath the luggage compartment for
several minutes. This is normal operation and does not
indicate a malfunction. (See page vi.)
357
STARTING AND DRIVING
PARKING BRAKE
CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury or an accident, observe
the following precautions.
Turn off the engine, only when the vehicle is
completely stopped.
G31037
When you leave the vehicle, the selector lever must
be in “P” and the parking brake must be applied, or
the vehicle may suddenly move.
1 U.S.A.
2 Canada
To set: Hold the regular brake pedal down with your right
foot. Push down the parking brake pedal with your left
foot.
To release: Hold the regular brake pedal down with your
right foot and push the parking brake pedal with your left
foot. When you lift your left foot, the parking brake pedal
will follow it to the released position.
Before leaving your vehicle, firmly apply the parking brake.
To remind you that the parking brake is set, the parking brake
reminder light in the instrument cluster remains on until you
release the parking brake.
358
STARTING AND DRIVING
The buzzer will remind you to release the parking brake when
the vehicle speed rises above 5 km/h (3mph) with the parking
brake is applied. At this time the master warning light blinks
and the message “PARK BRAKE” appears on the
multi−information display.
CAUTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Your automatic transmission has a shift lock system to
minimize the possibility of incorrect operation. This
means you can only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed with the engine switch in
“IG−ON” mode. ()
Before driving, make sure the parking brake is fully
released and that the parking brake reminder light is off.
G31021
359
STARTING AND DRIVING
The shift position or shift range position is displayed
on the instrument cluster.
P: Parking and engine starting
(a) Normal driving
R: Reverse position
(b) Driving in “S” mode
N: Neutral position
(c) Using engine braking
D: Normal driving position (Shifting into overdrive
possible)
(d) Backing up
S: “S” mode driving
(f) Good driving practice
+: Upshifting
–: Downshifting
360
Correct use of the automatic transmission is explained in
the following parts.
(e) Parking
(g) If you cannot shift the selector lever
STARTING AND DRIVING
(a) Normal driving
G31023
G31022
1 “P” (Park) position
1 Power position
3 Snow position
2 “N” (Neutral) position
1. Start the engine as instructed in “Operating the engine
switch” on page 348.
The transmission must be in “P” or “N” position. The engine will
not start in any drive position even if engine switch is pushed
while the brake pedal is depressed.
2 Normal position
2. Set the driving pattern selector switch to the normal
position.
Your transmission has a driving pattern selector switch which
allows you to select power, normal or snow mode to suit your
driving condition. For ordinary driving, Lexus recommends
that you use the normal mode to improve fuel economy.
3. For more powerful acceleration and sporty driving, use
the power position.
In the power mode, the “ECT PWR” light in the instrument
cluster is on and the most suitable shift pattern is selected
depending on the driver’s operation of accelerator and brake
pedal and on the vehicle condition. See “Automatic shifting
point change control” on page 363.
For snow mode, see “Electronic Throttle Control System”
on page 371.
361
STARTING AND DRIVING
5. Release the parking brake and brake pedal. Depress
the accelerator pedal slowly for smooth starting.
G31024
1 Brake pedal
2 “D” (Drive) position
4. With your foot holding down the brake pedal, shift the
selector lever to “D”.
Always use the “D” position to improve fuel economy and quiet
driving. Shifting into the overdrive gear is possible when the
transmission is in any position of “D”, “6” (six range), “5” (fifth
range) of “S” position. However, while the engine coolant
temperature is low, the transmission will not shift into the
overdrive gear even in the above specified position. (See “(c)
Using engine braking” and “(f) Good driving practice” for
exceptions.)
CAUTION
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while
shifting.
362
In normal cruising, the vehicle will start in first gear and
automatically shift up to the most suitable gear. On inclines,
declines or winding roads, etc., the vehicle shifts up and down
automatically according to the running conditions to obtain the
suitable driving power and engine braking.
If you need to accelerate rapidly while driving, depress the
accelerator pedal to the full throttle position. This provides
more acceleration by automatically downshifting the
transmission to the next lower gear or beyond, depending on
the vehicle speed.
If engine braking is needed, such as in descending a long hill,
see “(c) Using engine braking”.
STARTING AND DRIVING
AI (Artificial Intelligence) shifting control
(b) Driving in “S” mode
AI shifting control selects the most suitable shift range
automatically according to the driver’s operation and
driving condition.
AI shifting control operates automatically with the
selector lever in the “D” position. When the lever is moved
to the “S” position, this function will be canceled.
G31025
Shifting control on the slope: On inclines, you can drive
smoothly with reduced shifting quantity. On declines, the
vehicle will shift down automatically to obtain optimum engine
braking and reduce the driver’s foot braking load.
Automatic shifting point change control: The automatic
shifting point control is controlled in the following way to
respond to the driver’s operation.
When the accelerator is depressed quickly, the vehicle
downshifts rapidly in order to improve acceleration.
When the accelerator is quickly released, the gear position
is maintained in order to improve engine braking and
reacceleration capabilities.
During hard deceleration the vehicle downshifts rapidly in
order to improve engine braking and reacceleration
capabilities.
1
2
3
4
“S” mode position
Upshifting
Downshifting
Shift range position indicator
You can change the shift range position in the “S” mode.
The shift range position can be switched between “6”
(sixth range) and “1” (first range) by moving the selector
lever up to the “+” side or down to the “–” side. The first
shift range position is “5” (fifth range) when the selector
lever is shifted to the “S” position.
However, if you move the lever to the “S” position in AI
shifting control, “5” (fifth range), “4” (fourth range) or “3”
(third range) will be the first shift range. This is because
the suitable shift range is selected depending on the
driving condition.
363
STARTING AND DRIVING
G31026
Shift range position indicator
The shift range position is displayed on the instrument cluster.
Shift range positions
“6” (sixth range): The most suitable gear is automatically
selected between first and overdrive (sixth) gears according
to vehicle speed and driving conditions. Always use the “6”
(sixth range) position to improve fuel economy and for quiet
driving.
“5” (fifth range): The most suitable gear is automatically
selected between first and overdrive (fifth) gears according
to vehicle speed and driving conditions. This range is
suitable for acceleration such as when you want to pass a
vehicle running ahead of you during high speed driving.
364
“4” (fourth range): The most suitable gear is automatically
selected between first and fourth gears according to vehicle
speed and driving conditions. In the “4” (fourth range)
position, the automatic transmission system will select the
most suitable gear to handle current running conditions
such as hill climbing, hard towing, etc.
“3” (third range): The most suitable gear is automatically
selected between first and third gears according to vehicle
speed and driving conditions. This range is best used when
stronger engine braking is necessary.
“2” (second range): First or second gear will automatically
be selected according to vehicle speed and driving
conditions. This range is to be used when engine braking
stronger than that of the “3” (third range) position is
necessary.
“1” (first range): This gear is fixed in first regardless of
vehicle speed or driving conditions. This range is to be used
when maximum engine braking is necessary.
If you attempt to downshift the transmission when it is not
possible to downshift due to high vehicle speed, a warning tone
sounds twice.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Maximum allowable speeds
To get on a highway or to pass slower traffic, maximum
acceleration may be necessary. Make sure you observe the
following maximum allowable speeds in each range:
GS430:
GS300 (2WD):
GS300 (4WD):
range
1
2
3
km/h (mph)
57 (35)
97 (60)
141 (88)
range
1
2
3
km/h (mph)
54 (33)
93 (58)
137 (85)
range
1
2
3
km/h (mph)
52 (32)
90 (56)
131 (81)
“S” mode indicator light
“S” mode allows you to use the shift range positions.
The “S” mode indicator light comes on when the selector
lever is shifted into the “S” position. When the “S” mode
indicator light does not come on even with the selector lever
moved to the “S” position, there may be a problem
somewhere in the system. Have your vehicle
checked/repaired by your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible. In this case, you can drive in the same condition
as in the “D” position.
NOTICE
Do not downshift if you are going faster than the
maximum allowable speed for the next lower range.
365
STARTING AND DRIVING
(c) Using engine braking
G31027
“S” mode position
To use the braking power of the engine, downshift the range in
the “S” mode position as follows:
Shift into the “5” (fifth range) position. The transmission will
downshift to fifth gear and engine braking will be enabled.
If you drive in the “D” position: Shift the selector lever to
the “S” position and “5” (fifth range) will automatically be
selected.
If you drive in the “S” position: Shift the selector lever
down to the “–” position by selecting the “5” (fifth range).
When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift
from “D” or “6” (sixth range) to “5” (fifth range), engine
braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not
cancelled. For vehicle speed reduction, see page 400.
Vehicles with the dynamic radar cruise control —
When the cruise control is being used in the conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode or in the
vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode, even if you
downshift from “D” or “6” (sixth range) to “5” (fifth range),
engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise
control is not cancelled. For vehicle speed reduction, see
pages 423 and 411.
Shift into the “4” (fourth range) position. The transmission
will downshift to fourth gear when the vehicle speed is or
becomes lower than the speed listed below and more
powerful engine braking will be enabled.
GS430
GS300 (2WD)
GS300 (4WD)
193 km/h (120 mph)
187 km/h (116 mph)
178 km/h (111 mph)
If you drive in the “D” position: Shift the selector lever to
the “S” position and shift the lever down to the “–” position
once to select “4” (fourth range). However, when you move
the lever to the “S” position while the AI shifting control is
operating, the first shift range will be “5” (fifth range), “4”
(fourth range) or “3” (third range) because the suitable shift
range is selected depending on the driving condition.
If you drive in the “S” position: Shift the selector lever
down to the “–” position to select the “4” (fourth range).
366
STARTING AND DRIVING
When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift
from “D” or “5” (fifth range) to “4” (fourth range), engine
braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not
cancelled. For vehicle speed reduction, see page 400.
Vehicles with the dynamic radar cruise control —
When the cruise control is being used in the conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode or in the
vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode, even if you
downshift from “D” or “5” (fifth range) to “4” (fourth range),
engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise
control is not cancelled. For vehicle speed reduction, see
pages 423 and 411.
Shift into the “3” (third range) position. The transmission will
downshift to third gear when the vehicle speed is or
becomes lower than the speed listed below and more
powerful engine braking will be enabled.
GS430
GS300 (2WD)
GS300 (4WD)
144 km/h
135 km/h
129 km/h
(90 mph)
(84 mph)
(80 mph)
If you drive in the “D” position: Shift the selector lever to
the “S” position and shift the lever down to the “–” position
twice to select the “3” (third range). However, when you
move the lever to the “S” position while the AI shifting control
is operating, the first shift range will be “5” (fifth range), “4”
(fourth range) or “3” (third range) because the suitable shift
range is selected depending on the driving condition.
Shift into the “2” (second range) position. The transmission
will downshift to second gear when the vehicle speed is or
becomes lower than the speed listed below and more
powerful engine braking than that of the “3” (third range)
position will be enabled.
GS430
GS300 (2WD)
GS300 (4WD)
98 km/h
93 km/h
89 km/h
(61 mph)
(58 mph)
(55 mph)
If you drive in the “D” position: Shift the selector lever to
the “S” position and shift the lever down to the “–” position
three times to select “2” (second range).
If you drive in the “S” position: Shift the selector lever
down to the “–” position to select “2” (second range).
Shift into the “1” (first range) position. The transmission will
downshift to first gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes
lower than the speed listed below and maximum engine
braking will be enabled.
GS430
GS300 (2WD)
GS300 (4WD)
37 km/h
38 km/h
36 km/h
(23 mph)
(23 mph)
(22 mph)
If you drive in the “D” position: Shift the selector lever to
the “S” position and shift the lever down to the “–” position
four times to select “1” (first range).
If you drive in the “S” position: Shift the selector lever
down to the “–” position to select “1” (first range).
If you drive in the “S” position: Shift the selector lever
down to the “–” position to select “3” (third range).
367
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
(d) Backing up
Be careful when downshifting on a slippery surface.
The abrupt change in engine speed could cause the
vehicle to skid or spin.
G31028
1 Brake pedal
2 “R” (Reverse) position
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the
selector lever to the “R” position.
NOTICE
Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.
368
STARTING AND DRIVING
When the selector lever is shifted into the “R” position, the
outside rear view mirrors automatically down to help backing
up. For details, see “Power rear view mirror control” on page
210.
Vehicles with rear view monitor system: When the selector
lever is shifted into the “R” position with the engine switch in
“IG−ON” mode, rear view monitor system will activate. For
instructions, see “Rear view monitor system” on page 395.
(e) Parking
G31029
1 Parking brake pedal
3 “P” (Park) position
2 Brake pedal
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Depress the parking brake pedal fully to securely apply the
parking brake.
3. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the
selector lever to the “P” position.
CAUTION
Never attempt to move the selector lever into “P” under
any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious
mechanical damage and loss of vehicle control may
result.
369
STARTING AND DRIVING
(f) Good driving practice
(g) If you cannot shift the selector lever
If the transmission repeatedly shifts up and down between
fourth and overdrive gears when climbing a gentle slope, shift
the selector lever to the “4” position. Be sure to shift the
selector lever to the “D” position after climbing the slope.
If you cannot shift the selector lever even though the brake
pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button. For
instructions, see “If you cannot shift automatic transmission
selector lever” on page 496.
CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped
with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from
creeping.
NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the parking brake to hold
the vehicle on an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold the
vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause
the transmission to overheat.
370
STARTING AND DRIVING
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
CONTROL SYSTEM
The electronic throttle control system always maintains
appropriate engine output in relation to the accelerator
opening in all driving conditions.
In the power mode, the “ECT PWR” light in the instrument
cluster is on and the most suitable shift pattern is selected
depending on the driver’s operation of accelerator and brake
pedal and on the vehicle condition. See “Automatic shifting
point change control” on page 363.
To return to the normal mode, push the driving pattern selector
switch lightly on the “SNOW” side.
Snow mode: For slippery road surfaces such as in snow. In
this mode, the spinning of the rear wheels is controlled
appropriately.
G31023
When you push the driving pattern selector switch on the
“SNOW” side, the snow mode is turned on and the ”ECT
SNOW” light in the instrument cluster comes on.
To return to the normal mode, push the driving pattern selector
switch on the “SNOW” side again.
1 Power position
3 Snow position
2 Normal position
When you turn the engine switch off in the snow mode, the
electronic throttle control system automatically changes to the
normal mode.
The electronic throttle control system has 3 modes:
normal, power and snow modes.
Normal mode: For ordinary driving, Lexus recommends that
you use this mode to improve fuel economy.
Power mode: For more powerful acceleration and sporty
driving.
371
STARTING AND DRIVING
INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST
1
Dual sensors
There are four of these steering guidance sensors installed in
the front bumper.
G31049
Steering guidance means that when an obstacle is inspected,
not only is the distance estimated, this function judges whether
collision with the obstacle within detection range is avoidable
if the vehicle is steered in a certain direction, and informs the
driver. There will be no warning if it judges that there is no
possibility of collision with the obstacle within detection range.
(See page 375.)
2
The intuitive parking assist is a warning system used
when parking the vehicle at low speed (e.g. into a garage).
It uses an ultrasonic sensor, which checks the
approximate distance to an obstacle. It will inform you of
the approximate distance to an obstacle by displaying
information on the multi−information display and the
screen, and with beeping sounds.
372
Rear corner sensors
There is one of these installed on each corner of the rear
bumper, they inspect obstacles and will sound a warning
depending on the distance to the obstacle. (See page 380.)
3
Back sensors
There are two of these installed near the center of the rear
bumper, they inspect obstacles and will sound a warning
depending on the distance to the obstacle. (See page 381.)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Where to display
G31050
To use the intuitive parking assist, push the main switch
in the switch box with the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode.
Pushing the main switch again will turn the intuitive
parking assist off.
G31051
Multi−information display
When you push the main switch, the indicator light in the
instrument cluster comes on and a beep sounds for one
second, indicating that the intuitive parking assist is turned on.
The intuitive parking assist will remain on even after turning the
engine switch to “OFF” and then to “IG−ON” mode with the
main switch on. However, a beep does not sound at this time.
If an error is detected in the intuitive parking assist while
self−checking, beeps sound and a warning appears in the
multi−information display and on the screen. For details, see
“Intuitive parking assist failure warning” on page 385.
373
STARTING AND DRIVING
Indicators and steering guide symbol
G31052
G31053
1 Touch screen (full screen display)
2 Touch screen
(vehicles with rear view monitor system)
(For details, see page 388.)
When an obstacle is detected, the indicator bars will come
on or flash, accompanied by beeping. How many bars are
lit or flashing depends on the distance to the obstacle.
When the obstacle is not detected any longer, beeps will stop
sounding and the multi−information display and the screen will
return to the previous display.
The volume of the beeps and the display on the screen can be
changed. See “Setting the intuitive parking assist” on page
391.
374
1
2
3
4
Detection by dual sensors
Detection by rear corner sensors
Detection by back sensors
Steering guide symbol (See page 377)
The approximate distance to the obstacle is shown with up to
4 bars on the front, front corners and rear of the vehicle and up
to 3 bars on the rear corners of the vehicle.
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
Dual sensors
To avoid an accident or injury, observe the following
instructions, and then drive slowly using the brakes
while confirming a safe distance around your vehicle
with your eyes.
The sensor detection range is limited around the
bumper. Be sure to confirm safety outside sensor
detection with your eyes. For the sensor detection
range, see page 383.
G31054
It might take time for the sensors to detect the
obstacle.
Depending on the shape of the obstacle, indicators or
beeps may not warn you properly, and the detection
range may also be shortened.
(A) Collision will be unavoidable: Collision with the
detected obstacle cannot be avoided even by changing the
steering.
It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume
of audio or air flow noise of air conditioning.
(B) Collision will be avoided by changing the steering:
Collision with the obstacle can be avoided by changing the
steering.
(C) Collision will be avoided with the present steering
angle: Even if you continue moving at the present steering
angle, the distance to the obstacle within sensor detection
range will not be less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.).
The dual sensors detect an obstacle in front of the vehicle
or at an angle to the front of the vehicle, and estimate the
distance to the obstacle and also the steering angle
required. They will evaluate which of the above 3
conditions is applicable.
375
STARTING AND DRIVING
The selector lever must be in any position other than “P” or “R”
for these sensors to operate, however the obstacle at an angle
to the front of the vehicle will also be detected while the selector
lever is in “R”.
(A) Collision will be unavoidable
CAUTION
With long obstacles such as walls, the decision of the
sensor may change as the obstacle gets closer; from
certain avoidance to avoidance if steering is changed;
from certain avoidance to unavoidable collision; and
there are also times when the decision will be changed
from avoidance if steering is changed, to certain
collision. When you move your vehicle, be sure to
confirm a safe distance around your vehicle with your
eyes and drive slowly, or an accident or injury may
result.
G31055
The steering guidance may not operate properly in the
following conditions:
Tires other than those of Lexus genuine size are
installed.
The steering sensor information cannot be received
properly. (See “Intuitive parking assist failure warning”
on page 385.)
376
3
4
5
6
About 50 cm (1.5 ft.) to about 100 cm (3.0 ft.)
About 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.) to about 50 cm (1.5 ft.)
About 25 cm (0.8 ft.) to about 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.)
Less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.)
STARTING AND DRIVING
1
Multi−information display:
The indicator bars will come on depending on the
distance to the obstacle and will flash when the distance
between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about
25 cm (0.8 ft.).
2
Screen:
The indicator bars will come on in yellow according to the
distance to the obstacle. When the distance between the
vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.),
the yellow indicator bars will turn red. In addition, the
current direction of the tires is also indicated in 3 stages.
Beeps:
As distance to the obstacle gets closer, the interval of the
intermittent sound gets shorter, and then finally to a continuous
sound when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle
is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.).
(B) Collision will be avoided by changing the steering
G31056
3 About 50 cm (1.5 ft.) to about 100 cm (3.0 ft.)
4 About 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.) to about 50 cm (1.5 ft.)
5 About 25 cm (0.8 ft.) to about 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.)
The steering guide symbol and the arrow indicating which
direction should be steered appear along with the bar
indicators and beeps.
377
STARTING AND DRIVING
The above illustration indicates that the collision will be
avoided by turning the steering wheel clockwise.
When the possibility that the distance between the vehicle and
the obstacle is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.) is eliminated by
turning the steering wheel more, the steering guide symbol will
go out and the beeps will stop sounding.
The steering guide symbol and arrow are not instructions
you must observe. They are just a guide to avoid a
collision.
1
Multi−information display:
The indicator bars will come on depending on the
distance to the obstacle . The steering guide symbol and
arrow will also come on.
2
Screen:
The indicator bars will come on in yellow depending on
the distance to the obstacle. The steering guide symbol
and arrow will also come on. In addition, the current
direction of the tires is also indicated in 3 stages.
Beeps:
As distance to the obstacle gets closer, the interval of the
intermittent sound gets shorter, and then finally to a continuous
sound when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle
is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.).
378
CAUTION
When an obstacle is detected within about 25 cm (0.8 ft.)
from the vehicle, the dual sensors will change the
determination to an unavoidable collision. To avoid an
accident or injury, be sure to confirm a safe distance
around your vehicle with your eyes and drive slowly.
STARTING AND DRIVING
(C) Collision will be avoided with the present steering
angle
1
Multi−information display:
The indicator bars will come on depending on the
distance to the obstacle.
2
Screen:
The indicator bars will come on in green depending on the
distance to the obstacle. In addition, the current direction
of the tires is also indicated in 3 stages.
Beeps:
Beeps will not sound.
CAUTION
G31057
To avoid an accident or injury, observe the following.
When you move your vehicle, be sure to confirm a safe
distance around your vehicle with your eyes and drive
slowly.
With long obstacles such as walls, the decision of the
sensor may change as the obstacle gets closer; from
certain avoidance to avoidance if steering is
changed; from certain avoidance to unavoidable
collision; and there are also times when the decision
will be changed from avoidance if steering is
changed, to certain collision.
3 About 50 cm (1.5 ft.) to about 100 cm (3.0 ft.)
4 About 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.) to about 50 cm (1.5 ft.)
5 About 25 cm (0.8 ft.) to about 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.)
When an obstacle is detected within about 25 cm (0.8
ft.) from the vehicle, the dual sensors will change the
determination to an unavoidable collision.
379
STARTING AND DRIVING
Rear corner sensors
G31058
The rear corner sensor only operates when the
transmission is in “R”, it checks the approximate distance
to obstacles at an angle to the rear of the vehicle, and
sounds a warning depending on the distance.
1
Multi−information display:
The indicator bars will come on depending on the
distance to the obstacle and will flash when the distance
between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about
25 cm (0.8 ft.).
2
Screen:
The indicator bars will come on in yellow depending on
the distance to the obstacle. When the distance between
the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 25 cm (0.8
ft.), the yellow indicator bars will turn red.
Beeps:
As distance to the obstacle gets closer, the interval of the
intermittent sound gets shorter, and then finally to a continuous
sound when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle
is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.).
CAUTION
3 About 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.) to about 50 cm (1.5 ft.)
4 About 25 cm (0.8 ft.) to about 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.)
5 Less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.)
380
When backing up, be sure to confirm a safe distance
around your vehicle with your eyes to avoid an accident.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Back sensors
G31059
The back sensor only operates when the transmission is
in “R”, it checks the approximate distance to obstacles
close to the rear of the vehicle, and sounds a warning
depending on the distance.
1
Multi−information display:
The indicator bars will come on depending on the
distance to the obstacle and will flash when the distance
between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about
35 cm (1.1 ft.).
2
Screen:
The indicator bars will come on in yellow depending on
the distance to the obstacle. When the distance between
the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 35 cm (1.1
ft.), the yellow indicator bars will turn red.
Beeps:
As distance to the obstacle gets closer, the interval of the
intermittent sound gets shorter, and then finally to a continuous
sound when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle
is less than about 35 cm (1.1 ft.).
CAUTION
3
4
5
6
About 60 cm (2.0 ft.) to about 150 cm (5.0 ft.)
About 45 cm (1.4 ft.) to about 60.0 cm (2.0ft.)
About 35 cm (1.1 ft.) to about 45.0 cm (1.4 ft.)
Less than about 35 cm (1.1 ft.)
When backing up, be sure to confirm a safe distance
around your vehicle with your eyes to avoid an accident.
381
STARTING AND DRIVING
Numerous obstacles are detected on the front
and rear of the vehicle simultaneously
The warning for the obstacle closer to the vehicle will be
issued. The above illustration indicates the obstacle detected
by the back sensors is closer to the vehicle. So, the warning for
the obstacle detected by the back sensors will be given.
2
The obstacle detected on the front or rear of the
vehicle is in an area where continuous beeping
should sound:
If the possibility of collision with the obstacle is high as shown,
the system warns the driver by continuous beeping (repeating
6 intermittent beeps and one longer beep as one cycle).
G31060
3
Both obstacles detected on the front and rear of the
vehicle are in areas where continuous beeping
should sound:
If the possibility of collision with the obstacles is very high as
shown, the system warns the driver by continuous beeping
(repeating 2 quick beeps and one longer beep as one cycle).
CAUTION
When obstacles are detected on the front and rear of the
vehicle at the same time; the multi−information display
and screen illuminate their relevant indicator bars. And
beeps are as follows:
1
382
Obstacles detected on the front and rear of the
vehicle are not in areas where continuous beeping
should sound:
It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of
audio or air flow noise of air conditioning. To avoid an
accident or injury, drive slowly using the brakes while
confirming a safe distance around your vehicle with
your eyes.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Detection range of sensors*
NOTE:
* The detection range can be changed from about 50 cm
(1.5 ft.) for dual sensors and about 60 cm (2 ft.) for back
sensors.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
The intuitive parking assist may not work properly in the
following cases:
When the bumper is damaged.
G31061
When the part near the sensors is subjected to a strong
impact.
When an accessory is installed within the sensor detection
range.
When snowflakes or mud gets on the sensors.
(If removed, the system will work properly.)
When water is splashed from a high pressure car wash or
steam on the sensors.
When a sensor is covered with your hand.
When the vehicle is tilted.
1 About 3 m (10 ft.) 2 About 1 m (3 ft.)
3 About 1m 50 cm (5 ft.) 4 About 50 cm (1.5 ft.)
In extreme hot or cold weather
(In extreme cold weather, the error display appears and the
system becomes inoperative.)
The sensor detection range is limited around the bumper.
Be sure to confirm a safe distance around your vehicle
and drive slowly.
When driving on bumpy roads, slopes, gravelled roads or
grass.
383
STARTING AND DRIVING
Devices issuing ultrasonic waves are operated around your
vehicle, such as a horn from another vehicle, motorcycle
engine, air braking sound from heavy−duty vehicles.
When another vehicle equipped with ultrasonic sensors
gets close to your vehicle.
When heavy rain or water is splashed over the vehicle.
(Drive carefully as the braking distance may be affected.)
When a radio antenna or fender pole is mounted on your
vehicle.
If towing eyelet is installed on your vehicle.
When you are driving towards a tall curb stone or curb stone
having right angle.
The detection range for an object such as a traffic sign may
be shortened.
An object just under the bumper cannot be detected.
Although an object lower than the location of sensors is
once detected, the detection might be stopped when your
vehicle gets closer to the object.
When an obstacle is very close to the sensors.
384
The intuitive parking assist may not detect the following:
Thin objects such as wire or rope
Sound wave absorbing objects such as cotton or snow
Objects with a sharp edge
Tall objects with the upper part projected
Shorter objects
STARTING AND DRIVING
Intuitive parking assist failure warning
When snowflakes or mud gets on the sensors
If an error is detected when the intuitive parking assist is
turned on, the vehicle symbol comes on or flashes with
beeping sounds.
At this time steering guidance is temporarily stopped.
However, the sensors functioning properly continue their
obstacle detection. For details, see “When the detection range
of the sensors is shorter” on page 388.
G31062a
The intuitive parking assist failure warning display is not given
in either of the following operations:
Changing to another screen
Turning off the main switch for the intuitive parking assist
1 Multi−information display
2 Screen
If foreign matter gets on the sensors and the intuitive
parking assist cannot detect the object properly, the
above message appears. At this time, the vehicle symbol
and the indicator bars corresponding to the faulty
sensors flash for about 7 seconds and 2 beeps sound 5
times.
After about 7 seconds, the sensor indicator bars will
cease flashing, however will stay lit until the affected
sensor is cleaned. Furthermore, the vehicle symbol will
continue to flash until the affected sensor is cleaned.
The above illustration shows the sensor on the left front of the
vehicle malfunctioning.
If the failure warning does not go off even after the foreign
matter is removed, the intuitive parking assist may be
malfunctioning. Have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
385
STARTING AND DRIVING
When the sensor is malfunctioning
G31063a
1 Multi−information display
2 Screen
If the sensor cable is broken and the intuitive parking
assist cannot detect the object properly, the above
message appears. At this time, the indicator bars
corresponding to the faulty sensor flash for about 7
seconds and 2 beeps sound 5 times.
The indicator bars continue lighting after flashing.
The above illustration shows the sensor on the right rear of the
vehicle malfunctioning.
If this message appears, have the sensor checked by your
Lexus dealer.
386
When the steering sensor is malfunctioning
G31064
If the steering sensor cable is broken and signals cannot
be received, the vehicle symbol comes on and the
steering guide symbol and arrows flash.
If only the steering sensor is malfunctioning, the warning
appears only on the multi−information display.
If this warning appears, have the sensor checked by your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
STARTING AND DRIVING
When the neutral point of the steering sensor is unknown
As the intuitive parking assist might be malfunctioning in
the following cases, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
The indicator in the instrument cluster does not come on
and a beep does not sound even when the intuitive parking
assist main switch is turned on.
G31065
The warning comes on despite no obstacle around the
vehicle.
If the memorized neutral point of the steering is erased by
replacing the battery, the vehicle symbol, steering guide
symbol and arrows come on.
If only the neutral point of the steering sensor is unknown, the
warning appears only on the multi−information display.
If this warning appears, calibrate the neutral point of the
steering using either of the following:
Turn the steering wheel either way fully and then in the
opposite direction fully and slowly, with the vehicle stopped.
Drive on roads (with as few curves as possible and without
backing up) for more than about 5 minutes.
If this warning goes out, the calibration of the steering neutral
point is completed. If the warning still remains on, have the
sensor checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
387
STARTING AND DRIVING
When the detection range of the sensors is
shorter
In the following cases, the sensors will detect an obstacle
about 50 cm (1.5 ft.) from either front corner of the vehicle
and the steering guidance will be stopped. Accordingly,
the tire orientation symbol on the screen does not appear.
And only the warning according to the distance up to the
obstacle is given.
a. Any one of the sensors is malfunctioning.
Rear view monitor display (Vehicles with rear
view monitor system)
G31066
b. Any one of the steering sensors is malfunctioning.
c. The steering sensor signal cannot be received properly.
d. The correct vehicle information cannot be given due to
extremely low battery voltage.
e. Proper steering detection (going straight) cannot be
detected
On vehicles equipped with rear view monitor system, a
warning appears on the right top of the rear view monitor
in the following conditions.
In case of a., when the intuitive parking assist returns to
normal, the steering guidance also comes back automatically.
When the selector lever is put in “R” and the rear view
monitor is turned on.
In case of b. through e., the steering guidance also comes back
automatically after the neutral point of the steering sensor
calibration is completed.
388
When the intuitive parking assist main switch is turned on
and any sensor detects an obstacle.
Although “Display Off” is selected in the intuitive parking assist
setting screen, the warning appears on the right top of the rear
view monitor.
STARTING AND DRIVING
When the intuitive parking assist determines that the
collision will be avoided with the present steering angle:
Dual sensors
The indicator will come on in green.
G31067
1
2
3
4
However, if the sensors detect and determine an obstacle at
an angle to the front of the vehicle, the indicator will not come
on.
Beeps (except for avoidable collisions at the present
steering angle):
As distance to the obstacle gets closer, the interval of the
intermittent sound gets shorter, and then finally to a continuous
sound when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle
is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.).
About 50 cm (1.5 ft.) to about 100 cm (3.0 ft.)
About 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.) to about 50 cm (1.5 ft.)
About 25 cm (0.8 ft.) to about 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.)
Less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.)
When the intuitive parking assist determines that the
collision will be unavoidable:
The indicator will flash yellow depending on the distance to the
obstacle. When the distance between the vehicle and the
obstacle is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.), the yellow indicator
will turn red.
When the intuitive parking assist determines that the
collision will be avoided by changing the steering:
The indicator will flash yellow depending on the distance to the
vehicle. The steering guide symbol and arrow do not appear.
CAUTION
When an obstacle is detected within about 25 cm (0.8
ft.) from the vehicle, the dual sensors will change the
determination to an unavoidable collision.
With long obstacles such as walls, the decision of the
sensor may change as the obstacle gets closer; from
certain avoidance to avoidance if steering is
changed; from certain avoidance to unavoidable
collision; and there are also times when the decision
will be changed from avoidance if steering is
changed, to certain collision.
When you move your vehicle, be sure to confirm a safe
distance around your vehicle with your eyes and drive
slowly, or an accident or injury may result.
389
STARTING AND DRIVING
Rear corner sensors
Back sensors
G31068
1 About 35 cm (1.1ft.) to about 50 cm (1.5 ft.)
2 About 25 cm (0.8 ft.) to about 35 cm (1.1 ft.)
3 Less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.)
Display:
The indicator will flash yellow depending on the distance to the
obstacle. When the distance between the vehicle and the
obstacle is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.), the yellow indicator
will turn red.
Beeps :
As distance to the obstacle gets closer, the interval of the
intermittent sound gets shorter, and then finally to a continuous
sound when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle
is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.).
390
G31069
1
2
3
4
About 60.0 cm (2.0 ft.) to about 150 cm (5.0 ft.)
About 45.0 cm (1.4 ft.) to about 60.0 cm (2.0 ft.)
About 35.0 cm (1.1 ft.) to about 45.0 cm (1.4 ft.)
Less than about 35 cm (1.1 ft.)
Display:
The indicator will flash in yellow depending on the distance to
the obstacle. When the distance between the vehicle and the
obstacle is less than about 35 cm (1.1 ft.), the yellow indicator
will turn red.
Beeps :
As distance to the obstacle gets closer, the interval of the
intermittent sound gets shorter, and then finally to a continuous
sound when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle
is less than about 35 cm (1.1 ft.).
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
When backing up, be sure to confirm a safe distance
around your vehicle with your eyes to avoid an accident.
Setting the intuitive parking assist
The volume of the beeps and turning on or off of the
display can be set.
G31070
1 With Navigation system
2 Without Navigation system
1. Push the “INFO” button to display the menu screen.
391
STARTING AND DRIVING
G31071a
With Navigation system
G31123a
Without Navigation system
2. Touch “LEXUS Park Assist”.
392
G31072a
3. Touch your desired item.
STARTING AND DRIVING
(A) Changing the volume of the beeps
G31073a
(B) Display setting
G31074a
Touch “Volume” to change the volume of the beeps.
Touch “Display”. You have 3 settings.
The volume has 5 levels, increasing with higher value. Select
your desired volume and touch “Back” to return to the previous
screen.
Static: Warnings appear when obstacles are detected within
the detection range.
Dynamic: Warnings appear only when a collision is
unavoidable.
Display Off: Warnings are not given even if an obstacle is
detected.
Vehicles with rear view monitor system—
Although “Display Off” is turned on, if the obstacle is detected
during the rear view monitoring, the warning appears on the
right top of the screen.
After setting the display, touch “Back” to return to the previous
screen.
393
STARTING AND DRIVING
(C) Explanations of Parking Sonar Symbols
For vehicles sold in Canada.
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES−001.
Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme
NMB−001 du Canada.
G31075a
Touch “Explanation”.
After reading the explanation, touch “Back” to return to the
previous screen.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
394
STARTING AND DRIVING
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by
displaying an image of the view behind the vehicle while
backing up. The image is displayed in reverse on the
screen. This allows the image to appear in the same
manner as that of the rear view mirror.
To display the rear view image on the screen, place the
selector lever in the “R” position when the engine switch
is selected in “IG−ON” mode.
If you move the selector lever out of the “R” position, the screen
returns to the previous screen. Operating another function of
the navigation system will display another screen.
The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device
intended to assist back up. When backing up, be sure to check
behind and all around the vehicle visually.
Vehicles with intuitive parking assist—
When the intuitive parking assist is turned on and an obstacle
is detected in front or rear of your vehicle, a warning appears
on the right top of the rear view monitor. For details, see
“Intuitive parking assist” on page 372.
CAUTION
Never depend on the rear view monitor system
entirely when backing up. Always make sure your
intended path is clear.
Use caution just as you would when backing up any
vehicle.
Never back up while looking only at the screen. The
image on the screen is different from actual
conditions. Depicted distances between objects and
flat surfaces will differ from actual distances. If you
back up while looking only at the screen, you may hit
a vehicle, a person or an object. When backing up, be
sure to check behind and all around the vehicle
visually and with mirrors before proceeding.
Do not use the system when the trunk is not
completely closed.
If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and
mounting angle of the camera may change. Be sure
to have the camera’s position and mounting angle
checked at your Lexus dealer.
If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot
water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the
system may not operate normally.
395
STARTING AND DRIVING
If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit
a clear image. If water droplets, snow, or mud adhere
to the lens, rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth.
If the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild
cleanser and rinse.
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN
Image is displayed approximately level on screen.
Use your own eyes to confirm the vehicle’s
surroundings, as the displayed image may become
faint or dark, and moving images will be distorted or
not entirely visible when the outside temperature is
low. When backing up, be sure to check behind and
all around the vehicle visually and with mirror before
proceeding.
G31077a
Check surroundings for safety.
Corners of bumper
396
STARTING AND DRIVING
The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects
which are close to either corner of the bumper or under
the bumper cannot be seen on the screen.
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM CAMERA
The area displayed on the screen may vary according
to vehicle orientation or road conditions.
G31078
The rear view monitor system camera is located on the trunk
as shown in the illustration. The camera uses a special lens.
The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs
from the actual distance.
In the following cases, it may become difficult to see the images
on the screen, even when the system is functioning.
In the dark (for example, at night)
When the temperature near the lens is extremely high or low
When water droplets are adhering to the camera, or when
humidity is high (for example, when it rains)
When foreign matter (for example, snow or mud) adheres
to the camera lens
When the sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly
into the camera lens
397
STARTING AND DRIVING
CRUISE CONTROL
31L357
Check surroundings for safety.
If a bright light (for example, sunlight reflected off the vehicle
body) is picked up by the camera, the smear effect* peculiar
to the camera may occur.
*: Smear effect — A phenomenon that occurs when a bright
light (for example, sunlight reflected off the vehicle body) is
picked up by the camera; when transmitted by the camera, the
light source appears to have a vertical streak above and below
it.
The cruise control allows you to cruise the vehicle at a
desired speed over 40 km/h (25 mph) with your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Your cruising speed can be maintained although a slight speed
change may occur when driving up or down a gradient, within
the limits of engine performance. On steeper hills, a great
speed change will occur so it is better to drive without the cruise
control.
When the cruise control is on, the driving pattern of the
automatic transmission is fixed in the normal mode, regardless
of the position of the selector switch.
CAUTION
To help maintain maximum control of your vehicle,
do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy
or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or
snow−covered) or winding roads.
Avoid vehicle speed increases when driving
downhill. If the vehicle speed is too fast in relation to
the cruise control set speed, cancel the cruise
control then downshift the transmission to use
engine braking to slow down.
398
STARTING AND DRIVING
Turning the system on
Setting operation
G31163a
To operate the cruise control, push the “ON−OFF” button. This
turns the system on. The indicator light in the instrument
cluster shows that you can now set your desired cruising
speed. Another push on the button will turn the system
completely off.
When the engine switch is turned off, the “ON−OFF” button is
also automatically turned off. To use the cruise control again,
push the “ON−OFF” button again to turn it on.
CAUTION
To avoid accidental cruise control engagement, keep
the “ON−OFF” button off when not using the cruise
control.
G31164a
Each function is described below.
1
Setting at a desired speed.
The transmission must be in the “D” position, or the shift range
position must be “4” (fourth range), “5” (fifth range) or “6” (sixth
range) in the “S” mode before you set the cruise control speed.
Bring the vehicle to the desired speed, press the control lever
downward in the “– SET” direction and release it. This sets the
vehicle at that speed. Now you may take your foot off the
accelerator pedal. If you need acceleration − for example,
when passing − depress the accelerator pedal enough for the
vehicle to exceed the set speed. When you release the
accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the speed set prior
to the acceleration.
399
STARTING AND DRIVING
2
Cancelling the preset speed
You can cancel the preset speed by doing any of the following:
a. Pulling the control lever in the ”CANCEL” direction.
b. Depressing the brake pedal.
c. Pushing the “ON−OFF” button.
If the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the
preset speed will be automatically cancelled.
If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 mph) below the preset
speed, the preset speed will also automatically be cancelled.
If the slip indicator light blinks and a warning tone sounds, the
preset speed will be automatically cancelled.
If the preset speed automatically cancels out for other than the
above reasons, do not operate the cruise control. Although it
is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked
by your Lexus dealer at the earliest opportunity.
3
Resetting to a faster speed
Press the control lever upward in the “+ RES” direction and
hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained.
While the lever is held upward, the vehicle will gradually gain
speed.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the
set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be
increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control
lever upward in the “+ RES” direction quickly within 0.6
seconds.
400
However, a quicker way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle
and then press the control lever downward in the “– SET”
direction.
4
Resetting to a slower speed
Press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction and
hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained.
While the lever is held downward, the vehicle speed will
gradually decrease.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the
set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be
lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control
lever downward in the “– SET” direction quickly within 0.6
seconds.
However, a quicker way to reset is to depress the brake pedal
and then press the control lever downward in the “– SET”
direction.
With the cruise control on, even if you downshift the
transmission from the “D” position or “6” (sixth range) to the “5”
(fifth range), or from the “D” position or “5” (fifth range) to the
“4” (fourth range), engine braking will not be enabled because
the cruise control is not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle
speed, reset to a slower speed with the cruise control lever or
depress the brake pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise
control is cancelled.
STARTING AND DRIVING
5
Resuming the preset speed
If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling the control lever, by
depressing the brake pedal or vehicle stability control
activation, pushing the lever up in the “+ RES” direction will
restore the speed set prior to cancellation. However, once the
vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset
speed will not be resumed.
Cruise control failure warning
If the “CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes
when using the cruise control, push the “ON−OFF” button to
turn the system off and then push it again to turn it on.
If any of the following conditions then occurs, there is some
trouble in the cruise control system.
The indicator light does not come on.
The indicator light flashes again.
The indicator light goes out after it comes on.
If this is the case, contact your Lexus dealer and have your
Lexus inspected.
DYNAMIC RADAR CRUISE
CONTROL
The vehicles with pre−collision system are equipped with
dynamic radar cruise control.
Dynamic radar cruise control allows you to drive at a
selected cruising speed over about 45 km/h (28 mph) with
your foot off the accelerator pedal, maintaining an
appropriate vehicle−to−vehicle distance.
CAUTION
Do not rely excessively on dynamic radar cruise control
in order to avoid serious injury or death, or to prevent
accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in
emergency situations. Do not use cruise control except
in appropriate road and traffic conditions. Always drive
carefully and attentively. Before using dynamic radar
cruise control, read and understand the following
instructions.
401
STARTING AND DRIVING
Changing the dynamic radar cruise control
mode
G31009
G31010
1
2
3
4
Multi−information display
Master warning light
“CRUISE” indicator light
Distance switch
(for changing vehicle−to−vehicle distance)
5 Cruise control switch
1 Vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode
2 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
The dynamic radar cruise control function has two cruise
control modes.
Vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode for maintaining
an appropriate distance between vehicles
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising
at preset speeds
You can change the mode by using the control lever.
The two cruise control modes function differently. If you use
dynamic radar cruise control, always confirm which mode is
selected.
402
STARTING AND DRIVING
Vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode
The millimeter wave radar sensor in this system primarily
detects the reflected wave from the rear end of the vehicle
ahead of you to determine the presence of the vehicle
ahead as well as measuring the vehicle−to−vehicle
distance. The detection range of the sensor is about 120
m (400 ft.) ahead.
When the dynamic radar cruise control is on, the driving
pattern of the automatic transmission is fixed in the normal
mode, regardless of the position of the selector switch.
(a) Dynamic radar cruise control operations
G31012
CAUTION
The dynamic radar cruise control is not a
collision−avoidance system and will not prevent
accidents. The dynamic radar cruise control is a vehicle
speed control device that is intended for use only on
freeways or roads where the traffic is light or moderate.
To avoid serious injury, you must use caution and be
attentive to road and traffic conditions while using
dynamic radar cruise control.
The dynamic radar cruise control function operates
automatically and depending on whether a vehicle is
detected ahead may change the speed of your vehicle as
follows:
403
STARTING AND DRIVING
If no vehicle is running ahead of you:
1
Cruising at a fixed speed: If there is no vehicle detected
ahead, your cruising speed is maintained at the preset
speed from about 45 km/h (28 mph) to about 135 km/h (85
mph). The preset speed is displayed in the
multi−information display. For the vehicle speed setting,
see “Setting operation ” on page 408.
If a vehicle is detected ahead of you:
404
2
Deceleration cruising function: If a slower moving
vehicle is detected ahead of you, your vehicle cruising
speed decreases within the range of about 40 km/h (25
mph) to about 135 km/h (85 mph). The multi−information
display shows the preset speed, the detected vehicle
ahead and selected vehicle−to−vehicle distance. If your
vehicle gets closer to the vehicle ahead because of
insufficient automatic deceleration, then the warning tone
warns you to also manually apply brakes.
3
Follow−up cruising function: After deceleration, your
vehicle cruising speed changes in proportion to the speed
of the vehicle ahead to maintain an appropriate distance
from your vehicle to the vehicle ahead. The
vehicle−to−vehicle distance can be changed. For details,
see “Changing vehicle−to−vehicle distance setting” on
page 412.
4
Acceleration cruising function: If the vehicle ahead
changes lanes, your vehicle cruising speed will be
gradually increased up to the preset speed, and your
vehicle resumes fixed−speed cruising.
CAUTION
Under certain conditions where the vehicle in front
slows drastically, or is stopped, the dynamic radar
cruise control will neither warn you nor decelerate. The
driver must depress the brake pedal to slow down,
ensuring collision avoidance or that sufficient
vehicle−to−vehicle distance is maintained.
When vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode is activated,
you must still be attentive to road and traffic conditions. Should
your vehicle speed decrease below about 40 km/h (25 mph),
the dynamic radar cruise control will shut off, requiring you to
apply the brakes to slow. When a vehicle ahead slows
suddenly, stops or a vehicle cuts in front, the system may slow
your vehicle abruptly, but the automatic braking will cease if the
speed decreases below about 40 km/h (25 mph) requiring the
driver’s manual application of brakes.
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
Dynamic radar cruise control should not be used in the
following conditions, to avoid death or serious injury.
Certain conditions make vehicle detection difficult or
impossible.
In bad weather (such as rain, fog, snow, sandstorms,
or when raindrops or snowflakes get in the millimeter
wave
radar
sensor
or
the
cover),
the
vehicle−to−vehicle distance will not be measured
accurately.
As this system operates by detecting primarily the
reflected wave from the rear end of the vehicle ahead,
the distance cannot be accurately detected in the
following
cases,
resulting
in
improper
vehicle−to−vehicle distance.
♦ The rear section of the vehicle ahead is extremely
small such as an unloaded trailer.
♦ The vehicle ahead or other vehicles around you
are flinging up water or snow.
♦ Heavy luggage which is loaded in your trunk or on
top of your rear seats is raising up the nose of your
vehicle.
The millimeter wave radar sensor automatically
detects dirt if it is sticking to the front of the sensor
or cover of your vehicle, and if detected, a message
appears on the multi−information display. However,
if the sensor or cover is covered with a metallic vinyl
bag, icicle, snowflakes, etc., dirt may not be detected,
resulting in improper vehicle−to−vehicle distance.
Continue driving with due care to the vehicle ahead.
If dirt is detected, the dynamic radar cruise control
function is automatically cancelled. Always keep the
sensor and cover clean.
If the wipers are operated at high speed (including the
high speed operation with the wiper lever in the
“AUTO” position), dynamic radar cruise control is
automatically cancelled. (In the case of the low speed
operation and intermittent wiper operation, it is not
cancelled.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is
automatically cancelled when the measurement is
extremely unstable due to bad weather.
On the roads in heavy traffic or at sharp bends:
As an appropriate speed cannot be maintained, death
or serious injury could result.
On slippery road surfaces (icy or snow−covered road
surfaces):
The tires will race and you will be unable to control.
405
STARTING AND DRIVING
On steep downhill slopes:
If there is no vehicle detected ahead, the preset speed
will be easily exceeded because of inefficient engine
braking, resulting in death or serious injury. (In this
case, automatic braking will not work.) If there is a
vehicle detected ahead, the delay in deceleration
timing could cause death or serious injury.
When the warning tone sounds frequently (because
acceleration or deceleration was repeated or
sufficient vehicle−to−vehicle distance was not
maintained), an appropriate vehicle speed cannot be
attained, resulting in death or serious injury.
On roads with steep and short inclines and declines,
failure to detect the vehicle ahead will shorten the
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead,
resulting in death or serious injury.
G31013
Dynamic radar cruise control should not be used in
circumstances which are inappropriate for any cruise control
such as entering freeway on−ramps or off−ramps.
CAUTION
The dynamic radar cruise control should not be used
when exiting from, or when entering or merging onto a
freeway. When you are following a slower moving
vehicle and exiting, the sensor does not detect the
vehicle and will accelerate to preset speed.
406
STARTING AND DRIVING
(b) Turning the system on
G31015
CAUTION
If other vehicles are driving outside of the millimeter
wave radar detection range, a delay in the detection
of the vehicle cutting in at short range or detection
failure of the motorcycle running on the side of the
same lane will occur. In this case, the dynamic radar
cruise control system will not function properly.
When a slower vehicle in front of you leaves the lane,
the dynamic radar cruise control will no longer detect
a vehicle ahead and will attempt to accelerate the
vehicle to the faster preset speed.
G31011
To operate the dynamic radar cruise control, push the
“ON−OFF” button. This turns the system on. When the
“CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on
and “RADAR READY” appears on the multi−information
display, you can now set your desired cruising speed and
vehicle−to−vehicle distance. Pushing the “ON−OFF” button
again will turn the system completely off and “CRUISE OFF”
will appear on the multi−information display.
When the engine switch is turned off, the system is also
automatically turned off. To use the dynamic radar cruise
control again, push the “ON−OFF” button again to turn it on.
When the engine switch is turned off, all the preset data is
cleared. When you use the dynamic radar cruise control again,
you need to reset the data.
407
STARTING AND DRIVING
The multi−information display will return to the
vehicle−to−vehicle distance screen about 6 seconds after the
vehicle−to−vehicle distance screen has been changed to
another screen.
(c) Setting operation
CAUTION
G31014
To avoid accidentally engaging the cruise control, keep
the “ON−OFF” button off when not using the dynamic
radar cruise control.
Each function is described below.
1
Setting the desired speed
The transmission must be in “D”, “6” (sixth range), “5” (fifth
range) or “4”(fourth range) before you set the cruise control
speed.
408
STARTING AND DRIVING
After bringing the vehicle to the desired speed, press the
control lever downward in the “– SET” direction and release it.
This sets the vehicle at that speed. At this time, the
multi−information display indicates settings such as the preset
vehicle speed, whether a vehicle is present ahead and
selected vehicle−to−vehicle distance. If there is no vehicle
detected ahead, the dynamic radar cruise control screen does
not display the vehicle ahead. At this time, you may take your
foot off the accelerator pedal. If you need to accelerate − for
example, when passing − depress the accelerator pedal
enough for the vehicle to exceed the preset speed. When you
release the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the
control prior to acceleration.
You cannot set a desired speed if the master warning light
comes on, the warning tone sounds and the multi−information
display indicates a warning message such as “CRUISE NOT
AVAILABLE”, “CLEAN RADAR SENSOR” or “CHECK
CRUISE SYSTEM”. If any of the above messages appears on
the display, see “Vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode
failure warning” on page 417.
If you turn off the “ON−OFF” button while the warning message
is displayed, the warning message turns off and the
multi−information display switches to another screen. If no
warning message appears on the display, when you turn the
“ON−OFF” button on again, the setting can be made.
You can change the dynamic radar cruise control screen to
another screen even while the warning message is displayed.
2
Cancelling the preset speed
You can cancel the preset speed by doing any of the following:
a. Pulling the control lever, in the ”CANCEL” direction.
b. Depressing the brake pedal.
c. Pushing the “ON−OFF” button.
If cancelled by a. or b., the multi−information display shows
“RADAR READY” and the dynamic radar cruise control enters
the ready mode.
If cancelled by c., the “CRUISE” indicator light goes off in the
instrument cluster and the multi−information display shows
“CRUISE OFF”. In this case, the preset speed data is cleared,
and you must set the speed from the beginning.
In the following case, the preset speed automatically
cancels out. At this time, the multi−information display
shows “RADAR READY” and the dynamic radar cruise
control enters the ready mode.
The vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph). (40
km/h (25 mph) is designated as a cancel speed.)
CAUTION
In this case, the warning tone reminds you that the
dynamic radar cruise control is cancelled and you must
apply the brakes to slow the vehicle.
409
STARTING AND DRIVING
In the following cases, the warning messages appear and
the preset speed automatically cancels out. When
dynamic radar cruise control is restored, the warning
messages turn off and dynamic radar cruise control
enters “RADAR READY” mode.
a. The slip indicator light blinks and a warning tone sounds.
(This occurs when the vehicle is about to skid.)
b. The driving pattern selector switch is set to snow mode.
c. The anti−lock brake system is activated by automatic
braking. (The warning tone sounds.)
d. The sensor does not operate properly because a foreign
matter sticks to the sensor.
e. The wipers are operated at high speed (including high
speed operation with the wiper lever in the “AUTO” position.)
NOTICE
If the preset speed automatically cancels out for other
than the above reasons, do not operate the dynamic
radar cruise control. Although it is no problem to
continue driving, have your vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer at the earliest opportunity.
410
3
Resetting to a faster speed
Press the control lever upward in the ”+ RES” direction and
hold it. The displayed speed will increase in increments of 5
mph (for the U.S.A.) or 5 km/h (for Canada). Release the lever
when the desired speed is attained. The vehicle will gradually
increase to the displayed speed.
Depressing the accelerator pedal and pressing the control
lever downward in the “– SET” direction will not reset to a faster
speed. At this time the set speed falls by 5 mph (for the U.S.A.)
or 5 km/h (for Canada).
CAUTION
When the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control is on (on
follow−up cruising), your cruising speed is regulated in
proportion to the speed of the vehicle ahead, so
increasing the preset vehicle speed using the control
lever does not accelerate the vehicle. However, if the
vehicle ahead leaves the lane, your cruising speed will
increase up to the preset speed because the preset
speed has been set higher using the control lever.
Confirm the setting on the multi−information display.
STARTING AND DRIVING
4
Resetting to a slower speed
5
Resuming the preset speed
Press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction and
hold it. The displayed speed will decrease in increments of 5
mph (for the U.S.A.) or 5 km/h (for Canada). Release the lever
when the desired speed is attained. The vehicle will gradually
decrease to the displayed speed.
If the preset speed has been cancelled, when you push the
lever up in the “+ RES” direction while “RADAR READY”
shows up on the multi−information display and at a vehicle
speed of about more than 40 km/h (25 mph), the speed set
prior to cancellation will be restored.
A quicker way to reset the preset speed is to depress the brake
pedal and then press the control lever downward in the “– SET”
direction.
During follow−up cruising, if there are no vehicles running
ahead because they have changed lanes, your vehicle will
accelerate gradually up to the preset speed.
If the control lever is released when the vehicle speed exceeds
the upper limit of the preset speed traveling downhill while you
are pressing the control lever downward, the system will
memorize the upper limit of the preset speed as a preset
speed.
Even if you downshift the transmission from “D” or “6” (sixth
range) to “5” (fifth range), or from “D” or “5” (fifth range) to “4”
(fourth range) in the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode,
engine braking will not be enabled because this mode is not
cancelled. To decrease the vehicle speed, reset to a slower
speed with the cruise control lever or depress the brake pedal.
If you use the brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.
411
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
(d) Changing vehicle−to−vehicle distance
Deceleration cruising function and approach
warning do not operate when the vehicle ahead is at
a stop or driving very slowly.
While vehicle−to−vehicle distance control is on (on
follow−up cruising), acceleration and deceleration
are automatically performed in proportion to the
speed of the vehicle ahead detected. However, if the
vehicle ahead of you decelerates abruptly or if
another vehicle cuts in ahead of you, your vehicle
may collide with the vehicle ahead unless you
manually depress the brake pedal to slow down your
vehicle. If you need to accelerate because the vehicle
ahead or you changes lanes, then depress the
acceleration pedal.
Depending on the road configuration (curved roads,
left and right continuous curved roads, driving at the
start or end of the curve, narrow driving lanes due to
road construction) or your vehicle condition
(steering wheel maneuvering, position in the lane or
unstable driving because of an accident or
breakdown), vehicles in other lanes or surrounding
objects will be detected, resulting in a control failure
or the activated approach warning. This may also
result in a very close distance between vehicles due
to a failure to detect the vehicle ahead. Maneuvering
the steering wheel in response to a violent lateral
wind will cause similar conditions.
412
G31016
1 Long
2 Middle 3 Short
You can select one of the following vehicle−to−vehicle
distances: “Long”, “Middle” or “Short”. Each time you
pull the distance switch briefly toward you, the setting
changes from “Long” to “Middle” to “Short” and then
back to “Long”. You can confirm the setting on the
multi−information display.
It should be noted that pushing the “DISP” switch will change
to another screen.
Your vehicle speed changes in proportion to the speed of
the vehicle ahead, maintaining the selected distance.
However, if the vehicle speed is slower, the selected
distance will be shorter than the designated distance.
When the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode is
activated or the multi−information display indicates “RADAR
READY”, the vehicle−to−vehicle distance setting can be
changed.
STARTING AND DRIVING
The vehicle−to−vehicle distance is always set to “Long” when
the engine switch is turned on.
CAUTION
(e) Braking control
Dynamic radar cruise control is not a collision avoidance
system. If an approach warning is activated, depress the brake
pedal to decelerate to ensure an appropriate
vehicle−to−vehicle distance.
Select
the
vehicle−to−vehicle
distance
considering traffic conditions. The approximate
vehicle−to−vehicle distance based on time
interval when driving at 80 km/h (50 mph) is
shown below :
“Long” . . . . . . . . about 50 m (about 164 ft.)
“Middle” . . . . . . about 40 m (about 132 ft.)
G31017
“Short” . . . . . . . about 30 m (about 100 ft.)
If the vehicle speed is slower than 80 km/h (50 mph),
the distance will be shorter than the above.
During long downhill driving, the vehicle−to−vehicle
distance will be shorter than the selected distance.
1 Under the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control
2 Braking activated
Braking control is operating only when the vehicle−to−vehicle
distance control mode is selected and your vehicle speed
exceeds about 40 km/h (25 mph).
If you are getting closer to the vehicle ahead at relatively higher
speed than those of the vehicle ahead or if engine braking
cannot be applied properly, braking control is automatically
activated. At this time, “BRAKE” flashes on the
multi−information display, indicating that the brakes are being
used.
413
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
(f) Approach warning
Braking control will not ensure that your vehicle will
reduce speed appropriately. Do not rely on dynamic
radar cruise control to prevent collision.
G31018
CAUTION
While you are cruising in the vehicle−to−vehicle
distance control mode, if the vehicle ahead decelerates
abruptly or if another vehicle cuts in ahead of you,
inadequate braking will make your vehicle closer to the
vehicle ahead of you and the multi−information display
flashes and beeps. The driver must depress the brake
pedal to slow down, ensuring collision avoidance or
that sufficient vehicle−to−vehicle distance is
maintained.
414
STARTING AND DRIVING
The approach warning may not turn on even if the
vehicle drives closer to the vehicle ahead in the
following conditions:
(g) Millimeter wave radar sensor
♦ Your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are cruising at
almost the same speed.
♦ The vehicle ahead is cruising at a faster speed than
yours. (The distance between the vehicles will
become longer.)
G31019a
♦ Pay special attention to the very slow vehicle at the
end of the line in heavy traffic or at the tollgate.
♦ Immediately after the speed setting.
♦ The accelerator pedal is depressed or immediately
after the release of the accelerator pedal.
1 Millimeter wave grille cover
2 Millimeter wave radar sensor
The millimeter wave radar sensor is used for
vehicle−to−vehicle distance control cruising. When the
millimeter wave radar sensor is disabled for some reason,
the warning message appears on the multi−information
display. For details, see “Vehicle−to−vehicle distance
control mode failure warning” on page 417.
415
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
To ensure that the dynamic radar cruise control system
will function properly while driving, observe the
following:
Always keep the millimeter wave radar sensor and
grille cover clean. When cleaning, use a soft cloth
and be careful not to damage the sensor and grille
cover.
Avoid strong impacts around the millimeter wave
radar sensor. An incorrect millimeter wave radar
sensor alignment will result in system malfunction.
A special device is required to adjust the millimeter
wave radar sensor alignment. Be sure to have the
sensor adjusted by your Lexus dealer.
Do not disassemble the millimeter wave radar
sensor.
Do not affix a sticker (including a transparent sticker)
or attach an accessory around the millimeter radar
sensor or the grille cover.
Do not modify or paint the grille cover. When
replacing the grille cover, be sure to use a genuine
grille cover.
416
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
FCC RF exposure information
This device complies with the FCC RF exposure
requirements.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions;
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
STARTING AND DRIVING
(h) Vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode failure
warning
G31020
If there is trouble somewhere in the dynamic radar cruise
control while the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode is
on, the ”CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster
flashes, the master warning light comes on and the warning
tone sounds, and one or more of the following warning
messages will appear on the multi−information display.
G13073
If the system cannot easily measure the
vehicle−to−vehicle distance because of a dirty millimeter
wave radar sensor or grille cover while the dynamic radar
cruise control is on, the above message appears.
If this message appears, clean the sensor and grille cover with
a soft cloth and try setting the preset speed again. If the dirt
is removed without cleaning, the system will automatically
enter the “RADAR READY” mode. If the system does not enter
the “RADAR READY” mode even after cleaning or the
message remains on the display, the system might be
malfunctioning. Although it is no problem to continue driving,
contact your Lexus dealer.
“CLEAN RADAR SENSOR”
“CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE”
“CHECK CRUISE SYSTEM”
If any warning message shown above appears, the preset
speed automatically cancels out.
417
STARTING AND DRIVING
G13074
If the system cannot easily measure the
vehicle−to−vehicle distance because of the following
conditions while the dynamic radar cruise control is on,
the above message appears.
The driving pattern selector switch is set to the snow
position.
It is determined that it is difficult to make a measurement
because of bad weather (such as extremely hot weather).
The wipers are operated at high speed with the wiper lever
in the “AUTO” position.
In the following cases, the dynamic radar cruise control
switches to the “RADAR READY” mode:
The driving pattern selector switch is changed to the normal
or power position.
The wipers are stopped or are switched to low speed or
intermittent operation. (Including intermittent and stopped
wipers in the “AUTO” position.)
In the above conditions, press the control lever upward in the
“+ RES” direction and release it. The dynamic radar cruise
control will be restored, however, even after the weather
clears, if the setting operation cannot be performed or if the
warning message still appears, the system might have
malfunctioned. Although it is no problem to continue driving,
contact your Lexus dealer.
418
G13075
If the system malfunction is detected when dynamic radar
cruise control is in the “RADAR READY” mode or
operating, the above message appears.
If this message appears, stop your vehicle in a safe place, turn
the engine switch off, and then restart it to reset the system.
If the setting still cannot be made or the same message
appears again, the system might have malfunctioned.
Although it is no problem to continue driving, contact your
Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
While you are cruising with the dynamic radar cruise
control on, if the master warning light comes on, the
“CRUISE” indicator light flashes, “CHECK CRUISE
SYSTEM” appears on the multi−information display and
the warning tone sounds, turn the engine switch off and
then on again. If the function is cancelled again after
setting or if settings cannot be made, the dynamic radar
cruise control system may be malfunctioning.
Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your
vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control
mode
This mode allows you to cruise at a desired speed over
about 45 km/h (28 mph) with your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Cruising speed can be maintained, although a slight speed
change may occur when driving up or down a gradient, within
the limits of engine performance. On steeper hills, the speed
will change more radically so it is better to drive without cruise
control.
When cruise control is on, the driving pattern of the automatic
transmission is fixed in the normal mode, regardless of the
position of the selector switch.
CAUTION
In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control
mode, an approach warning does not activate even if
you are too close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the
presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle−to−vehicle distance is detected. Pay special
attention to the distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always confirm the setting in the
multi−information display.
The conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
of the dynamic radar cruise control should not be
used in the following conditions, which could result
in death or serious injury.
♦ To help maintain maximum control of your vehicle,
do not use fixed speed control mode when using
dynamic radar cruise control while driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy
or snow−covered) or winding roads.
♦ Avoid vehicle speed increasing when driving
downhill. If the vehicle speed is too fast in relation
to the preset speed in the fixed speed control
mode, cancel the fixed control mode and then
downshift the transmission to use engine braking
to slow down.
419
STARTING AND DRIVING
(a) Turning the system on
When the engine switch is turned off, the system is also
automatically turned off. To use the dynamic radar cruise
control again, push the “ON−OFF” button again to turn it on.
CAUTION
g31001
To operate conventional cruise control mode, push the
“ON−OFF” button. This turns the system on. The “CRUISE”
indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on and “RADAR
READY” appears on the multi−information display. Push the
control lever in the “MODE” direction for longer than 1 second
to change to conventional cruise control mode. The message
“RADAR READY” on the multi−information display will turn off.
You can now set your desired cruising speed. Pushing the
“ON−OFF” button again will turn the system completely off and
“CRUISE OFF” will appear on the multi−information display.
However, once the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode
activates and is used, it cannot be changed to the conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode using the above operation.
To change the mode, push the “ON−OFF” button to turn the
system off and then push it again to turn it on. Next push the
lever in the “MODE” direction for longer than about 1 second.
420
To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control , keep the
“ON−OFF” button off when not using dynamic radar
cruise control.
STARTING AND DRIVING
(b) Setting operation
g31002
Each function is described below.
1
Setting the desired speed
You cannot set a desired speed if the master warning light
comes on, the warning tone sounds and the multi−information
display indicates a warning message such as “CHECK
CRUISE SYSTEM”. If this messages appears on the display,
see “Conventional cruise control mode failure warning” on
page 423.
If you turn off the “ON−OFF” button while the warning message
is displayed, the warning message turns off and the
multi−information display switches to another screen. When
you turn the “ON−OFF” button on again, the warning message
comes back on the display. If no warning message appears on
the display, the setting can be made.
You can change the dynamic radar cruise control screen to
another screen even while the warning message is displayed.
2
Cancelling the preset speed
The transmission must be in “D”, “6” (sixth range), “5” (fifth
range) or “4” (fourth range) before you set the cruise control
speed in the conventional cruise control mode of the dynamic
radar cruise control.
You can cancel the preset speed by doing any of the following:
After bringing the vehicle to the desired speed, press the
control lever downward in the “– SET” direction and release it.
This sets the vehicle at that speed and the multi−information
display shows the preset speed. At this time, you may take
your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you need to accelerate
− for example, when passing − depress the accelerator pedal
enough for the vehicle to exceed the preset speed. When you
release the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the
speed set prior to acceleration.
c. Pushing the “ON−OFF” button.
a. Pulling the control lever in the ”CANCEL” direction.
b. Depressing the brake pedal.
If cancelled by a. or b., the multi−information displays shows
nothing and the conventional cruise control enters the ready
mode.
If cancelled by c., the “CRUISE” indicator light goes off in the
instrument cluster and the multi−information display shows
“CRUISE OFF”. In this case, the preset speed data is cleared,
and you must set the speed from the beginning.
421
STARTING AND DRIVING
In the following cases, the preset speed automatically
cancels out:
a. The vehicle speed falls below about 40km/h (25 mph).
b. If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 mph) below the
preset speed, the preset speed will also automatically be
cancelled.
c. The control lever is pressed downward in the “– SET”
direction and held at less than about 45 km/h (28 mph). (45
km/h (28 mph) is designated as a lower preset speed limit .)
If the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the
preset speed data is cleared and you must set the speed from
the beginning.
If cancelled by the above cases, the multi−information display
shows nothing and the conventional cruise control enters the
ready mode.
If the preset speed automatically cancels out for other than the
above reasons, do not operate the cruise control. Although it
is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked
by your Lexus dealer at the earliest opportunity.
422
3
Resetting to a faster speed
Press the control lever upward in the “+ RES” direction and
hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained.
While the lever is held upward, the vehicle will gradually gain
speed.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the
set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be
increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control
lever upward in the “+ RES” direction quickly within 0.6
seconds.
A quicker way to reset the speed is to accelerate and then
press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction.
STARTING AND DRIVING
4
Resetting to a slower speed
Press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction and
hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained.
While the lever is held downward, the vehicle speed will
gradually decrease.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the
set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be
lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control
lever downward in the “– SET” direction quickly within 0.6
seconds.
A quicker way to reset the preset speed is to depress the brake
pedal and then press the control lever downward in the “– SET”
direction.
Even if you downshift the transmission from the “D” or “6” (sixth
range) to “5” (fifth range), or from “D” or “5” (fifth range) to “4”
(fourth range) in the conventional cruise control mode, engine
braking will not be applied because this mode is not cancelled.
To slow down, reset the cruise control to a slower speed with
the cruise control lever or depress the brake pedal. If you use
the brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.
5
Resuming the preset speed
If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling the control lever, by
depressing the brake pedal or vehicle stability control
activation, pushing the lever up in the “+ RES” direction will
restore the speed set prior to cancellation. However, once the
vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset
speed will not be resumed.
(c) Conventional cruise control mode failure warning
G13075
If the system malfunction is detected when the
conventional cruise control mode is in the ready mode or
operating, the master warning light comes on, a warning
tone sounds and the above message appears.
If this message appears, push the “ON−OFF” button to turn the
system off and then push it again to turn it on. If the setting still
cannot be made or the same message appears again, the
system might have malfunctioned. Although it is no problem
to continue driving, contact your Lexus dealer.
423
STARTING AND DRIVING
ADAPTIVE VARIABLE SUSPENSION
SYSTEM (GS430 only)
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM
The traction control system automatically helps prevent
the spinning of drive wheels when the vehicle is started or
accelerated on slippery road surfaces.
When the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, the
system automatically turns on.
G31041
1 Sport position
2 Normal position
The adaptive variable suspension system controls the
suspension according to the road and driving conditions.
Selecting an optimum driving mode allows good vehicle
posture and steering wheel operation in conjunction with
variable gear ratio steering system and electric power
steering system.
Sport mode: Suitable for sporty type driving, such as on
winding mountain roads and high speed driving.
Normal mode: Suitable for ordinary driving.
To turn on the sport mode, push the selector switch on the
“SPORT” side. The indicator comes on in the instrument
cluster.
To change to the normal mode, push the switch to the “NORM”
side.
424
CAUTION
Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of
the vehicle and power against drive wheels cannot be
maintained, even though the traction control system is
in operation. Do not drive the vehicle under any speed
or maneuvering conditions which may cause the
vehicle to lose traction control. In situations where the
road surface is covered with ice or snow, your vehicle
should be fitted with snow tires or tire chains. Always
drive at an appropriate and cautious speed for the
present road conditions.
STARTING AND DRIVING
GS300—The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds
when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode.
If the indicator light does not come on when the engine switch
is selected in “IG−ON” mode, contact your Lexus dealer.
G31038
Traction control off mode
(two−wheel drive models only)
Slip indicator light
Leave the system on during the ordinary driving so that it
can operate when needed.
G31008
You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few
seconds just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that
the traction control system is in the self−check mode, but does
not indicate a malfunction.
When the traction control system is operating, the following
conditions occur:
The system controls the spinning of the drive wheels. At this
time, the slip indicator light blinks.
You may feel vibration or noise in your vehicle, caused by
operation of the brakes. This indicates the system is
functioning properly.
GS430—The slip indicator light comes on when the engine
switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. The light goes off when
the engine is started.
If your wheels get stuck in a ditch when you are driving on
a severe off road and sand, turn off the traction control
system. This system that controls engine performance
interferes with the process of freeing your wheels.
To turn off: Push “TRAC OFF” switch.
The slip indicator light will come on.
The vehicle stability control system is always activated even if
the traction control system is turned off.
425
STARTING AND DRIVING
GS430 only—When the vehicle speed exceeds about 50 km/h
(30 mph) even if the traction control system is turned off, the
system turns on automatically.
Traction control system failure warning
To turn on: Push “TRAC OFF” switch once again.
The slip indicator light will go off.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
G31039
The slip indicator light does not come on when the engine
switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode.
The slip indicator light remains on after the engine is started
(GS430), or remains on a few seconds after the engine
switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode (GS300).
The slip indicator light comes on in the normal driving mode
while driving.
1 GS430
2 GS300
If the traction control system malfunctions, the slip
indicator light (two−wheel drive models only) and brake
system warning light (yellow) come on. At this time, the
above message appears. (GS430 only—In some cases,
the multi−information display shows either “CHECK VSC”
or “CHECK ECB*” only.)
*: Electronically Controlled Brake System
If the message appears, the traction control system, vehicle
stability control system and hill−start assist control system do
not work. Although it is no problem to continue driving, have
your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
426
STARTING AND DRIVING
VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL
SYSTEM
The vehicle stability control system helps provide
comprehensive control of the systems such as anti−lock
brake system, traction control, engine control, etc. This
system automatically controls the brakes and engine to
help prevent the vehicle from skidding when cornering on
a slippery road surface or operating steering wheel
abruptly.
The vehicle stability control system is activated when the
vehicle speed is about more than 15 km/h (9 mph).
You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few
seconds just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that
the system is in the self−check mode, but does not indicate a
malfunction.
CAUTION
Do not rely excessively on the vehicle stability
control system. Even if the vehicle stability control
system is operating, you must always drive carefully
and attentively to avoid serious injury. Reckless
driving will result in an accident. If the slip indicator
light blinks, sounding an alarm, special care should
be taken while driving.
Only use tires of specified size.
The size,
manufacturer, brand and tread pattern for all 4 tires
should be the same. If you use the tires other than
specified, or different type or size, the vehicle
stability control system may not function correctly.
When replacing the tires or wheels, contact your
Lexus dealer.
In situations where the road surface is covered with
ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow
tires or tire chains.
427
STARTING AND DRIVING
Vehicle stability control failure warning
G31038
G31039
Slip indicator light
If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator
light blinks and an alarm sounds intermittently. Special care
should be taken while driving.
GS430—The slip indicator light comes on when the engine
switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. The light goes off when
the engine is started.
GS300—The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds
when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode.
If the indicator light does not come on when the engine switch
is selected in “IG−ON” mode, contact your Lexus dealer.
428
1 GS430
2 GS300
If the vehicle stability control system malfunctions, the
slip indicator light (two−wheel drive models only) and
brake system warning light (yellow) come on. At this time,
the above message appears. (GS430 only—In some
cases, the multi−information display shows either
“CHECK VSC” or “CHECK ECB*” only.)
*: Electronically Controlled Brake System
If the message appears, the vehicle stability control system,
traction control system and hill−start assist control system do
not work. Although it is no problem to continue driving, have
your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
STARTING AND DRIVING
HILL−START ASSIST CONTROL
SYSTEM
The hill−start assist control system assists you in starting
to move up a steep or slippery hill. When you start to move
up the hill slope, the system helps to reduce the vehicle’s
rolling backward distance while you move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION
Do not rely excessively on the hill−start assist control
system. The vehicle may not be able to start
smoothly on road surfaces or off−road surfaces such
as extremely steep slopes or icy roads, on which
sliding can occur very easily.
Do not use the hill−start assist control system to stop
the vehicle. This system is not designed for stopping
the vehicle on an uphill slope.
The hill−start assist control system will operate for 5
seconds maximally when all of the following conditions
apply.
When the selector lever is in “D” or “S” position
When the brake pedal is not depressed
The system is designed to operate when the vehicle is starting
on an uphill slope; therefore, if the selector lever is in “P” or “N”,
it will not operate. It will not operate either if the vehicle starts
to move in reverse on a slope with the selector lever in “R”.
When the hill−start assist control system is operating, you may
hear a sound. This indicates the hill−start assist control is
operating normally and does not indicate a malfunction.
G31038
Slip indicator light
When the hill−start assist control system is operating, the slip
indicator light flashes. At the same time, the stop lights and
high mounted stoplight are lit.
429
STARTING AND DRIVING
GS430—The slip indicator light comes on when the engine
switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. The light goes off when
the engine is started.
Hill−start assist control system failure
warning
GS300—The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds
when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode.
If the indicator light does not come on when the engine switch
is selected in “IG−ON” mode, contact your Lexus dealer.
G31039
Keep the following in mind when driving:
The hill−start assist control system operates for 5 seconds
maximally. If both the brake and accelerator pedals remain
undepressed for longer than 5 seconds, the system will
gradually stop operating.
The hill−start assist control system is not designed for
stopping the vehicle on an uphill slope. When stopping the
vehicle, be sure to depress the brake pedal.
1 GS430
2 GS300
If the hill−start assist control system malfunctions, the
slip indicator light (two−wheel drive models only) and
brake system warning light (yellow) come on. At this time,
the above message appears. (GS430 only—In some
cases, the multi−information display shows either
“CHECK VSC” or “CHECK ECB*” only.)
*: Electronically Controlled Brake System
If the message appears, the hill−start assist control system,
vehicle stability control system and traction control system do
not work. Although it is no problem to continue driving, have
your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
430
STARTING AND DRIVING
VARIABLE GEAR RATIO
STEERING SYSTEM
(GS430 only)
While the system is not functioning, a larger degree of wheel
maneuvering is needed during driving at low speed. If the
center position of the steering wheel is changed frequently,
have your vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer.
The variable gear ratio steering system adjusts the wheel
turning angle depending on the vehicle speed and how
much you turn the steering wheel.
CAUTION
The vehicle wheel turning angle will be changed with a smaller
degree of wheel maneuvering when you are driving at very low
speed such as when putting your vehicle into a garage.
When you start or stop the engine, you may hear a small noise
and the steering wheel may move slightly. This is caused when
the system starts or stops, and does not indicate a malfunction.
In the following cases, to prevent the system from overheating,
the system could be temporarily deactivated with the change
in the center position of the steering wheel. This is not a
malfunction. After the cause of the problem is eliminated, the
system will return to normal automatically after a few minutes.
If you continue maneuvering the steering wheel when the
vehicle is stopped or running at very low speed
If you continue driving holding the steering wheel to the
extreme right or left
Take due care especially when driving at low speed as
the vehicle changes direction in greater proportion to
the steering wheel maneuvering.
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery with the steering wheel
turned, or the center position of the steering wheel
could be slightly and temporarily changed. However,
after driving for a short while, the system will return to
normal and the center position of the steering wheel will
be in the appropriate position.
If you disconnect and reconnect the battery terminal, the
system is reset temporarily. However, it is no problem to drive.
Drive for a short while, the system will be set automatically and
return to normal.
If you maneuver the steering wheel immediately after
starting the engine at less than about −30C (−22F)
431
STARTING AND DRIVING
Variable gear ratio steering system failure
warning
G31044
If there is any malfunction in the system, the above message
appears and the master warning light comes on.
If the warning message and light come on while driving, the
system is not working. Although conventional steering
operates when maneuvered, a larger degree of wheel
maneuvering (than at the time when the system is functioning
properly) is needed when driving at low speed. At this time, the
center position of the steering wheel could be changed.
Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle
repaired at your Lexus dealer.
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
INTEGRATED MANAGEMENT
(GS430 only)
Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management (VDIM) helps
manage control for vehicle stability control system,
anti−lock brake system, brake assist system, traction
control system, engine output control, hill−start assist
control system and also manages variable gear ratio
steering system and electric power steering system.
In order to control sudden steering wheel operation and
the sideslip on slippery road surfaces, this system
provides excellent vehicle stability by automatically
controlling the brake, engine output and front wheel
angle.
The state of the tires will affect the performance of the vehicle
dynamics integrated management system. Be sure to check
the following:
Are tires of specified size installed?
Are tires of identical type installed?
Do the tires have stipulated tire pressure?
Are the tires worn?
A problem with the tires or modified suspension systems will
have an adverse effect on the system and may cause a
malfunction, so be careful.
432
STARTING AND DRIVING
When the slip indicator light comes on, and the message
“CHECK ECB*” appears on the multi−information display, the
vehicle dynamics integrated management does not operate.
Have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
*: Electronically Controlled Brake System
In addition, when the master warning light comes on, and the
message “CHECK VGRS” or “CHECK P/S” appears on the
multi−information display, the system will not be temporarily
functioning. Although it is no problem in driving as usual, have
your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
CAUTION
Do not overestimate the vehicle dynamics integrated
management.
Even when this management is
functional, there is a limit to vehicle stability, and
irresponsible driving may lead to an accident. When
driving, you should always pay attention to your speed
and keep a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
BRAKE SYSTEM
GS430:
This brake system has 3 independent hydraulic circuits. If any
circuits should fail, the other will still work. However, the pedal
will be harder to press, and your stopping distance will
increase. Also, the brake system warning light (red) may come
on.
GS300:
The tandem master cylinder brake system is a hydraulic
system with two separate sub−systems. If either sub−system
should fail, the other will still work. However, the pedal will be
harder to press, and your stopping distance will increase. Also,
the brake system warning light (red) may come on.
CAUTION
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake
system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
Brake actuator (GS430)
The brake actuator uses brake fluid pressurized by the pump
to power−assist the brakes. If the brake actuator fails during
driving, the brake system warning light (red) comes on and the
buzzer sounds continuously. In this case, the brakes may not
work properly. If the brake system warning light comes on,
immediately stop your vehicle and contact your Lexus dealer.
433
STARTING AND DRIVING
Any of the following conditions may occur, but does not
indicate a malfunction:
Brake booster (GS300)
The brake system warning light (red) may stay on for about
60 seconds after the engine is started. It is normal if the light
turns off after a while.
The brake booster uses engine vacuum to power−assist the
brakes. If the engine should quit while you are driving, you can
bring the vehicle to a stop with normal pedal pressure. There
is enough reserved vacuum for one or two stops but no more!
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the
brake system warning light (red). It is normal if the light goes
out after a few seconds.
CAUTION
You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment
after the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed
repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake
system.
CAUTION
Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the pedal uses up your reserved brake
fluid pressure.
Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes
will still work. But you will have to push the pedal
hard, much harder than normal. And your braking
distance will increase.
Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the pedal uses up your reserved
vacuum.
Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes
will still work. But you will have to push the pedal
hard, much harder than normal. And your braking
distance will increase.
Anti−lock brake system
The anti−lock brake system is designed to automatically
help prevent lock−up of the wheels during a sudden
braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This assists
in providing directional stability and steering
performance of the vehicle under these circumstances.
Effective way to press the ABS brake pedal: When the
anti−lock brake system function is in action, you may feel the
brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. In this situation, to
let the anti−lock brake system work for you, just hold the
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not pump the brake in a
panic stop. This will result in reduced braking performance.
434
STARTING AND DRIVING
The anti−lock brake system becomes operative after the
vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately
10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle
decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces such as
on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, joints
in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day tends to activate the anti−lock
brake system.
You may hear a click or motor sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or
just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the
anti−lock brake system is in the self−check mode, and does not
indicate a malfunction.
When the anti−lock brake system is activated, the
following conditions may occur. They do not indicate a
malfunction of the system:
You may hear the anti−lock brake system operating and feel
the brake pedal pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle
body and steering wheel. You may also hear the motor
sound in the engine compartment even after the vehicle is
stopped.
At the end of the anti−lock brake system activation, the
brake pedal may move a little forward.
CAUTION
Do not overestimate the anti−lock brake system:
Although the anti−lock brake system assists in
providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive
with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and
safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, because
there are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness
of steering wheel operation even with the anti−lock
brake system on.
If tire grip performance exceeds its capability, or if
hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the
rain, the anti−lock brake system does not provide
vehicle control.
Anti−lock brake system is not designed to shorten the
stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate speed
and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of
you. Compared with vehicles without an anti−lock
brake system, your vehicle may require a longer
stopping distance in the following cases:
Driving on rough, gravel or snow−covered roads.
Driving with tire chains installed.
Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road.
Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or
has other differences in surface height.
435
STARTING AND DRIVING
Install all 4 tires of specified size at appropriate
pressure: The anti−lock brake system detects vehicle
speeds using the speed sensors for respective wheels’
turning speeds. The use of tires other than specified
may fail to detect the accurate turning speed resulting
in a longer stopping distance.
“ABS” warning light
G31080
1 U.S.A.
2 Canada
GS430—The light comes on when the engine switch is
selected in “IG−ON” mode. If the anti−lock brake system and
the brake assist system work properly, the light turns off in a
few seconds after the engine is started.
GS300—The light comes on for a few seconds when the
engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. It indicates the
anti−lock brake system and the brake assist system work
properly.
If either system malfunctions, the light comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on, the anti−lock brake system
and the brake assist system do not operate, but the brake
system still operates conventionally.
436
STARTING AND DRIVING
If any of the following conditions occur, this indicates a
malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by
the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible to service the vehicle.
The light does not come on when engine switch is selected
in “IG−ON” mode.
The light remains on after the engine is started (GS430), or
remains on a few seconds after the engine switch is
selected in “IG−ON” mode (GS300).
The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the
brake system warning light (red), immediately stop your
vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will fail
but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable
during braking.
GS430 only—Either of the following conditions may
occur, but does not indicate a malfunction:
The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the engine
is started. It is normal if it turns off after a while.
Drum−in−disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc type parking brake system.
This type of brake system needs bedding−down of the brake
shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes
and/or drums are replaced.
Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding−down.
Brake assist system
When you slam the brakes on, the brake assist system
judges as an emergency stop and provides more powerful
braking for a driver who cannot hold down the brake pedal
firmly.
When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be
applied. At this time, you may hear a sound in the engine
compartment and feel the vibrations of the brake pedal. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle
has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h
(6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a
speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
The brake assist system may not work for about 60 seconds
after the engine is started.
For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see “ABS”
warning light on page 80 or 436.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the
light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds.
437
STARTING AND DRIVING
BRAKE PAD WEAR LIMIT
INDICATORS
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
SYSTEM
The electric power steering system, using an electric
motor, assists the turning of the steering wheel.
G31006
In the following cases, you may feel the steering becomes
heavy. However, the electric power steering system
warning light does not come on. (Because it is not a
malfunction.)
When maneuvering or turning frequently over a long time, the
power steering effect will be reduced to prevent the system
from overheating. Avoid turning the steering wheel, or stop the
vehicle. The system will become cool in about 10 minutes.
The brake pad wear limit indicators on your disc brakes
give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn to the
extent that replacement is required.
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise while driving, have
the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the
pads are not replaced when needed.
GS430 front brake only—
The high brake performance is achieved by proper wear of
brake pads and discs. As a result, the brake discs may wear
earlier than the ones on the conventional brake system.
When brake pads are replaced, brake disc thickness is
required to be measured.
It is dangerous to continue driving when brake pads and discs
have exceeded the wear limit.
438
NOTICE
Frequent maneuvering and turning over a long time may
cause damage to the system in which the mechanism
prevents overheating of the electric power steering
system.
When the battery is discharged, check the battery’s condition.
If necessary, recharge or replace the battery. For details, see
“Checking battery condition” on page 581.
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
G31040
If the electric power steering system warning light
comes on, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible. In this case, more effort is required
for the steering wheel to turn than usual. Drive your
vehicle while firmly gripping the steering wheel.
Electric power steering system warning light
The light comes on when the engine switch is selected in
“IG−ON” mode. If the electric power steering system works
properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. If the system
has malfunctions, the light comes on again.
If the following conditions occur, this indicates a
malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by
the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible to service the vehicle.
The light does not come on when the engine switch is
selected in “IG−ON” mode or remains on.
The light stays on while you are driving.
439
STARTING AND DRIVING
TIRE PRESSURE WARNING
SYSTEM
The tire pressure warning system warns you that the tire
inflation pressure is low.
The tire pressure warning system is not a substitute for
checking normal tire inflation pressure. Check the tire inflation
pressure with a tire pressure gauge regularly.
CAUTION
The warning system may not activate immediately if
bursts or sudden air leakage should occur.
G31003
Tire pressure warning light
The tire pressure warning light comes on when the engine
switch “IG−ON” mode is selected, and goes off after a few
seconds. This means the tire pressure warning light is
operating properly. If the tire inflation pressure becomes low,
the light comes on again. At this time, the master warning light
comes on and the message “LOW TIRE” appears on the
multi−information display.
In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the
light after a few minutes. If the light blinks, the tire pressure
warning system is not working properly. At this time, the
master warning light comes on and the message “CHECK
SYSTEM” appears on the multi−information display.
440
STARTING AND DRIVING
Display
Indicator
status
Tire pressure
warning light
ON
Multi−
information
display
LOW TIRE
(PRESSURE)
Tire pressure
warning light
Blinking
Multi−
information
display
CHECK
(TIRE
PRESSURE)
SYSTEM
Meanings
Do this
CAUTION
Tire inflation
pressure is
low
Adjust the tire
inflation
pressure
Tire pressure
warning
system
malfunction
Have the
system
checked at
your Lexus
dealer
If the tire pressure warning light comes on, be sure to
observe the following precautions. Failure to do so
could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death
or serious injury.
Vehicles with run−flat tires:
Decelerate to the lowest appropriate speed as soon
as possible. Do not drive over 90 km/h (55 mph).
Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure
immediately.
If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after
tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that
you have a flat tire. Have the tire replaced by the
nearest Lexus dealer.
Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle
tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the
steering wheel or the brakes.
Vehicles with standard tires:
Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.
If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after
tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that
you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat,
change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired
by the nearest Lexus dealer.
Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle
tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the
steering wheel or the brakes.
441
STARTING AND DRIVING
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural
causes such as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure
changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the
tire inflation pressure will turn off the light after a few minutes.
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch should not turn
off the tire pressure warning light. Adjusting the tire inflation
pressure will turn off the light.
The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the warning
light will not turn off even though the flat tire is replaced with the
spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and
adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure
warning light will turn off after a few minutes.
442
CAUTION
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire
and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load
information label), you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS–tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light)
when one or more of your tires is significantly
under−inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under−inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under−inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure, even if under−inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
NOTICE
Do not use liquid sealants for a flat tire as tire
pressure warning valve and transmitter will be
damaged.
When the tires must be repaired or replaced, have
them repaired or replaced by your Lexus dealer or an
authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters will be affected by the
installation or removal of tires.
443
STARTING AND DRIVING
If the tire pressure warning light blinks...
If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is
installed.
If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to a different
tire setting.
G31048
If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular
around the wheels or wheel housings.
If non−genuine Lexus wheels are used.
If tire chains are used.
If the tire inflation pressure is more than 500 kPa (5.1
kgf/cm2 or bar, 73 psi).
If the tire pressure warning light blinks when the engine
switch “IG−ON” mode is selected, the tire pressure
warning system is not working properly.
The system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work
properly.)
If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters are used.
If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters is not registered.
If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave
frequencies are nearby.
If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
444
If the tire pressure warning light blinks frequently when the
engine switch “IG−ON” mode is selected, have it checked by
your Lexus dealer.
Even if you use genuine wheels, the tire pressure warning
system may not work properly with some types of tires.
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch should not turn
off the tire pressure warning light.
STARTING AND DRIVING
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV
technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
445
STARTING AND DRIVING
Replacing tires and wheels
When replacing the tires and wheels, be sure to install tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters. ID codes on the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters are registered on the
tire pressure warning ECU. When replacing a tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID
code of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. Have the
ID code registered by your Lexus dealer.
Tire pressure warning reset switch
G31004a
If the ID code is not registered, the system will not work
properly. After about 1 hour, the tire pressure warning light
blinks to indicate a system malfunction.
NOTICE
When the tires or tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must be replaced, have them replaced by
your Lexus dealer. The tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters will be affected by the installation or
removal of tires.
When initializing the system, the present tire inflation pressure
is stored as standard. The tire pressure warning system
determines decreased air pressure by comparing the present
and the standard tire inflation pressures. When you change
the set tire inflation pressure, it is necessary to initialize the tire
pressure warning system.
When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and
rear tire inflation pressures.
When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing
traveling speed or load weight, etc.
When changing the tire size.
446
STARTING AND DRIVING
To initialize the system, perform the following:
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place and select the engine switch
in “OFF” mode.
2. Adjust the pressure of all the installed tires to the specified
cold tire inflation pressure level. (See “Tire and wheels” on
pages 542 and 546.)
G31007
3. Select the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode.
4. Push and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until
the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly three times and the
message “PRESSURE INITIAL” appears on the
multi−information display.
5. Wait for a few minutes with the engine switch in “IG−ON”
mode, and then select the engine switch in “OFF” position.
If you push the tire pressure reset switch while the vehicle is
moving, initialization is not performed.
If you push the tire pressure reset switch accidentally and
initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the specified level and initialize the system again.
If the tire pressure warning light does not blink slowly three
times and the message “PRESSURE INITIAL” does not
appear on the multi−information display when you push and
hold the reset switch, initialization has failed and the tire
pressure warning system may not work properly. In this case,
initialize the system again. If initialization cannot be
performed, have the system checked at your Lexus dealer.
447
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
Do not push the reset switch without first adjusting the
tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise,
the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if
the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when
the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
Tire pressure warning select switch
G31005a
1 Main position
2 2nd position
2 sets of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes
can be registered.
Once a second set of tires is registered at “2nd”, you can switch
between tire set settings simply by pressing the tire pressure
warning select switch.
There are 2 settings
“MAIN” position: The ID code of the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter on the tires originally installed on the vehicle is
registered.
“ 2nd ” position: The code is not registered. When you replace
a new set of tires, purchase tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters from your Lexus dealer and have the new ID code
registered by your Lexus dealer.
448
STARTING AND DRIVING
If the tire pressure select switch is set to the wrong tire setting,
the system will not work properly. After about 1 hour, the tire
pressure warning light blinks to indicate a system malfunction.
PRE−COLLISION SYSTEM
(Vehicles with dynamic radar cruise control)
When the pre−collision system detects what it perceives
to be an unavoidable collision, the front seat belts are
quickly drawn back by the retractors (pre−collision seat
belts) and more powerful braking is applied according to
the amount of pedal depression to help reduce injury to
the occupants and damage to the vehicle body. In
addition, the adaptive variable suspension works to help
regulate the vehicle not to pitch forward so much.
The pre−collision system will operate when the engine switch
is selected in “IG−ON” mode.
449
STARTING AND DRIVING
Pre−collision sensor
The millimeter wave radar sensor detects vehicles or
objects near or on the road your vehicle is traveling and
determines the possibility of a collision based on the
object position, vehicle speeds and the course you are
traveling.
The pre−collision sensor will operate when the vehicle speed
is about 5 km/h (3 mph) or over.
G31019a
CAUTION
To ensure that pre−collision system will function
properly while driving, observe the following. Failure to
follow these instructions could reduce the
effectiveness of the pre−collision system in case of
vehicle accident:
Always keep the millimeter wave radar sensor and
grille cover clean. When cleaning, use a soft cloth
and be careful not to damage the sensor and grille
cover.
Avoid strong impacts around the millimeter wave
radar sensor. An incorrect millimeter wave radar
sensor alignment will result in system malfunction.
A special device is required to adjust the millimeter
wave radar sensor alignment. Be sure to have the
sensor adjusted by your Lexus dealer.
Do not disassemble the millimeter wave radar
sensor.
1 Millimeter wave grille cover
2 Millimeter wave radar sensor
Do not affix a sticker (including a transparent sticker)
or attach an accessory around the millimeter radar
sensor or the grille cover.
The millimeter wave radar sensor is installed in the front grille
of the hood.
Do not modify or paint the grille cover. When
replacing the grille cover, be sure to use a genuine
grille cover.
The millimeter wave radar sensor cannot detect plastic objects
such as pylons, and may not detect people, animals, bicycles,
motor cycles, trees, snowbanks, etc. as objects with which
your vehicle may collide.
450
STARTING AND DRIVING
Pre−collision seat belts (Front seat belts only)
Pre−collision brake assist system
When the pre−collision sensor detects an object or
vehicle with which your vehicle might collide and
determines that a collision may be unavoidable, the seat
belts are quickly drawn back by the retractors to enhance
the effects of the seat belt pretensioners. The
pre−collision seat belts also work as well when hard
braking.
When the pre−collision sensor detects an object or
vehicle with which your vehicle might collide, and
determines that a collision may be unavoidable,
depressing the brake pedal provides more powerful
braking according to the amount of pedal depression.
The pre−collision seat belts will operate in the following
conditions:
When the vehicle speed is about 30 km/h (18 mph) or over.
When the approaching speed in regard to the object or the
vehicle exceeds about 30 km/h (18 mph).
When the front seat occupants wear the seat belts.
In the following conditions, the seat belts are quickly drawn
back by the retractors regardless of the possibility of the
collision:
When the vehicle is spinning or cannot take a turn properly
at more than about 15 km/h (10 mph).
The pre−collision brake assist system will operate when the
following all conditions are met.
When the brake pedal is depressed.
When the approaching speed in regard to the object or the
vehicle exceeds about 30 km/h (18 mph).
If the brake pedal is kept depressed before the sensor’s
determination of unavoidable collision, the pre−collision brake
assist system will operate soon after the sensor ’s
determination.
451
STARTING AND DRIVING
Adaptive variable suspension control (GS430
only)
Pre−collision system failure warning
When the pre−collision sensor detects an object or
vehicle with which your vehicle may collide, and
determines that a collision may be unavoidable, the
adaptive variable suspension adjusts the damping effect
on the shock absorbers and regulates the vehicle not to
pitch forward so much.
G31079
The adaptive variable suspension will operate when the
following all conditions are met.
When the vehicle speed is about 5 km/h (3 mph) or over.
When the approaching speed in regard to the object or the
vehicle exceeds about 30 km/h (18 mph).
Pre−collision system warning light
The light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the
pre−collision system.
The light comes on when the engine switch is selected in
“IG−ON” mode. If the system works properly, the light goes off
after a few seconds.
If the light does not come on when the engine switch is selected
in “IG−ON” mode, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus
dealer.
If the system has a problem, the pre−collision system warning
light comes on or blinks. At this time, the master warning light
comes on, a warning tone sounds, and either of the following
messages appears on the multi−information display.
PCS DISABLED NOW
CHECK PCS
452
STARTING AND DRIVING
Precaution for pre−collision system
G13030
The pre−collision system warning light blinks, and the
above message appears in the following conditions:
The millimeter wave radar sensor or the grille cover is
dirty.
Clean the grille or sensor with a soft cloth to remove the dirt.
The pre−collision seat belts are activated repeatedly for
a short time.
The system turns off temporarily for overheating protection.
The above conditions do not indicate a malfunction. If the
problem is removed, the warning lights and message go out
and the system returns to normal.
G13031
It should be noted that the pre−collision sensor may detect the
following as the objects with which your vehicle might collide,
and the pre−collision system may operate, even though there
is no possibility of collision.
When traveling through a curve, there is an object on the
edge of the road.
When traveling through a curve, another vehicle is passing
from the opposite direction.
When traveling across a narrow iron bridge.
When there is a metallic object on the road.
When there is a steel plate on the road at a construction site.
When there is a bump on the road.
When waiting to turn to the left in an intersection, and
another vehicle is passing from the opposite direction.
If your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead very
quickly.
If the pre−collision system warning light remains on, and the
above message appears, the pre−collision system may not
operate. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to
service the vehicle.
453
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
NOTICE
Do not rely solely on the pre−collision system to
avoid accidents. Your safe and attentive driving
practices are still the best way to avoid accidents and
you are always responsible for the operation of the
vehicle and the safety of your passengers. When
driving, always pay attention to the surrounding
conditions and the course you are driving.
Even if there is no object with which your vehicle may
collide, the pre−collision system may be activated as
follows:
The pre−collision sensor’s collision detection
performance is limited. The sensor is able to detect
a forward object within 10 degrees on either left or
right side. If it is out of the range, or if there is no or
weak millimeter wave reflection, the sensor could not
detect the object and the system does not work
properly.
Even if the pre−collision system is operative in an
unavoidable collision, unless the seat belts are worn
and the brake pedal is depressed, the pre−collision
seat belts and pre−collision brake assist system will
not work.
454
The pre−collision seat belts work to quickly draw
back the front seat belts by the retractors
(pre−collision seat belts).
The pre−collision brake assist system works to apply
more powerful braking than normal braking.
SECTION
3–2
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving tips
Break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for driving in various conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to save fuel and make your vehicle
last longer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo and luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
456
456
456
458
459
460
460
462
463
455
DRIVING TIPS
BREAK−IN PERIOD
Drive gently and avoid high speeds.
You need not follow a break−in schedule with your new Lexus.
But following a few simple tips for the first 1600 km (1000 miles)
can add to the future economy and long life of your vehicle:
Avoid full throttle acceleration when starting and driving.
Avoid racing the engine.
Try to avoid hard stops during the first 300 km (200 miles).
Do not drive for a long time at any single speed, either fast
or slow.
OPERATION IN FOREIGN
COUNTRIES
If you plan to drive your Lexus in another country ...
First, comply with the vehicle registration laws.
Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded
and minimum octane rating).
456
TIPS FOR DRIVING IN VARIOUS
CONDITIONS
Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. This will allow you
much better control.
Drive slowly onto curbs and, if possible, at a right angle.
Avoid driving onto high, sharp−edged objects and other
road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire
damage such as a tire burst.
Drive slowly when passing over bumps or travelling on a
bumpy road. Otherwise, the impact could cause severe
damage to the tires and/or wheels.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels until they touch
the curb so that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the parking
brake, and place the transmission in ”P”. If necessary, block
the wheels.
Washing your vehicle or driving through deep water may get
the brakes wet. To see whether they are wet, check that
there is no traffic near you and then press the pedal lightly.
If you do not feel a normal braking force, the brakes are
probably wet. To dry them, drive the vehicle cautiously while
lightly pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake
applied. If they still do not work safely, pull to the side of the
road and call a Lexus dealer for assistance.
DRIVING TIPS
CAUTION
Before driving off, make sure the parking brake is
fully released and that the parking brake reminder
light is off.
Do not continue normal driving when the brakes are
wet. If they are wet, your vehicle will require a longer
stopping distance, and it may pull to one side when
the brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will
not hold the vehicle securely.
Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the
engine is running.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
It can cause dangerous overheating, needless wear,
and poor fuel economy.
To drive down a long or steep hill, reduce your speed
and downshift. Remember, if you ride the brakes
excessively, they may overheat and not work
properly. See page 366.
Be
careful
when
accelerating,
upshifting,
downshifting or braking on a slippery surface. The
abrupt change in engine speed, such as sudden
acceleration or engine braking, could cause the
vehicle to skid or spin.
Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive
over 140 km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle has
high−speed capability tires. Driving over 140 km/h
(85 mph) may result in tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to
determine whether the tires on your vehicle are
high−speed capability tires or not before driving at
such speeds.
457
DRIVING TIPS
WINTER DRIVING TIPS
Make sure your coolant is properly protected against
freezing.
Only use ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high
quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate, non−amine,
non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid
organic acid technology. (Coolant with long−life hybrid organic
acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and
organic acids.)
Make sure the engine oil viscosity is suitable for the cold
weather.
See page 533 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy
summer oil in your vehicle during winter months may cause
harder starting. If you are not sure about which oil to use, call
your Lexus dealer − they will be pleased to help.
Check the electronic ignition system for loose
connections or obvious damage.
Keep the door locks from freezing.
See “Checking the engine coolant level” on page 534 for
details of coolant type selection.
Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the locks to keep them from
freezing.
For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture
of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. This coolant
provides protection down to about −35C (−31F).
Use a washer fluid containing an antifreeze solution.
For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of
55% coolant and 45% deionized water. This coolant provides
protection down to about −42C (−44F).
NOTICE
This product is available at your Lexus dealer and most auto
parts stores. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how
much to mix with water.
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute
because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
Do not use plain water alone.
458
Check the condition of the battery and cables.
Do not use your parking brake when there is a possibility
it could freeze.
Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of any battery, so it
must be in top shape to provide enough power for winter
starting. Page 581 tells you how to visually inspect the battery.
Your Lexus dealer and most service stations will be pleased to
check the battery charge level.
When parking, put the transmission into ”P” and block the front
wheels. Do not use the parking brake, or snow or water
accumulated in and around the parking brake mechanism may
freeze the parking brake, making it hard to release.
DRIVING TIPS
Keep ice and snow from accumulating under the fenders.
DINGHY TOWING
Ice and snow built up under your fenders can make steering
difficult. During bad winter driving, stop and check under the
fenders occasionally.
Depending on where you are driving, we recommend you
carry some emergency equipment.
Some of the things you might put in the vehicle are tire chains,
window scraper, bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
jumper cables, etc.
G32001
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with four
wheels on the ground) behind a motorhome.
NOTICE
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to your vehicle.
459
DRIVING TIPS
TRAILER TOWING
HOW TO SAVE FUEL AND MAKE
YOUR VEHICLE LAST LONGER
Improving fuel economy is easy − just take it easy. It will help
make your vehicle last longer, too. Here are some specific tips
on how to save money on both fuel and repairs:
G32002
Keep your tires inflated at the correct pressure. Check
the inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a
month. Underinflation causes tire wear and wastes fuel.
Do not carry unneeded weight in your vehicle. Excess
weight puts a heavier load on the engine, causing greater
fuel consumption.
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your
vehicle. Lexus also does not recommend the installation
of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a
wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your Lexus is not
designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch
mounted carriers.
Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Once the engine is
running smoothly, begin driving − but gently. Remember,
however, that on cold winter days this may take a little
longer.
Always keep the automatic transmission selector lever
in the “D” position when engine braking is not required.
Driving with the overdrive off will reduce the fuel economy.
(For details, see “Automatic transmission” on page 359.)
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Avoid jackrabbit starts.
Avoid long engine idling. If you have a long wait and you
are not in traffic, it is better to turn off the engine and start
again later.
Avoid engine over−revving. Use a gear position suitable
for the road on which you are traveling.
460
DRIVING TIPS
Avoid continuous speeding up and slowing down.
Stop−and−go driving wastes fuel.
Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams whenever possible.
Keep your vehicle tuned−up and in top shape. A dirty air
cleaner, improper valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil and
grease, brakes not adjusted, etc. all lower engine
performance and contribute to poor fuel economy. For
longer life of all parts and lower operating costs, keep all
maintenance work on schedule, and if you often drive under
severe conditions, see that your vehicle receives more
frequent maintenance (For scheduled maintenance
information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.)
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal. This causes
premature wear, overheating and poor fuel economy.
CAUTION
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a
steady pace. Try to time the traffic signals so you only need
to stop as little as possible or take advantage of through
streets to avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from
other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also
reduce wear on your brakes.
Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you
drive, the greater the fuel consumption. By reducing your
speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption.
Keep the front wheels in proper alignment. Avoid hitting
the curb and slow down on rough roads. Improper
alignment not only causes faster tire wear but also puts an
extra load on the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.
Never turn off the engine to coast down hills. Your
power steering and brake booster will not function
without the engine running. Also, the emission control
system operates properly only when the engine is
running.
Keep the bottom of your vehicle free from mud, etc.
This not only lessens weight but also helps prevent
corrosion.
461
DRIVING TIPS
VEHICLE LOAD LIMITS
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating
capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. Follow the
load limits shown below. Total load capacity and seating
capacity are also described on the tire and loading
information label. For location of the tire and loading
information label, see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
on page 548.
Total load capacity:
370 kg (815 lb.)
Total load capacity means combined weight of
occupants, cargo and luggage.
Seating capacity:
Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of
occupants whose estimated average weight is 68 kg
(150 lb.) per person. Depending on the weight of each
person, the seating capacity given may exceed the total
load capacity.
NOTICE
Even if the number of occupants are within the
seating capacity, do not exceed the total load
capacity.
462
Towing capacity
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on
the size (weight) and the number of occupants. For
details, see “Capacity and distribution” that follows.
CAUTION
Do not apply the load more than each load limit.
That may cause not only damage to the tires, but
also deterioration to the steering ability and
braking ability, which may cause an accident.
DRIVING TIPS
CARGO AND LUGGAGE
Stowage precautions
When stowing cargo and luggage in the vehicle,
observe the following:
NOTICE
Do not load the vehicle beyond the vehicle
capacity weight specified on the tire and loading
information label.
Put cargo and luggage in the trunk when at all
possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.
Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the
weight as far forward as possible helps maintain
vehicle balance.
For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary
weight.
CAUTION
Do not place anything on the package tray
behind the rear seatback. Such items may be
thrown about and possibly injure people in the
vehicle during sudden braking or an accident.
Do not drive with objects left on top of the
instrument panel. They may interfere with the
driver’s field of view. Or they may move during
sharp vehicle acceleration or turning, and
impair the driver’s control of the vehicle. In an
accident they may injure the vehicle occupants.
463
DRIVING TIPS
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the
occupants.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) – (Total weight
of occupants)
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.
Capacity and distribution
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150
lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
464
DRIVING TIPS
Example on Your Vehicle
32SA03
As shown in the above example, if the number of
occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load
equaling the combined weight of occupants who got on
later must be reduced. In other words, if the increase in
the number of occupants causes the excess of the total
load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo
and luggage load), you have to reduce the cargo and
luggage on your vehicle.
For details about total load capacity, see “Vehicle load
limits” on page 462.
1 Cargo capacity
2 Total load capacity
In case that 2 people with the combined weight of 166 kg
(366 lb.) are riding in your vehicle with the total load
capacity of 370 kg (815 lb.), the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
370 kg – 166 kg = 204 kg.
(815 lb. – 366 lb. = 449 lb.)
CAUTION
Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the
cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do
not apply the load unevenly. That may cause not
only damage to the tire but also deterioration to
the steering ability due to unbalance of the
vehicle, causing an accident.
From this condition, if 3 more passengers with the
combined weight of 176 kg (388 lb.) get on, the available
cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:
204 kg – 176 kg = 28 kg.
(449 lb. – 388 lb. = 61 lb.)
465
DRIVING TIPS
466
SECTION
4
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
In case of an emergency
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot increase engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you have a flat tire (vehicles with run−flat tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you have a flat tire (vehicles with standard tires) . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot shift automatic transmission
selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you lose your keys or lock yourself out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
468
468
473
473
474
476
487
488
496
497
467
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOUR ENGINE STALLS WHILE
DRIVING
If your engine stalls while driving . . .
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move
cautiously off the road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Turn the engine switch off, and try starting the engine again.
If the engine will not start, see ”If your vehicle will not start”.
CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the
brakes and steering will not work, so steering and
braking will be much harder than usual.
IF YOUR VEHICLE WILL NOT
START
(a) Simple checks
Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the
correct starting procedure instructions in ”Operating the
engine switch” on page 348 and that you have sufficient fuel.
Since your vehicle is equipped with the engine immobilizer,
also check whether the other keys will start the engine. If they
work, your electronic key may be broken. Have the key
checked at your Lexus dealer. If none of your keys work, there
may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer. Call your
Lexus dealer. See ”Keys” on page 8.
If the engine is not turning over or is turning over too
slowly −
1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean.
2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch on the interior light.
3. If the light is out, dim or goes out when the starter is cranked,
the battery is discharged. You may try jump starting. See ”(c)
Jump starting” for further instruction.
4. If the engine does not start even after the battery has been
recharged or replaced, see “(d) Starting the engine after a
battery discharge” on page 472.
If the light is O.K., but the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside
Assistance or Customer Service Assistance. (See
”Foreword”.)
468
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
NOTICE
Do not pull− or push−start the vehicle. It may damage
the vehicle or cause a collision when the engine starts.
Also the three−way catalytic converter may overheat
and become a fire hazard.
If the engine turns over at its normal speed but will not
start −
1. The engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking.
See ”(b) Starting a flooded engine” for further instructions.
2. If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer
Service Assistance. (See ”Foreword”.)
(b) Starting a flooded engine
If the engine will not start, your engine may be flooded
because of repeated cranking.
If this happens, push the engine switch while the brake pedal
is depressed with your left foot and the accelerator pedal is
depressed with your right foot. Then the cranking hold function
stops automatically, and you can try starting the engine with
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the engine does not start, wait a few minutes and try again.
If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer
Service Assistance. (See ”Foreword”.)
(c) Jump starting
To avoid serious personal injury and damage to your
vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid
burns, electrical burns, or damaged electronic
components, these instructions must be followed
precisely.
If you are unsure about how to follow this procedure, we
strongly recommend that you seek help from your Lexus
dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance.
(See ”Foreword”.)
CAUTION
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is poisonous
and corrosive. Wear protective safety glasses when
jump starting, and avoid spilling acid on your skin,
clothing, or vehicle.
If you should accidentally get acid on yourself or in
your eyes, remove any contaminated clothing and
flush the affected area with water immediately. Then
get immediate medical attention.
If possible,
continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
en route to the medical office.
The gas normally produced by a battery will explode
if a flame or spark is brought near. Use only
standardized jumper cables and do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
469
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
NOTICE
The battery used for boosting must be 12 V. Do not jump
start unless you are sure that the booster battery is
correct.
G40026
GS430
470
5 Discharged battery
6 Booster battery
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
When boosting, use the battery of matching or higher quality.
Any other battery may be difficult to jump start with.
If jump starting is difficult, charge the battery for several
minutes.
2. If required, remove all the vent plugs from the booster
battery. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the booster battery.
(This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and
burns.)
If the booster battery is an extended maintenance interval
battery, it is not necessary to remove the vent plugs.
G40027
3. If the engine in the vehicle with the booster battery is not
running, start it and let it run for about 5 minutes. During jump
starting, run the engine at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed.
4. Locate positive (+) and negative (−) terminals of each
battery. Connect the jumper cables in the exact order ( 1 2
3 4 ) shown in the illustration.
GS300
5 Discharged battery
6 Booster battery
GS300 only—Before carrying out the following procedure,
remove the engine compartment cover. (See page 512.)
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
1. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, make
sure the vehicles are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary
lights and accessories.
1
Connect a positive (red) jumper cable clamp to the
positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
2
Connect the clamp at the other end of the positive (red)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.
3
Connect a negative (black) cable clamp to the negative
(−) terminal of the booster battery.
4
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative (black)
cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point (such
as shown in the illustration) away from the battery. Do not
connect it to or near any part that moves when the engine
is cranked.
471
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
CAUTION
When making the connections, to avoid serious injury,
do not lean over the battery or accidentally let the
jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the
correct battery terminals or the ground.
5. Charge the discharged battery with the jumper cables
connected for approximately 5 minutes. At this time, run the
engine in the vehicle with the booster battery at about 2000
rpm with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.
6. Start your engine in the normal way. After starting, run it at
about 2000 rpm for several minutes with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.
7. Carefully disconnect the cables in the exact reverse order:
the negative cable and then the positive cable.
Check that the clamp on the jumper cables are tight. Recharge
the discharged battery with the jumper cables connected for
several minutes and restart your engine in the normal way.
If another attempt is not successful, the battery may be
depleted. Have it checked at your Lexus dealer.
(d) Starting the engine after a battery
discharge
In the event that the battery is discharged, the engine may
not restart even after the battery is recharged or replaced.
For safety reasons, the engine may be disabled when
battery voltage is extremely low. If the engine is disabled,
the start system must be normalized.
To normalized the start system:
8. Carefully dispose of the battery cover cloths which may now
contain sulfuric acid.
1. Shift the transmission to the “P” position and set the engine
switch off.
9. If removed, replace all the battery vent plugs.
2. Open and close any of the doors.
The engine may not restart even after battery charging or
replacement. If this happens, see “(d) Starting the engine after
a battery discharge”.
3. Start the engine.
If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent (for
example, lights left on), you should have it checked at your
Lexus dealer.
472
If the first start attempt is not successful...
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU CANNOT INCREASE
ENGINE SPEED
If engine speed does not increase when the accelerator
pedal is depressed, there may be a problem somewhere
in the electronic throttle control system. Move the vehicle
to a safe place by means of creeping and call a Lexus
dealer for assistance:
1. Depress the brake pedal and shift to the “D” position.
2. Gradually release the brake pedal, and the vehicle starts to
move by creeping. After arriving at a safe place, stop the
vehicle and call a Lexus dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
If your engine coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you
hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine has
probably overheated.
When the engine overheats
Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your
emergency flashers. Put the transmission in ”P” and apply the
parking brake.
A: If steam is coming from your engine:
Turn off the engine. Leave the hood closed until there is no sign
of steam or coolant. Your engine could have been seriously
damaged already. Call your Lexus dealer for assistance.
The above method of moving the vehicle is for
emergency.
Use it only for moving minimum
distances to a safe place.
CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal
operation.
To help avoid personal injury, keep the hood closed until
there is no steam. Escaping steam or coolant is sign of
very high pressure.
473
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
B: If no steam is coming from your engine:
Leave the engine running and turn off the air conditioning.
Check the following.
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
(Vehicles with run−flat tires)
Is the cooling fan operating?
Is the coolant in the acceptable range?
Is the engine drive belt O.K.?
CAUTION
G63004
When the engine is running, keep hands and clothing
away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap when the
engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury could
result from scalding hot fluid and steam blown out
under pressure.
If the cooling fan is not operating or the coolant is not in the
acceptable range, turn off the engine and call your Lexus
dealer.
If both conditions are O.K., after the engine coolant
temperature has cooled to normal, continue driving your
vehicle.
If the engine coolant temperature does not cool down, or your
vehicle overheats again, have it checked as soon as possible
by your Lexus dealer.
474
You may continue driving a vehicle with run−flat
tires even if any tire goes flat. It may be able to run
for a maximum of 160 km (100 miles) at a speed
below 90 km/h (55 mph) after the tire pressure
warning light comes on. When you drive your
vehicle after the tire pressure warning light comes
on, the tire must be replaced. Do not use the
repaired tire.
Observe the following precautions and take your vehicle
to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
CAUTION
NOTICE
If the tire pressure warning light comes on, take
your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer or
authorized tire dealer as soon as possible,
observing the following instructions:
Decelerate as soon as possible to the most
appropriate speed that conditions permit. Do
not drive for longer than 160 km (100 miles) or
over 90 km/h (55 mph).
Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneuvering and
braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you
could lose control of the steering wheel or the
brakes, causing death or serious injury.
The warning system may not activate
immediately if bursts or sudden air leakage
should occur.
Do not use liquid sealants for a flat tire as tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters will
be damaged.
Take due care not to go over a curb stone and
be careful of the holes in the road because
deflated tire pressure affects tire cushion
performance.
The wheels, tires, body,
suspension and other components could be
damaged.
Your ground clearance is reduced if the run−flat
tire goes flat so avoid driving over obstacles
and drive slowly on rough, unpaved roads and
speed bumps. Also, do not attempt to go
through an automatic car wash as the vehicle
may get caught, resulting in damage.
When the tires must be repaired and replaced,
have them repaired and replaced by your Lexus
dealer or an authorized tire dealer. The tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters will
be affected by the installation or removal of
tires.
When the tires must be replaced, replace the
grommets for tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters as well.
475
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
(Vehicles with standard tires)
CAUTION
If the tire pressure warning light comes on,
observe the following instructions:
Decelerate as soon as possible to the most
appropriate speed that conditions permit.
Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneuvering and
braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you
could lose control of the steering wheel or the
brakes, causing death or serious injury.
The warning system may not activate
immediately if bursts or sudden air leakage
should occur.
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line.
Move cautiously off the road to a safe place − well away
from the traffic. Avoid stopping on the center divider of
a highway. Park on a level spot with firm ground.
2. Stop the engine and turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission
in ”P”.
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side away
from traffic.
476
5. Read the following instructions thoroughly.
CAUTION
When jacking, be sure to observe the following to
reduce the possibility of personal injury:
Follow jacking instructions.
Do not put any part of your body under a vehicle
supported by a jack. Otherwise, personal injury
may occur.
Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle
is supported by the jack.
Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly
set the parking brake and put the transmission
in ”P”. Block the wheel diagonally opposite to
the one being changed if necessary.
Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack
point. Raising the vehicle with jack improperly
positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow
the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause
personal injury.
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is
supported by the jack alone.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during
wheel changing.
Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the
vehicle.
When raising the vehicle, do not put an object
on or under the jack.
Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove
and change the tire.
Compact spare tire
G40025
NOTICE
Do not use liquid sealants for a flat tire as tire
pressure sensors will be damaged.
Do not continue driving with a deflated tire.
Driving even a short distance can damage a tire
beyond repair.
When the tires must be repaired and replaced,
have them repaired and replaced by your Lexus
dealer or an authorized tire dealer. The tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters will
be affected by the installation or removal of
tires.
When the tires must be replaced, replace the
grommets for tire pressure warning vales and
transmitters as well.
The compact spare tire is designed for temporary
emergency use only.
The compact spare tire is identified by the distinctive
wording “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded into the
side wall of the tire.
To keep the compact spare tire noticeable, do not hide
the wheel by a wheel cover or such.
The compact spare tire saves space in your luggage
compartment, and its lighter weight helps to improve fuel
economy and permits easier installation in case of a flat
tire.
477
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire
pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes
flat, the warning light will not turn off even though the flat
tire is replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire
with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation
pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off
after a few minutes.
The compact spare tire can be used many times, if
necessary. It has tread life of up to 4800 km (3000 miles)
depending on road conditions and your driving habits.
When tread wear indicators appear on the tire, replace
the tire. (See “Checking and replacing tires” on page
563.)
478
CAUTION
The compact spare tire was designed especially
for your Lexus. Do not use it on any other
vehicle.
Do not use more than one compact spare tire at
the same time.
The pressure for the compact spare tire must be
420 kPa (4.3 kgf/cm2, 4.2 bar, 60 psi).
Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph) when driving
with the compact spare tire.
Replace the compact spare tire with the
standard tire as soon as possible.
Avoid
sudden
acceleration,
sudden
deceleration and sharp turns with the compact
spare tire.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
NOTICE
Your ground clearance is reduced when the
compact spare tire is installed so avoid driving
over obstacles and drive slowly on rough,
unpaved roads and speed bumps. Also, do not
attempt to go through an automatic car wash as
the vehicle may get caught, resulting in damage.
Access to spare tire
G40003
1. Pull up the deck board.
479
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
G40004
G40005
2. Lift up the back side of the board and secure the
board by hooking the lever at the top of the trunk lid
opening as shown.
When closing the board, replace the hook also in its
original position as shown.
Make sure the board is secured and does not fall down.
NOTICE
If you close the trunk lid with the board hooked,
the hook may be damaged.
480
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
G40023
1 Wrench
2 Towing eyelet (for emergency towing)
3 Jack handle
4 Screwdriver
5 Spare tire
6 Wrenches
7 Pliers
8 Jack
G40006
1 Joint
2 When removing the jack, turn the joint by hand in
the ”contract” direction until the jack is free.
3
When storing, turn the joint by hand in the
”expand” direction until the jack is firmly secured
to prevent it from flying forward during a collision
or sudden braking.
3. Get the jack, wrench and spare tire.
To prepare yourself for an emergency, you should
familiarize yourself with the use of the jack and each tool,
and their storage locations.
481
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
G40024
To remove the spare tire:
1
Remove the luggage tray.
2
Loosen the bolt and remove it.
When storing the spare tire, place it with the outer side
of the wheel facing up. Then bolt the tire in place and
install the luggage tool box to prevent the tire from flying
forward during a collision or sudden braking.
482
G40007
4. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to
keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.
When blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front of
one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
G40008
G40009
5. Loosen all the wheel nuts.
6. Position the jack at the jack points as shown.
Always loosen the wheel nuts before raising the vehicle.
Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid
surface.
Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to loosen them.
To get maximum leverage, fit the wrench to the nut so
that the handle is on the right side, as shown above.
Grab the wrench near the end of the handle and pull up
on the handle. Be careful that the wrench does not slip
off the nut.
Do not remove the nuts yet − just unscrew them about
one−half turn.
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. The
nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which
could cause a serious accident.
483
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
G40010
7. After making sure no one is in the vehicle, raise it
high enough so that the spare tire can be installed.
Allow for the fact that you need more ground clearance
when putting on the spare tire than when removing the
flat tire.
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle into the jack
(it is a loose fit) and turn it clockwise. As the jack touches
the vehicle and begins to lift, double−check that it is
properly positioned.
CAUTION
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is
supported by the jack alone.
484
G40011
8. Remove the wheel nuts and remove the flat tire.
Lift the flat tire straight off and put it aside.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
G40012
Before putting on the wheel, remove any corrosion on
the mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such.
Installation of wheels without good metal−to−metal
contact at the mounting surface can cause wheel nuts to
loosen and eventually cause a wheel to come off while
driving.
G40013
9. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight.
Align the holes in the wheel with the bolts. Then lift up
the wheel and get at least the top bolt started through its
hole. Wiggle the tire and press it back over the other
bolts.
Reinstall the wheel nuts and tighten them as much as
you can by hand. Press the tire back and see if you can
tighten them more.
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. Doing
so may lead to overtightening the nuts and
damaging the bolts. The nuts may loosen and the
wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious
accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt or nut,
clean it.
485
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
CAUTION
G40014
10. Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the
wheel nuts.
Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the
vehicle.
Use only the wheel nut wrench to tighten the nuts. Do
not use other tools or any additional leverage other than
your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot. Make
sure the wrench is securely engaged over the nut.
Tighten each nut a little at a time in the order shown.
Repeat the process until all the nuts are tight.
486
When lowering the vehicle, make sure all
portions of your body and all other persons
around will not be injured as the vehicle is
lowered to the ground.
Have the wheel nuts tightened with torque
wrench to 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.), as
soon as possible after changing wheels.
Otherwise, the nuts may loosen and the wheels
may fall off, which could cause a serious
accident.
Do not attach a heavily damaged plastic wheel
ornament. It may fly off the wheel and cause
accidents while the vehicle is moving.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
11. After changing the wheel, check the air
pressure of the replaced tire. Stow all the tools, jack
and flat tire securely.
IF YOUR VEHICLE BECOMES
STUCK
If the inflation pressure of the replaced tire is low, drive
slowly to the nearest service station and fill to the correct
pressure.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc.
then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving
it forward and backward.
Do not forget to reinstall the tire valve cap as dirt and
moisture could get into the valve core and possibly
cause air leakage. If the cap is missing, put a new one
on as soon as possible.
This is the same procedure for changing or rotating your
tires.
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure all the tools, jack and
flat tire are securely in place in their storage
location to reduce the possibility of personal
injury during a collision or sudden braking.
Two−wheel drive models—Turn off the traction control
system to become unstuck to allow the tires to spin
enough to remove the vehicle from the obstruction. (For
details, see “Traction control system” on page 424.)
CAUTION
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it
forward and backward if people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the
vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby
people or objects.
487
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
NOTICE
If you rock your vehicle, observe the following
precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and
other parts.
Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting
the selector lever or before the transmission is
completely shifted to forward or reverse gear.
Do not race the engine and avoid spinning the
wheels.
If your vehicle remains stuck after rocking the vehicle
several times, consider other ways such as towing.
IF YOUR VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE
TOWED
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done
by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
In consultation with them, have your vehicle towed using
either (a) or (b).
(a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck
(b) Using a flat bed truck
(c) Never tow with a sling type truck
Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a
Lexus dealer or commercial tow truck service, tow your
vehicle carefully in accordance with the instructions
given in ”(d) Emergency towing” on page 492.
Proper equipment will help ensure that your vehicle is not
damaged while being towed. Commercial operators are
generally aware of the state/provincial and local laws
pertaining to towing.
Your vehicle can be damaged if it is towed incorrectly.
Although most operators know the correct procedure, it is
possible to make a mistake. To avoid damage to your vehicle,
make sure the following precautions are observed. If
necessary, show this page to the tow truck driver.
TOWING PRECAUTIONS:
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by the
state/provincial and local laws. The wheels and axle on the
ground must be in good condition. If they are damaged, use
a towing dolly.
488
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
(a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck
From rear
From front
G40015
G40016
Two−wheel drive models
Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.
Select the engine switch in “ACC” mode.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle with an automatic transmission
from the front with rear wheels on the ground, as this
may cause serious damage to the transmission.
Do not tow in “OFF” mode, as the steering lock
mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front
wheels straight.
When lifting wheels, take care to ensure adequate
ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of
the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumper and/or
underbody of the towed vehicle will be damaged
during towing.
489
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
(b) Using a flat bed truck
G40017
G40055
Four−wheel drive models
Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.
Tie down points
NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle with an automatic transmission
from the rear with front wheels on the ground, as this
may cause serious damage to the transmission.
490
G40056
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
NOTICE
Do not use the rear emergency towing eyelets.
G40057
A Front
B Rear
Tie down angle
G40058
If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed, it should be tied
down at locations A and B as shown above.
If you use chains or wires to tie down your vehicle, the
angles shaded black must be at 45.
G40028
Rear emergency towing eyelets
491
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
(c) Towing with a sling type truck
G40018
NOTICE
Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front
or rear. This may cause body damage.
(d) Emergency towing
G40019
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done
by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an emergency, your
vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing eyelet. Use extreme
caution when towing the vehicle.
To install the front towing eyelet, see “Installing towing eyelet”
on page 495.
NOTICE
Only use specified towing eyelet; otherwise your
vehicle may be damaged.
Never tow a vehicle from the rear with four wheels on
the ground. This may cause serious damage to the
transmission.
492
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the
brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only on hard−surfaced
roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels,
axles, drive train, steering and brakes must all be in good
condition.
CAUTION
Before towing, release the parking brake and put the
transmission in ”N”. The engine switch must be selected in
“ACC” or “IG−ON” mode.
CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the
brakes and steering will not work so steering and
braking will be much harder than usual.
Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid
sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet
and towing cable or chain. The eyelet and towing cable
or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage.
NOTICE
Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use
in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain
to the towing eyelet provided.
493
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Emergency towing eyelet precautions:
Tips for towing a stuck vehicle:
Before emergency towing, check that the eyelet is not
broken or damaged and that the installation bolts are not
loose.
Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady and even force.
The following methods are effective to use when your
vehicle is stuck in the mud, sand or other condition from
which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own
power. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. In
addition, keep away from the vehicles and towing cable or
chain when towing.
To avoid damaging the eyelet, do not pull from the side or
at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.
Remove the sand and soil in the front and the back of the
tires.
Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the eyelet.
Place stones or wood under the tires.
CAUTION
If the emergency towing eyelet is used to get out when
your vehicle becomes stuck in the mud, sand or other
condition from which the vehicle cannot be driven out
under its own power, make sure to observe the
precautions mentioned below. Otherwise, excessive
stress will be put on the eyelet and the towing cable or
chain may break, causing serious injury or damage.
If the towing vehicle can hardly move, do not forcibly
continue the towing. Contact your Lexus dealer or a
commercial tow truck service for assistance.
Tow the vehicle as straight ahead as possible.
Keep away from the vehicle during towing.
494
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
(e) Installing towing eyelet
G40022
G40020
3. Tighten the towing eyelet securely by a wheel nut wrench.
1. Remove the front towing eyelet cover on the front bumper
by using a flathead screwdriver. To protect the bodywork,
place a piece of rag over the cover.
CAUTION
When installing the eyelet on the vehicle, be sure to
tighten the eyelet securely. If the eyelet is loose, it may
come off when being towed and result in death or
serious injury.
G40021
2. Use the towing eyelet in the trunk. Secure it to the hole on
the bumper by turning clockwise. (For the eyelet location, see
page 481.)
495
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU CANNOT SHIFT
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SELECTOR LEVER
G40002
G40001a
2
Insert your finger, the screwdriver or equivalent into the
hole to push down the shift lock override button. You can
shift the selector lever while pushing the button.
For your safety, keep the brake pedal depressed.
If you cannot shift the selector lever, use the shift lock
override button as follows:
1
496
Turn the engine switch off. Make sure the parking brake
is applied. Pry up the cover with a flathead screwdriver
or equivalent.
Be sure to have the system checked by your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS OR
LOCK YOURSELF OUT
You can purchase a new key at your Lexus dealer if you
can give them the key number and electronic key.
Even if you lose only one key, contact your Lexus dealer to
make a new key. If you lose all your electronic keys, you
cannot make new keys; the whole engine immobilizer must be
replaced.
See the suggestion given in “Keys” on page 8.
You can use the smart access system with push−button start
with the new key. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed
information.
If your keys are locked in the vehicle and you cannot get a
duplicate, many Lexus dealers can still open the door for you,
using their special tools. If you must break a window to get in,
we suggest breaking the smallest side window because it is the
least expensive to replace. Be extremely cautious to avoid
cuts from the glass.
497
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
498
SECTION
5
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . .
500
501
504
505
For scheduled maintenance information, please refer
to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled
Maintenance”.
499
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Your Lexus vehicle has been designed for fewer maintenance
requirements with longer service intervals to save both your
time and money. However, each regular maintenance as well
as day−to−day care is more important than ever before to
ensure smooth, trouble−free, safe, and economical driving.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance” are those
required to be serviced at regular intervals.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified
maintenance, including general maintenance services, is
performed. Note that both the new vehicle and emission
control system warranties specify that proper maintenance
and care must be performed. See “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for complete
warranty information.
It is recommended that only genuine Lexus parts be used
for maintenance or for the repair of the emission control
system.
General maintenance
General maintenance items are those day−to−day care
practices that are important to your vehicle for proper
operation. It is the owner’s responsibility to ensure that the
general maintenance items are performed regularly.
These checks or inspections can be done either by yourself or
your Lexus dealer.
500
Scheduled maintenance
For details of your maintenance schedule, read the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.
The owner may elect to use non−Lexus supplied parts for
replacement purposes without invalidating the emission
control system warranty. However, use of replacement
parts which are not of equivalent quality may impair the
effectiveness of the emission control systems.
You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or
repair of the emission control devices and system
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual without invalidating this warranty. See
“Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or
“Warranty Booklet” for complete warranty information.
MAINTENANCE
Where to go for service?
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Lexus technicians are well−trained specialists and are kept up
to date with the latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips, and in−dealership training programs.
They are well informed about the operation of all the systems
on your vehicle.
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be
performed at the intervals specified. It is recommended that
any problem you notice be brought to the attention of your
Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for their advice.
You can be confident that your Lexus dealer’s service
department performs the best job to meet the maintenance
requirements of your vehicle.
CAUTION
Your copy of the repair order is proof that all required
maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. If
any problems should arise with your vehicle while under
warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it. Again,
be sure to keep a copy of the repair order for any service
performed on your Lexus.
What about do−it−yourself maintenance?
Many of the maintenance items are easy to do yourself, if you
have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive
tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are
presented in Section 6.
If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechanic, the Lexus service
manuals are recommended. Please be aware that
do−it−yourself maintenance can affect your warranty
coverage. See “Owner ’s Guide”, “Owner ’s Manual
Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for the details.
Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you
run the engine.
Engine compartment
Items listed below should be checked from time to time,
e.g. each time when refueling.
Washer fluid
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the tank. See page 589 for
additional information.
Engine coolant level
Make sure the coolant level is between the Upper and Lower
lines on the see−through reservoir when the engine is cold.
See page 534 for additional information.
Radiator, condenser and hoses
Check that the front of the radiator and condenser are clean
and not blocked with leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 536 for
additional information.
501
MAINTENANCE
Battery
Vehicle interior
Your Lexus has a maintenance free battery. You do not have
to add distilled water. For longer life of the battery, however,
see page 581 for additional information.
Items listed below should be checked regularly, e.g. while
performing periodic services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Brake fluid level
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct. See page 547 for
additional information.
Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off and
the vehicle parked on a level spot. See page 530 for additional
information.
Exhaust system
If you notice any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell
exhaust fumes, have the cause located and corrected
immediately. (See “Engine exhaust caution” on page 347.)
Lights
Make sure the headlight, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal
lights, and other lights are working. Check headlight aim.
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers
Check that all service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers function properly.
Steering wheel
Check that it has the specified free play. Be alert for changes
in steering condition, such as hard steering, excessive free
play or strange noise.
Seats
Check that all front seat controls such as seat adjusters,
seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly. Check that the head
restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold
securely in any latched position.
Seat belts
Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors
and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the
belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
502
MAINTENANCE
Accelerator pedal
Fluid leaks
Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort
or catching.
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after
the vehicle has been parked for a while. If you smell fuel fumes
or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected
immediately.
Brake pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and the proper
clearance and free play. Check the brake booster function.
Doors and engine hood
In a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side
when applied.
Check that all doors, including trunk lid, operate smoothly and
all latches lock securely. Make sure the engine hood
secondary latch secures the hood when the primary latch is
released.
Parking brake
Tire inflation pressure
Check that the pedal has the proper travel and that, on a safe
incline, your vehicle is held securely with only the parking
brake applied.
Check the tire inflation pressure with a gauge every two
weeks, or at least once a month and adjust as shown on
the tire and loading information label. See page 548 for
additional information.
Brakes
Automatic transmission ”Park” mechanism
On a safe incline, check that your vehicle is held securely with
the selector lever in ”P” position and all brakes released.
Vehicle exterior
Items listed below should be performed from time to time,
unless otherwise specified.
Wheel nuts
When checking the tires, make sure to check the nuts for
looseness. Tighten them if necessary.
Tire surface
Check the tires carefully for cuts, damage or excessive
wear. See page 563 for additional information.
Tire rotation
Rotate the tires according to the maintenance schedule.
(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to
the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled
Maintenance”.) See page 563 for additional information.
503
MAINTENANCE
DOES YOUR VEHICLE NEED
REPAIRING?
Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and
visual tip−offs that indicate service is needed. Some important
clues are:
Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
Appreciable loss of power
Strange engine noises
A fluid leak under the vehicle (however, water dripping from
the air conditioning after use is normal.)
Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous
carbon monoxide leak. Drive with the windows open and
have the exhaust system checked immediately.)
Flat−looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering,
uneven tire wear
Vehicle pulls to one side when driving straight on a level
road
Strange noises related to suspension movement
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal,
pedal almost touches floors, vehicle pulls to one side when
braking
Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal
If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible. It probably needs adjustment or
repair.
504
CAUTION
Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It
could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly
personal injury.
MAINTENANCE
EMISSION INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE (I/M) PROGRAMS
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs
which include OBD (On−Board Diagnostics) checks.
The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission
control system. When the OBD system determines that a
problem exists somewhere in the emission control system, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. In this case, your vehicle
may not pass the I/M test and need to be repaired. Contact
your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.
Even if the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, your
vehicle may not pass the I/M test as readiness codes have not
been set in the OBD system.
Readiness codes are automatically set during ordinary driving.
However, when the battery is disconnected or run down, the
codes are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the
codes may not be completely set.
Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had come on recently
due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap,
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several
driving trips, but the error code in the OBD system will not be
cleared unless about 40 trips or more are taken.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test and the malfunction
indicator lamp does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer to
prepare the vehicle for re−testing.
505
MAINTENANCE
506
SECTION
6–1
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Introduction
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment overview (GS430) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment overview (GS300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do−it−yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
508
509
510
511
513
515
516
507
INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
G61008
G61001
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also on the
Certification Label.
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal
identifier for your vehicle. This number is on the left top
of the instrument panel and can be seen through the
windshield from outside.
This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
G61009
GS430
GS300
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as
shown.
508
INTRODUCTION
THEFT PREVENTION LABELS
(U.S.A.ONLY)
61l067a
Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are
approximately 47 mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).
The purpose of these labels is to reduce the incidence of
vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts
from stolen vehicles. The label is designed so that once it is
applied to a surface, any attempt to remove it will result in
destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring these labels
intact from one part to another will be impossible.
NOTICE
You should not attempt to remove the theft prevention
labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws.
509
INTRODUCTION
ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW (GS430)
G61002
510
1
Engine oil filler cap
2
Engine oil level
dipstick
3
Brake fluid reservoir
4
Fuse box
5
Washer fluid tank
6
Engine coolant
reservoir
7
Electric cooling fans
8
Condenser
9
Radiator
10
Fuse box
11
Battery
INTRODUCTION
ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW (GS300)
G61003
1
Engine oil level
dipstick
2
Engine oil filler cap
3
Brake fluid reservoir
4
Fuse box
5
Washer fluid tank
6
Engine coolant
reservoir
7
Electric cooling fans
8
Condenser
9
Radiator
10
Fuse box
11
Battery
511
INTRODUCTION
Removing the engine compartment cover
Before checking and replacing the blade type fuses, etc.
in the engine compartment, remove the engine
compartment cover as follows:
CAUTION
Be sure to turn off the engine before removing the
engine compartment cover. Failure to do so may result
in burns from heated components or serious injury
through becoming caught in moving parts.
You must remove the front cover before removing the side
covers. The location of the plastic clips is the same for all
engine models.
G61004
512
1
Turn the plastic screw until it turns freely. Although it is
turned freely, it cannot be removed from the engine
compartment cover.
2
Push the core of the clips and remove the clips.
Remove the cover. Be careful not to lose the removed plastic
clips.
INTRODUCTION
After checking the items, install the engine compartment
covers and insert the plastic clips in their original
positions.
1
When inserting the plastic screw, push it in.
DO−IT−YOURSELF SERVICE
PRECAUTIONS
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the
correct procedure given in this Section.
You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing
may result in operating problems.
G61005
Performing do−it−yourself maintenance during the warranty
period may affect your warranty coverage. Read the separate
Lexus Warranty statement for details and suggestions.
This Section gives instructions only for those items that are
relatively easy for an owner to perform. As explained in
Section 5, there are still a number of items that must be
performed by a qualified technician with special tools.
2
When inserting the clips, do as shown above.
NOTICE
After install the engine compartment cover, make sure
the cover is securely in its original position.
For information on tools and parts for do−it−yourself
maintenance, see ”Parts and tools” on page 516.
Utmost care should be taken when working on your vehicle to
prevent accidental injury. Here are a few precautions that you
should be especially careful to observe:
513
INTRODUCTION
CAUTION
NOTICE
When the engine is running, keep hands, clothing,
and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive
belt.
(Removing rings, watches, and ties is
advisable.)
Remember that battery and ignition cables carry high
currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally
causing a short circuit.
Right after driving, the engine compartment − the
engine, radiator and exhaust manifold, etc. − will be
hot. So be careful not to touch them. Oil and other
fluids may also be hot.
Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as
paper or rags, in the engine compartment.
Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames
around fuel or the battery.
Their fumes are
flammable.
Do not get under your vehicle with just the body jack
supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or
other solid supports.
Be sure the engine switch is off if you work near the
electric cooling fan or radiator grille. With the engine
switch on, the electric cooling fan may automatically
start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or if the
coolant temperature is high.
Use eye protection whenever you work on or under
your vehicle where you may be exposed to flying or
falling material, fluid spray, etc.
Be extremely cautious when working on the battery.
It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
514
Add only ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar
high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate,
non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with
long−life hybrid organic acid technology to fill the
radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a
mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water (for
the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45% deionized water
(for Canada).
If you spill some of the coolant, be sure to wash it off
with water to prevent it from damaging the parts or
paint.
Before closing the engine hood, check to see that you
have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc.
Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, or
excessive engine wear could result. Also backfiring
could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
Be careful not to scratch the glass surface with the
wiper frame.
INTRODUCTION
POSITIONING THE JACK
CAUTION
When jacking, be sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of personal injury:
Follow jacking instructions.
G61006
Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle
supported by the jack. Personal injury may occur.
Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is
supported by the jack.
Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the
parking brake and put the transmission in “P” position.
Front
Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned
will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall
off the jack and cause personal injury.
G61007
Rear
When jacking up your vehicle with the jack, position the
jack correctly as shown in the illustrations.
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone; use vehicle support stands.
Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle.
When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on
top of or underneath the jack.
NOTICE
Make sure to place the jack correctly, or your vehicle
may be damaged.
515
INTRODUCTION
PARTS AND TOOLS
Here is a list of parts and tools you will need to perform
do−it−yourself maintenance. Remember all Lexus parts are
designed in metric sizes, so your tools must be metric.
Parts (if level is low):
Checking the engine oil level
Funnel (only for adding fluid)
Parts (if level is low):
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil. For recommended
oil viscosity, see page 533.
FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Tools:
Checking battery condition
Tools:
Warm water
Tools:
Baking soda
Rag or paper towel
Grease
Funnel (only for adding oil)
Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
Checking the engine coolant level
Checking and replacing the blade type fuses
Parts (if level is low):
Parts (if replacement is necessary):
”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality
ethylene glycol based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,
and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid
technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50%
coolant and 50% deionized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55% of
coolant and 45% deionized water (for Canada).
Fuse with same amperage rating as original
Tools:
Funnel (only for adding coolant)
516
Checking brake fluid
Checking the cartridge type fuses
Parts (if replacement is necessary):
Genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent with same amperage
rating as original
INTRODUCTION
Adding washer fluid
Parts:
Water
Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
Tools:
Funnel
517
INTRODUCTION
518
SECTION
6–2
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
Specifications (GS430) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications (GS300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Used engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
520
523
526
528
528
530
530
534
536
537
519
ENGINE
SPECIFICATIONS (GS430)
– GENERAL
Model
4.3 L V8 (3UZ−FE)
Type
8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
91.0 X 82.5 mm (3.58 X 3.25 in.)
Displacement
4293 cm3 (262.0 cu.in.)
Valve clearance (engine cold)
Intake
Exhaust
0.15 − 0.25 mm (0.006 − 0.010 in.)
0.25 − 0.35 mm (0.010 − 0.014 in.)
Drive belt tension
Automatic adjustment
– FUEL
520
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating
91 (Research octane number 96) or higher
ENGINE
– LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Oil capacity
Drain and refill
with filter
without filter
5.1 L (5.4 qt., 4.5 lmp.qt.)
4.5 L (4.8 qt., 4.0 lmp.qt.)
Oil grade
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity
5W−30
62L042
Outside temperature
NOTE:
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the above grade and viscosity. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
521
ENGINE
– COOLING SYSTEM
Capacity
10.1 L (10.7 qt., 8.9 lmp.qt.)
Coolant type
”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant
with long−life hybrid organic acid technology (Coolant with long−life
hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and
organic acids.)
Do not use plain water alone.
NOTE:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is used in your Lexus vehicle at factory fill. In order to avoid technical problems, only use ”Toyota
Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant
with long−life hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.) Do not use plain water alone. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
– IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plug
– Make
DENSO
NGK
– Gap
SK20R11
IFR6A11
1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
– ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery – Open voltage at 20C (68F):
– Charging rates
522
12.7V Fully charged
12.3V Half charged
11.9V Discharged
[Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the engine switch is off with all
the lights turned off]
5A max.
ENGINE
SPECIFICATIONS (GS300)
– GENERAL
Model
3.0 L V6 (3GR−FSE)
Type
6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
87.5 X 83.0 mm (3.44 X 3.26 in.)
Displacement
2995 cm3 (182.75 cu.in.)
Valve clearance (engine cold)
Intake
Exhaust
Automatic adjustment
Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension
Automatic adjustment
– FUEL
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating
91 (Research octane number 96) or higher
523
ENGINE
– LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Oil capacity
Drain and refill
Two−wheel drive models
with filter
without filter
Four−wheel drive models
with filter
without filter
6.3 L (6.6 qt., 5.5 lmp.qt.)
5.9 L (6.2 qt., 5.1 lmp.qt.)
Oil grade
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity
5W−30
6.4 L (6.7 qt., 5.6 lmp.qt.)
6.0 L (6.3 qt., 5.2 lmp.qt.)
62L042
Outside temperature
NOTE:
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the above grade and viscosity. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
524
ENGINE
– COOLING SYSTEM
Capacity
9.1 L (9.6 qt., 8.0 lmp.qt.)
Coolant type
”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant
with long−life hybrid organic acid technology (Coolant with long−life
hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and
organic acids.)
Do not use plain water alone.
NOTE:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is used in your Lexus vehicle at factory fill. In order to avoid technical problems, only use ”Toyota
Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant
with long−life hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.) Do not use plain water alone. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
– IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plug
– Make
DENSO
NGK
– Gap
FK20HBR11
ILFR6D11T
1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
– ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery – Open voltage at 20C (68F):
– Charging rates
12.7V Fully charged
12.3V Half charged
11.9V Discharged
[Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the engine switch is off with all
the lights turned off]
5A max.
525
ENGINE
FUEL
Fuel type
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
To help prevent gas station mixups, your Lexus has a smaller
fuel tank opening. The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded
fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with
leaded gas will not.
At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the
specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB
3.5−M93 in Canada.
Use of unleaded fuel with an octane number or rating lower
than stated above will cause persistent heavy knocking. If
severe, this will lead to engine damage.
If your engine knocks ...
If you detect heavy knocking even when using the
recommended fuel, or if you hear steady knocking while
holding a steady speed on level roads, consult your Lexus
dealer.
However, occasionally, you may notice light knocking for a
short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal
and there is no need for concern.
Gasoline containing detergent additives
NOTICE
Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of leaded gasoline will
cause the three−way catalytic converter to lose its
effectiveness and the emission control system to
function improperly.
Also, this can increase
maintenance costs.
Octane rating
Premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91
(Research Octane Number 96) or higher required for
optimum engine performance. However, if such premium
type cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline
with an Octane Rating as low as 87 (Research Octane
Number 91).
526
Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains
detergent additives to avoid build−up of engine deposits.
However, all gasoline sold in the U.S. contains detergent
additives to keep clean and/or clean intake systems.
Quality gasoline
Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., Europe and Japan
have developed a specification for quality fuel named
World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be
applied world wide. The WWFC consists of four
categories that depend on required emission levels. In the
U.S., category 3 has been adopted. The WWFC improves
air quality by providing for better emissions in vehicle
fleets, and customer satisfaction through better vehicle
performance.
ENGINE
Cleaner burning gasoline
Gasoline quality
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated
gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE is available in many areas.
In a very few cases, you may experience driveability problems
caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you
continue to have unacceptable driveability, try changing
gasoline brands. If this does not rectify your problem, then
consult your Lexus dealer.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and
appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of
gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce
vehicle emissions, and improve air quality.
Oxygenates in gasoline
Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline
where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
MTBE. If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has
an octane rating no lower than 87.
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing
methanol.
NOTICE
Do not use gasohol other than stated above. It will
cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
If drivability problems are encountered (poor hot
starting, vaporizing, engine knock, etc.), discontinue
its use.
Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling.
Gasohol may cause paint damage.
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive
called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl).
Fuel tank capacity
71 L (18.7 gal., 15.6 lmp.gal.)
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains
MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control
system may be adversely affected. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens,
contact your Lexus dealer for service.
527
ENGINE
FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SYSTEM
The fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the
engine to minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine
stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision. To restart the engine
after the fuel pump shut off system activates, turn the engine
switch off once and start it.
CAUTION
Inspect the ground under the vehicle before restarting
the engine. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the
ground, it is the fuel system that has been damaged and
it is in need of repair. In this case, do not restart the
engine.
FACTS ABOUT ENGINE OIL
CONSUMPTION
Functions of engine oil
Engine oil has the primary function of lubricating and cooling
the inside of the engine, and plays a major role in maintaining
the engine in proper working order.
Engine oil consumption
It is normal that an engine should consume some engine
oil during normal engine operation. The causes of oil
consumption in a normal engine are as follows.
Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders.
A thin film of oil is left on the cylinder wall when a piston
moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure
generated when the vehicle is decelerating sucks some of
this oil into the combustion chamber. This oil as well as
some part of the oil film left on the cylinder wall is burned by
the high temperature combustion gases during the
combustion process.
Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of the intake valves.
Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber
together with the intake air and is burned along with the fuel.
High temperature exhaust gases also burn the oil used to
lubricate the exhaust valve stems.
528
ENGINE
The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the
viscosity of the oil, the quality of the oil and the way the
vehicle is driven.
More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high
speeds and frequent acceleration and deceleration.
A new engine consumes more oil, since its pistons, piston rings
and cylinder walls have not become conditioned.
Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km (1.1 qt./600 miles,
0.9 lmp·qt./600 miles).
When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in
mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it
difficult to judge the true level accurately.
For example, if a vehicle is used for repeated short trips and
consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not show
any drop in the oil level at all, even after 1000 km (600 miles)
or more. This is because the oil is gradually becoming diluted
with fuel or moisture, making it appear that the oil level has not
changed.
Importance of engine oil level check
One of the most important points in proper vehicle
maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so
that oil function will not be impaired. Therefore, it is essential
that the oil level be checked regularly. Lexus recommends that
the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle.
NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly could lead to
serious engine trouble due to insufficient oil.
For detailed information on oil level check, see ”Checking the
engine oil level” on page 530.
The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle is then
driven at high speeds, as on an expressway, making it appear
that oil is excessively consumed after driving at high speeds.
529
ENGINE
USED ENGINE OIL
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CAUTION
Used engine oil contains potentially harmful
contaminants which may cause skin disorders such
as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be
taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact with
it. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
G62025
Do not leave used oil within the reach of children.
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters only in a safe
and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil
and used oil filters in household trash, in sewers or
onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer or a service
station for information concerning recycling or
disposal.
GS430
G62002
GS300
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off,
check the oil level on the dipstick.
530
ENGINE
1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle should be on level
ground. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the
oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under the end and wipe it
clean.
G62006
3. Reinsert the dipstick and push it in as far as it will go, or the
reading will not be correct.
GS430
1 Add oil
2 O.K.
3 Too full
G62005
GS300 (two−wheel drive models)
1 Add oil 2 O.K. 3 Too full
531
ENGINE
G62006
GS300 (four−wheel drive models)
1 Add oil 2 O.K. 3 Too full
4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil level while holding a
rag under the end. If it is between the full level mark ( 5 ) and
the low level mark ( 4 ), it is O.K.
NOTICE
Be careful not to drop engine oil on the vehicle
components.
G62023
GS430
GS300
If the oil level is below or only slightly above the low level
mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the
engine.
Remove the oil filler cap and add engine oil a little at a time,
checking the dipstick. We recommend that you use a funnel
when adding oil. The approximate quantity of oil needed to
raise the level between low and full on the dipstick is indicated
as follows:
1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 lmp. qt.)
For the engine oil capacity, see “Specifications” on pages 520
and 523.
When the level reaches within the correct range, return the
filler cap and turn the cap clockwise until you hear a click.
532
ENGINE
NOTICE
Engine oil selection
Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle
components.
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use
Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to
satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil.
Check the oil level on the dipstick once again after
adding the oil.
Recommended viscosity: 5W−30
62L042
Outside temperature
SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for good fuel economy, and
good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 5W−30 is not available, SAE10W−30 may be used.
However, it should be replaced with 5W−30 at the next oil
change.
533
ENGINE
Oil identification marks
G62035
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil
containers to help you select the oil you should use.
To ensure excellent lubrication for your engine, “Toyota
Genuine Motor Oil” is available, which has been specifically
tested and approved for all Lexus engines.
CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
G62007
GS430
1 Reservoir cap
2 “FULL” line
3 “LOW” line
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details about
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”.
G62008
GS300
1 Reservoir cap
534
2 “FULL” line
3 “LOW” line
ENGINE
Look at the see−through coolant reservoir when the
engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is
between the”FULL” and ”LOW” lines on the reservoir. If
the level is low, add the coolant. (For the coolant type, see
“Coolant type selection” described below.)
The coolant level in the reservoir will vary with engine
temperature. However, if the level is on or below the ”LOW”
line, add coolant. Bring the level up to the ”FULL” line.
If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing,
there may be a leak in the system. Visually check the radiator,
hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap and drain cock
and water pump.
If you can find no leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap
pressure and check for leaks in the cooling system.
Coolant type selection
Use of improper coolants may damage your engine cooling
system.
Only use ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high
quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate, non−amine,
non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid
organic acid technology. (Coolant with long−life hybrid organic
acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and
organic acids.)
For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture
of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. This coolant
provides protection down to about −35C (−31F).
For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of
55% coolant and 45% deionized water. This coolant provides
protection down to about −42C (−44F).
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, do not remove the radiator
cap when the engine is hot.
NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.
535
ENGINE
Lexus recommends “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant,” which
has been tested to ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor
result in malfunction of your engine coolant system with proper
usage. “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is formulated with
long−life hybrid organic acid technology and has been
specifically designed to avoid engine cooling system
malfunction on Lexus vehicles.
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
CHECKING THE RADIATOR AND
CONDENSER
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not
sure of their condition, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself , be careful not to touch the
radiator or condenser when the engine is hot.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the radiator and condenser, do
not perform the work by yourself.
536
ENGINE
SPARK PLUGS
G62009a
62R031c
GS300
Your engine is fitted with the designated iridium−tipped
spark plugs.
GS430
Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped spark plugs.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust
gaps for engine performance or smooth drivability.
Use the designated iridium−tipped spark plugs only. Do
not adjust gaps for engine performance or smooth
drivability.
537
ENGINE
538
SECTION
6–3
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Specifications (GS430) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications (GS300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run−flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
540
544
547
548
551
561
562
563
563
567
569
570
571
539
CHASSIS
SPECIFICATIONS (GS430)
– DIFFERENTIAL
Oil capacity
1.35 L (1.42 qt., 1.19 lmp.qt.)
Oil type and viscosity
Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil
API GL−5 SAE 75W−90 or its equivalent
NOTICE
NOTE:
The following label is affixed on the right side of the
differential carrier. Use the type and viscosity shown on
the label when the differential oil is replaced.
Synthetic oil information label
540
Use of differential oil other than “Toyota Genuine
Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL−5 SAE 75W−90” or its
equivalent may damage the differential gear of your vehicle
and diminish fuel efficiency. For the reasons mentioned
above, Lexus recommends use of “Toyota Genuine
Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL−5 SAE 75W−90”.
Another differential oil of matching quality can also be
used, (but note that despite the similarity in nomenclature
between “Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil
API GL−5 SAE 75W−90” and oils that meet SAE 75W−90
specifications, compliance with the SAE specification
does not guarantee that an oil has all characteristic
required to avoid the problem described above.) If you are
unable to locate an equivalent to “Toyota Genuine
Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL−5 SAE 75W−90”,
contact your Lexus dealer for further details or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
CHASSIS
– AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Fluid capacity
Drain and refill
1.7 L (1.5 qt., 1.8 lmp.qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF Type WS*
*Change automatic transmission fluid only as necessary.
Generally, it is necessary to change automatic transmission
fluid only if your vehicle is driven under one of the Special
Operating Conditions listed in your “Owner ’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. When changing the
automatic transmission fluid, use only “Toyota Genuine ATF
Type WS” (ATF JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuring
optimum transmission performance.
NOTICE
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota
Genuine ATF Type WS” may cause deterioration in shift
quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied
by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic
transmission of your vehicle.
– BRAKES
Pedal clearance *1
73 mm (2.9 in.) Min.
Pedal free play
1.0 − 2.0 mm (0.04 − 0.08 in.)
Brake pad wear limit
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Parking brake lining wear limit
Parking brake adjustment
Fluid type
*2
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
5 − 7 clicks
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*1Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with the force of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf.) with the engine running
*2Parking brake adjustment when depressed with the force of 300 N (30.6 kgf, 67.4 lbf.)
541
CHASSIS
– STEERING
Free play
Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
– TIRES AND WHEELS
Front and rear:
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
542
245/40R18 93Y or P245/40R18 93V
Front 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi)
Rear 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi)
For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 60 kPa
(0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar, 9 psi) to the front tires and rear tires, but
never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure molded
on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
18 x 8 JJ
Wheel nut torque
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.)
CHASSIS
Spare (Vehicles with standard tires only):
Tire size
T155/70D17 110M
Tire inflation pressure
420 kPa (4.3 kgf/cm2, 4.2 bar, 60 psi)
Wheel size
17 x 4T
Wheel nut torque
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.)
NOTE:
For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on page 548 through 570.
543
CHASSIS
SPECIFICATIONS (GS300)
– DIFFERENTIAL
Oil capacity
Two−wheel drive models
Four−wheel drive models
Front
Rear
Oil type and viscosity
1.15 L (1.21 qt., 1.01 lmp.qt.)
0.70 L (0.73 qt., 0.61 lmp.qt.)
1.05 L (1.10 qt., 0.92 lmp.qt.)
Hypoid gear oil API GL−5
Above –18C (0F): SAE 90
Below –18C (0F): SAE 80 or SAE 80W−90
– AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Fluid capacity
Drain and refill
Two−wheel drive models
Four−wheel drive models
1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 lmp.qt.)
2.7 L (2.8 qt., 2.3 lmp.qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF Type WS*
*Change automatic transmission fluid only as necessary.
Generally, it is necessary to change automatic transmission
fluid only if your vehicle is driven under one of the Special
Operating Conditions listed in your “Owner ’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. When changing the
automatic transmission fluid, use only “Toyota Genuine ATF
Type WS” (ATF JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuring
optimum transmission performance.
544
NOTICE
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota
Genuine ATF Type WS” may cause deterioration in shift
quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied
by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic
transmission of your vehicle.
CHASSIS
– BRAKES
Pedal clearance *1
65 mm (2.6 in.) Min.
Pedal free play
1.0 − 2.0 mm (0.04 − 0.08 in.)
Brake pad wear limit
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Parking brake lining wear limit
Parking brake adjustment
Fluid type
*2
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
5 − 7 clicks
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*1Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf.) with the engine running
*2Parking brake adjustment when depressed with the force of 300 N (30.6 kgf, 67.4lbf.)
– STEERING
Free play
Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
545
CHASSIS
– TIRES AND WHEELS
Front and rear:
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
225/50R17 94W or P225/50R17 93V
Front 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi)
Rear 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi)
For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 50 kPa
(0.5 kgf/cm2 or bar, 7 psi) to the front tires and rear tires, but
never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure molded
on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
17 x 7 1/2 JJ
Wheel nut torque
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.)
Spare (Vehicles with standard tires only):
Tire size
T155/70D17 110M
Tire inflation pressure
420 kPa (4.3 kgf/cm2, 4.2 bar, 60 psi)
Wheel size
17 x 4T
Wheel nut torque
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.)
NOTE:
For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on page 548 through 570.
546
CHASSIS
CHECKING BRAKE FLUID
G62010
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the
brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is
high.
If the level is low, take your vehicle to a Lexus dealer as
soon as possible. Do not drive your vehicle if the brake
system warning light (red) is on. Call a Lexus dealer for
assistance.
If the fluid level goes down soon after your vehicle is
serviced, it may indicate a serious mechanical problem.
Have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
GS430
Brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes. If fluid gets on
your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with
clean water immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable
with your hands or eyes, go to the doctor.
G62011
NOTICE
If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle, be sure to wipe it
off to prevent damage to parts or paint.
GS300
To check the fluid level, simply look at the see−through
reservoir. The level should be between the ”MAX” and
”MIN” lines on the tank.
547
CHASSIS
CHECKING TIRE INFLATION
PRESSURE
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure, tire
size and the combined weight of occupants and
cargo (vehicle capacity weight) are described on the
tire and loading information label.
You should check the tire inflation pressure every two
weeks, or at least once a month. And do not forget the
spare! The inflation pressure for the spare tire should be
420 kPa (4.3 kgf/cm2, 4.2 bar, 60 psi).
The following instructions for checking tire inflation
pressure should be observed:
G63015
The pressure should be checked only when the
tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at
least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than
1.5 km or 1 mile since, you will get an accurate cold
tire inflation pressure reading.
Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance
of the tire can be misleading. Besides, tire inflation
pressures that are even just a few pounds off can
degrade ride and handling.
Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after
driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to
be higher after driving.
Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be located so
that the vehicle is balanced.
548
CHASSIS
Inspection and adjustment procedure
6. Install the tire valve cap.
If a gauge and air pump are not available, have your
vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
G63001
1 Tire valve
2 Tire pressure gauge
1. Remove the tire valve cap.
2. Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge to the tire
valve.
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. Without the
valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage. If the caps have
been lost, have new ones put on as soon as
possible.
Incorrect tire inflation pressure may waste fuel, reduce
the comfort of driving, reduce tire life and make your
vehicle less safe to drive.
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your
Lexus dealer.
3. Read the pressure using the graduations of the
gauge.
4. In case the tire inflation pressure is not within the
prescribed range, insert the compressed air from the
valve. In case of applying too much air, press the center
of the valve and release the air to adjust.
5. After completing the tire inflation pressure
measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the
valve and check for leakage.
549
CHASSIS
CAUTION
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the
following conditions may occur and cause an
accident resulting in death or serious injuries.
Low tire pressure (underinflation):
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
Poor handling
Possibility of blowouts from an overheated tire
Poor sealing of the tire bead
Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
A greater possibility of tire damage from road
hazards
High tire pressure (overinflation):
Poor handling
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
A greater possibility of tire damage from road
hazards
550
CHASSIS
TIRE INFORMATION
Tire symbols (Standard and run−flat tire)
G63006
The illustration indicates typical tire symbols.
551
CHASSIS
1
Tire size: For details, see “Tire size” on page
555.
2
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN): For
details, see “DOT and Tire Identification Number
(TIN)” on page 555.
3
4
552
Tire ply composition and materials : Plies
mean a layer of rubber−coated parallel cords.
Cords mean the strands forming the plies in the
tire.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure: For details, see “Checking and
replacing tires” on page 563.
5
Uniform tire quality grading For details, see
“Uniform tire quality grading” on page 557.
6
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure: This
means the pressure to which a tire may be
inflated. For recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, see “Specifications” on page 546.
7
“TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE”: A tubeless tire
does not have a tube inside the tire and air is
directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a
tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air
pressure.
8
Radial tires or bias−ply tires : A radial tire has
“RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked with
“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.
9
Run−flat tire (RFT) or standard tire: This
vehicle can be equipped with either run−flat tires
(RFT) or standard tires. A “RFT” or “DSST” mark
is molded on the sidewall of the run−flat tire. For
details, see “Run−flat tires” on page 561.
10
Location of tread wear indicators: For details,
see “Checking and replacing tires” on page 563.
11
Summer tire or all season tire: An all season
tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. The tire not
marked with “M+S” is a summer tire. For details,
see “Types of tires” on page 562.
CHASSIS
Tire symbols (Compact spare tire)
G63007
The illustration indicates typical tire symbols.
553
CHASSIS
554
1
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”: A compact spare
tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY
USE ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is
designed for temporary emergency use only. For
details, see “Compact spare tire” on page 477.
8
“TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE”: A tubeless tire
does not have a tube inside the tire and air is
directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a
tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air
pressure.
2
Tire size: For details, see “Tire size” on page
555.
9
3
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN): For
details, see “DOT and Tire Identification Number
(TIN)” on page 555.
Radial tires or bias−ply tires : A radial tire has
“RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked with
“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.
4
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure: For details, see “Checking and
replacing tires” on page 563.
5
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure: This
means the pressure to which a tire may be
inflated. For recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, see “Specifications” on page 540.
6
Tire ply composition and materials : Plies
mean a layer of rubber−coated parallel cords.
Cords mean the strands forming the plies in the
tire.
7
Location of tread wear indicators: For details,
see “Checking and replacing tires” on page 563.
CHASSIS
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire size
63SA11a
The illustration indicates typical DOT and Tire
Identification Number (TIN)
1 “DOT” symbol
2 Tire Identification Number (TIN)
3 Tire manufacturer’s identification mark
4 Tire size code
5 Manufacturer’s optional tire type code
(3 or 4 letters)
6 Manufacturing week
7 Manufacturing year
63ca01a
The illustrations indicate typical tire sizes.
Tire use (P=Passenger car, T=Temporary use)
Section width (in millimeters)
Aspect ratio (tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R=Radial, D=Diagonal)
5 Wheel diameter (in inches)
6 Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
7 Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)
1
2
3
4
The “DOT” symbol certifies that the tire conforms to
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
555
CHASSIS
Name of each section of tire
G63005
63sa14
1 Section width
2 Tire height
3 Wheel diameter
556
1 Bead
2 Sidewall
3 Shoulder
4 Tread
5 Belt
6 Inner liner
7 Reinforcing rubber
8 Carcass
9 Rim lines
10 Bead wires
11 Chafer
CHASSIS
Uniform tire quality grading
This information has been prepared in accordance
with regulations issued by the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department
of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or
prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with
information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions
you may have as you read this information.
DOT quality grades − All passenger vehicle tires
must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades. Quality grades can be
found where applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature
A
Treadwear − The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and a half (1 − 1/2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C − The traction grades, from highest
to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and
does not include cornering (turning) traction.
Temperature A, B, C − The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade
C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
557
CHASSIS
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term
558
Meaning
Cold tire inflation
pressure
tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or more, or it
has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile under that condition
Maximum inflation
pressure
the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it is shown
on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation
pressure
cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Accessory weight
the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as
factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)
Curb weight
the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
the sum of —
(a) curb weight;
(b) accessory weight;
(c) vehicle capacity weight; and
(d) production options weight
CHASSIS
Tire related term
Meaning
Normal occupant weight
68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of
Table 1 that follows
Production options weight
the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over
2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride
levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s
designated seating capacity
Intended outboard
sidewall
(a) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than
the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Occupant distribution
distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1 that
follows
Rim
a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
nominal diameter of the bead seat
559
CHASSIS
Tire related term
Meaning
Rim size designation
rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code
Rim width
nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle maximum load on
the tire
the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on
the tire
the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight
(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two
Weather side
the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire
Table 1 – Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity,
Number of occupants
560
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a normally
loaded vehicle
2 through 4
2
2 in front
5 through 10
3
2 in front, 1 in second seat
CHASSIS
RUN−FLAT TIRES
This vehicle can be equipped with either run−flat
tires (RFT) or standard tires. You may continue
driving on the vehicle with run−flat tires even if any
tire goes flat. It may be able to run for a maximum
of 160 km (100 miles) at a speed below 90 km/h (55
mph) after the tire pressure warning light comes on.
When you drive your vehicle after the tire pressure
warning light comes on, the tire must be replaced.
Do not use the repaired tire.
Run−flat tires characteristics:
The vehicle with run−flat tires helps you to continue
driving for up to 160 km (100 miles) at the moderate
speed and do not ever exceed 90 km/h (55 mph) even
with a flat tire. After such usage, the tire must be
replaced. If you are not sure, consult your Lexus dealer.
If you have a flat tire, decrease the speed and drive at
lower speed to reduce the extent to which the tire is
damaged.
However, in some conditions (such as at high
temperatures), you could not continue driving for up to
160 km (100 miles).
The use of non−genuine wheels may prohibit optimum
performance.
G63004
The run−flat tires equipped on this vehicle are ones
dedicated for GS430/300. Do not use them on another
model.
Do not mix run−flat tires with standard tires.
A “RFT” or “DSST” mark is molded on the sidewall of the
run−flat tire.
If you cannot distinguish between the standard tire and
run−flat tire, consult Lexus dealer.
If you have a flat tire, you have to take a different action
depending on whether the tires are standard tires or
run−flat tires.
The tire warranty book covers the detailed information
on run−flat tires. For details, see the tire warranty book.
Tire pressure warning system
The tire pressure warning system is equipped to warn
you of the low tire inflation pressure. For details, see
“Tire pressure warning system” on page 440.
561
CHASSIS
TYPES OF TIRES
Determine what kind of tires your vehicle is originally
equipped with.
1. Summer tires
Summer tires are high−speed capability tires best suited
to highway driving under dry conditions.
Since summer tires do not have the same traction
performance as snow tires, summer tires are
inadequate for driving on snow−covered or icy roads.
For driving on snow−covered or icy roads, we
recommend using snow tires. If installing snow tires, be
sure to replace all four tires.
2. All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction
in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter
conditions, as well as for use all year round.
All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose
snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and
handling performance compared with summer tires in
highway driving.
562
CAUTION
Do not mix summer and all season tires on your
vehicle as this can cause dangerous handling
characteristics, resulting in loss of control.
Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s
designated tires, and never mix tires or wheels
of the sizes different from the originals as this
could result in loss of control and could cause
death or serious injury.
CHASSIS
ROTATING TIRES
Before storing radial, snow or studded tires, mark the
direction of rotation and be sure to install them in the
same direction when using them again. Tires should be
stored in a cool dry place.
CHECKING AND REPLACING TIRES
G63008
To equalize tire wear and help extend tire life, Lexus
recommends that you rotate your tires according to
the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled
maintenance information, please refer to the
“Owner ’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled
Maintenance”.) However, the most appropriate
timing for tire rotation may vary according to your
driving habits and road surface conditions.
The wheel assemblies must be rotated as illustrated
above.
When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and
damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect
tire inflation pressure, improper wheel alignment,
out−of−balance wheels, or severe braking.
When to replace your tires
G63003
1 New tread 2 Tread wear indicator
3 Worn tread
Replace the tires when the tread wear indicators
show. The location of tread wear indicators is
shown by the ”TWI” or ”Δ” marks, etc., molded on
the sidewall of each tire.
563
CHASSIS
The tires on your Lexus have built−in tread wear
indicators to help you know when the tires need
replacement. When the tread depth wears to 1.6 mm
(0.06 in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If you can
see the indicators in two or more adjacent grooves, the
tire should be replaced.
Vehicles equipped with 245/40R18 93Y or
P245/40R18 93V tires: Your Lexus has been fitted with
specially developed tires which provide exceptional
dynamic performance under general road conditions.
However your riding comfort may worsen a little and
road noise may increase during driving. You may also
notice that your tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip
performance will be reduced on the snowy and/or icy
roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to have
snow tires or tire chains on the snowy and/or icy roads
and drive carefully with the speed appropriate for road
conditions.
NOTICE
Low profile tire like 245/40R18 93Y or P245/40R18
93V may have greater damage than usual tires to
its tire wheel when receiving impact from the road
surface. Therefore, pay attention to the following.
Be sure to use with proper tire inflation
pressure. If the tire inflation pressure is low, the
tire may have greater damage. For detailed
information about tire inflation pressure, see
page 542.
Avoid driving onto high, sharp−edged objects
and other road hazards. Failure to do so can
lead to severe tire damage.
564
CHASSIS
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost if the tread
wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.).
If you have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks
deep enough to expose the fabric, or bulges
indicating internal damage, the tire should be
replaced.
If a tire often goes flat or cannot be properly repaired due
to the size or location of a cut or other damage, it should
be replaced. If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus
dealer.
If air loss occurs while driving, do not continue driving.
Driving even a short distance can damage a tire beyond
repair.
Any tires which are over 6 years old must be
checked by a qualified technician even if damage is
not obvious.
NOTICE
When you purchase new tires, consult your
Lexus dealer. If you change from run−flat tires
to standard tires, a spare tire should also be
equipped.
When the tires must be repaired or replaced,
have them repaired or replaced by your Lexus
dealer or an authorized tire dealer. The tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters will
be affected by the installation or removal of
tires.
When the tires must be replaced, replace the
grommets for tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters as well.
Tires deteriorate with age even if they have never or
seldom been used.
This applies also to the spare tire and tires stored for
future use.
565
CHASSIS
Tire selection
When replacing a tire, use a tire of the same size and
construction, and the same or greater maximum
load as the originally installed tires. Also, all the
tires must be the same brand and have the same
tread patterns.
Using any other size or type of tire may seriously affect
handling, ride, speedometer/odometer calibration,
ground clearance, and clearance between the body and
tires or snow chains.
Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is
greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle,
whichever is greater. As for the maximum load of the
tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for
the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the
Certification Label. For details about the Certification
Label and sidewall of the tire, see pages 508 and 551.
566
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an
accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Do not mix radial, bias belted, or bias−ply tires
on your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in loss of
control.
Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s
recommended size, as this may cause
dangerous handling characteristics resulting in
loss of control.
CHASSIS
INSTALLING SNOW TIRES AND
CHAINS
When to use snow tires or chains
Snow tires or chains are recommended when driving on
snow or ice.
On wet or dry roads, conventional or radial tires provide better
traction than snow or studded tires.
Snow tire selection
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size,
construction and load capacity as the originally installed
tires. Also, all the tires must be the same brand and have
the same tread patterns.
Do not use tires other than stated above. Since your vehicle
has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires
without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions.
Snow tire installation
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.
Installing snow tires on the rear wheels only can lead to an
excessive difference in road grip capability between the front
and rear tires which could cause loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION
Do not drive with the snow tires incorrectly inflated.
Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph) with any type of
snow tires.
Tire chain selection
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary
according to location or type of road. Always check local
regulations before installing chains.
Use SAE Class ”S” type radial tire chains, with the exception
of radial cable chains or V−bar type chains.
CAUTION
Observe the following instruction. Otherwise, an
accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Do not use snow tires other than the manufacturer’s
recommended size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
567
CHASSIS
Chain installation
Install the chains on the rear tires as tightly as possible.
Do not use tire chains on the front tires. Retighten chains
after driving 0.5 − 1.0 km (1/4 − 1/2 mile).
When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the
instructions of the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION
Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or the chain
manufacturer’s
recommended
speed
limit,
whichever is lower.
Drive carefully avoiding bumps, holes, and sharp
turns, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.
Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheel braking, as use of
chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.
When driving with chains installed, be sure to drive
carefully. Slow down before entering curves to avoid
losing control of the vehicle. Otherwise an accident
may occur.
568
NOTICE
When the snow tires must be repaired or replaced,
have them repaired or replaced by Lexus dealer or
authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters will be affected by the
installation or removal of snow tires.
When the snow tires must be replaced, replace the
grommets for tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters as well.
Do not attempt to use a tire chain on the compact
spare tire, as it may result in damage to the vehicle as
well as the tire.
If the chains are installed, the tire pressure warning
system may not operate properly. See “Tire pressure
warning system” on page 440.
CHASSIS
REPLACING WHEELS
When replacing the tiers and wheels, be sure to install tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters. ID codes on the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters are registered on the
tire pressure warning ECU. When replacing a tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID
code of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. Have the
ID code registered by your Lexus dealer.
If the ID code is not registered, the system will not work
properly. After about 1 hour, the tire pressure warning light
blinks to indicate a system malfunction.
When to replace your wheels
If you have wheel damage such as bending, cracks or
heavy corrosion, the wheel should be replaced.
If you fail to replace a damaged wheel, the tire may slip off the
wheel or cause loss of handling control.
Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they
may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage
and could fail without warning. Also, bent wheels which have
been straightened may have hidden structural damage and
therefore should not be used. Never use an inner tube in a
leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
NOTICE
When the tires or tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must be replaced, have them replaced by
your Lexus dealer. The tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters will be affected by the installation or
removal of tires.
569
CHASSIS
Wheel selection
ALUMINUM WHEEL PRECAUTIONS
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure
that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity,
diameter, rim width, and offset.
When installing aluminum wheels, check that the wheel
nuts are tight after driving your vehicle the first 1600 km
(1000 miles).
Correct replacement wheels are available at your Lexus
dealer.
If you have rotated, repaired, or changed your tires, check
that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000
miles).
A wheel of a different size or type may adversely affect
handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrench designed for your
aluminum wheels.
CAUTION
When balancing your wheels, use only Lexus balance
weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer.
Observe the following instruction. Otherwise, an
accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
As with any wheel, periodically check your aluminum
wheels for damage. If damaged, replace immediately.
Do not use wheels other than the manufacturer’s
recommended size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
570
When using tire chains, be careful not to damage the
aluminum wheels.
CHASSIS
SUSPENSION AND CHASSIS
CAUTION
Do not modify the suspension/chassis with lift kits,
spacers, springs, etc. It can cause dangerous handling
characteristics, resulting in loss of control.
571
CHASSIS
572
SECTION
6–4
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical components
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing the blade type fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the cartridge type fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the headlight aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
574
581
584
584
587
589
589
594
573
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
SPECIFICATIONS
− FUSES
− FUSE LOCATION
G64002
Right side kick panel
G64001
G64003
Left side kick panel
1
2
3
4
574
Engine compartment
Left side kick panel
Right side kick panel
Engine compartment 5 Trunk
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
g64004
Engine compartment
G64006
Engine compartment (GS300)
G64005
Engine compartment (GS430)
G64007
Trunk
575
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
1
STR LOCK
25
Steering lock system
12
13
2
SECURITY
7.5
Smart access system with
push−button start
3
TI &TE
20
Power tilt and telescopic
steering wheel, Multiplex
communication system
4
AM1
7.5
Starting system
5
STOP SW
7.5
Stop/tail lights, Multi−port fuel
injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system,
Starting system, Electronic
control brake system, Vehicle
stability control system, Shift
lock system
6
OBD
7.5
On−board diagnosis system
7
FR P/SEAT
RH
30
Power seat system
Adaptive variable suspension
system
8
AIR SUS
20
9
PWR
OUTLET
15
10
CIG
15
Cigarette lighter
7.5
Multiplex communication
system, Smart access system
with push−button start, Rear
view monitor system, Audio
system, Air conditioning system
11
576
CIRCUIT
ACC
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
IGN
10
Multi−port fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system, SRS airbag
system, Stop/tail lights,
Steering lock system, Electronic
control brake system
GAUGE
7.5
Gauges and meters
14
ECU−IG
RH
10
Power tilt and telescopic
steering wheel, Multiplex
communication system, Smart
access system with
push−button start, Audio
system, Air conditioning
system, Shift lock system, Tire
pressure warning system,
Combination switch
15
FR S/HTR
RH
15
Seat heater, Heated and
ventilated seats
16
RH−IG
7.5
Seat heater switches, Front
right door control system, Rear
right door control system,
Capacitor, Combination switch,
Seat belt pretensioners,
Intuitive parking assist
17
AM2
15
Starting system
Power outlet
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
18
FUSE
FR DOOR
RH
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
20
Front right door control system
(Power door lock system,
Power rear view mirror control
system, Door courtesy light,
Outside rear view mirror heater,
Power window), Multiplex
communication system
20
Rear right door control system
(Power door lock system, Door
courtesy light, Power window)
20
Rear left door control system
(Power door lock system, Door
courtesy light, Power window)
FR DOOR
LH
20
Front left door control system
(Power door lock system,
Power rear view mirror control
system, Door courtesy light,
Outside rear view mirror heater,
Power window)
22
RAD NO.3
10
Audio system
23
H−LP LVL
7.5
Adaptive front lighting system
(AFS), Automatic headlight
leveling control system
19
RR DOOR
RH
20
RR DOOR
LH
21
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
24
LH−IG
10
Charging system, Headlight
cleaners, Exhaust gas sensor,
Rear window defogger, Electric
cooling fans, Rear left door
control system, Front left door
control system, Emergency
flashers, Automatic
transmission, Seat belt
pretensioners, Intuitive parking
assist
25
FR WIP
30
Windshield wipers and washer
26
PANEL
7.5
Steering switch illumination,
Audio system, Glove box light,
Automatic transmission selector
lever illumination, Console box
light, Adaptive variable
suspension switch illumination,
Cigarette lighter illumination, Air
conditioning system, Traction
control off switch illumination,
Driving pattern selector switch,
Seat heater or Heated and
ventilated seat switches,
Register ILL RH, Register ILL
LH, Register ILL CTR
27
FUEL
OPEN
10
Fuel filler door opener, Trunk lid
opener
577
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
28
578
FUSE
ECU−IG LH
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
10
Vehicle stability control system,
Electronic control brake system,
Yaw rate and G sensor,
Steering sensor, Cruise control
system, Dynamic radar cruise
control system, Electronic
power steering system, Variable
gear ratio steering system,
Rear view monitor system,
Four−wheel drive system, Front
controller, Moon roof, Rain
sensor
29
FR S/HTR
LH
15
30
FR P/SEAT
LH
30
31
A/C
7.5
Air conditioning system
32
TV
7.5
Audio system, Air conditioning
system, Rear view monitor
system
33
TRK OPN
10
Trunk lid opener
34
LH−B
10
Theft deterrent system
35
S/ROOF
25
Moon roof
36
ECU−B
10
Variable gear ratio steering
system, Electronic power
steering system, Driver’s seat
switch module
37
ABS
MAIN3
10
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
38
TURN−HAZ
15
Turn signal lights, Emergency
flashers
39
IG2 MAIN
20
“IG2”, “GAUGE” and “IGN”
40
RAD NO.2
30
Audio system
41
D/C CUT
20
“DOME “ and “MPX−B”
42
RAD NO.1
30
Audio system
10
Multiplex communication
system, Front controller, Door
control system (Power door
lock system, Door courtesy
lights, Power windows, Power
rear view mirror control system,
Outside rear view mirror
heaters), Power seat system,
Steering sensors, Electronic
control brake system, Power tilt
and telescopic steering system,
Gauges and meters,
Combination switch
Foot lights, Vanity lights,
Gauges and meters, Steering
spot light, Steering switch
illumination, Rear personal
lights, Automatic transmission
selector lever spot light, Front
personal lights
Seat heater, Heated and
ventilated seats
Power seat system
Electronic control brake system
43
MPX−B
44
DOME
10
45
ABS
MAIN2
10
46
ABS
MOTOR
30
CIRCUIT
Electronic control brake system
Anti−lock brake system
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
47
ABS
MAIN1
10
48
E/G−B
60
“FR CTRL BATT”, “ETCS” and
“ALT−S”
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
58
RR J/B
80
“STOP LP R”, “STOP LP L”,
“RR−B”, “RR TAIL”, “RR FOG”,
“RR−IG1”, “PSB”, and “RR
S/SHADE”
59
GLW PLG1
50
Glow plug heater
Capacitor
49
ABS1
50
Vehicle stability control system,
“ABS MAIN1”, “ABS MAIN2”
and “ABS MTR”
50
RH J/B−B
30
“AM2”, “DOOR FR” and “DOOR
RR”
51
VGRS
40
52
MAIN
53
60
RH J/B−AM
80
“AM1”, “OBD”, “STOP SW”, “TI
&TE”, “PWR OUTLET”, “FR
P/SEAT RH”, “STR LOCK”,
“ECU−IG RH”, “RH−IG”, “ACC”,
“CIG”, “SECURITY”, “FR
S/HTR RH”, and “AIR SUS”
Variable gear ratio steering
system
61
ABS2
30
Vehicle stability control system,
Anti−lock brake system
30
“H−LP R LWR” and “H−LP L
LWR”
62
DEFOG
50
Rear window defogger, Noise
filter
STARTER
30
Starting system
63
FAN1
40
Electric cooling fans
54
LH J/B−B
30
“FL DOOR”, “RL DOOR” and
“RAD No.3”
64
HEATER
50
Air conditioning system
GLW PLG2
50
Glow plug heater
P/I−B
60
Multi−port fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
65
55
66
E/G−AM
60
“H−LMP CLN”, “FR CTRL−AM”
and “A/C COMP”
67
LH J/
B−AM
80
“S/ROOF”, “FR P/SEAT LH”,
“TV”, “FR S/HTR LH”, “ECU−IG
LH”, “FR WIP”, “H−LP LVL”,
“LH−IG”, “FUEL OPEN”, “A/C”,
“PANEL”, and “LH−B”
68
FAN2
60
No circuit
69
FR
CTRL−B
25
56
57
EPS
ALT
80
150
Electronic power steering
system
“RH J/B−AM”, “LH J/B−AM”,
“E/G−AM”, “RR JB”, “HEATER”,
“DEFOG”, “FAN1”, “FAN2”,
“ABS2”, “ABS MOTOR”, “ABS
MAIN1”, and “ABS MAIN2”
“H−LP UPR” and “HORN”
579
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
580
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
70
A/F
15
Multi−port fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
83
EFI
Multi−port fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
71
ETCS
10
Multi−port fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
GS430:
20
GS300:
25
84
INJ
20
Multi−port fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
72
ALT−S
7.5
Charging system
73
EM VLV
10
No circuit
85
H−LP UPR
15
Headlights (high beam)
74
H−LP CLN
30
Headlight cleaner system
86
HORN
10
Horn
75
A/C COMP
7.5
Air conditioning system
87
WASHER
20
Windshield wipers and washer
76
DEICER
25
No circuit
88
FR TAIL
10
Parking lights, Side marker
lights
77
FR
CTRL−AM
30
“FR TAIL”, “FR FOG” and
“WASHER”
89
FR FOG
15
Front fog lights
78
IG2
10
Starting system
90
RR
S/SHADE
7.5
79
EFI NO.2
10
Multi−port fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system, Evaporative
system
91
PSB
30
Pre−collision system
92
RR−IG2
10
No circuit
93
RR−IG1
10
Pre−collision system, Rear
electric sunshade, Seat belt
pretensioners
94
RR−B
10
Luggage compartment light,
Noise filter
95
RR FOG
7.5
Rear fog lights
96
STOP LP L
10
Stoplights, Back up lights
80
H−LP R
LWR
15
81
H−LP L
LWR
15
82
F/PMP
25
Right−hand headlight (low
beam)
Left−hand headlight (low beam)
Fuel pump
Rear electric sunshade
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
97
STOP LP R
10
High mounted stoplights
98
RR TAIL
10
License plate lights, Tail lights,
Rear side marker lights
CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION
Precautions
CAUTION
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
The battery produces flammable and explosive
hydrogen gas.
Do not cause a spark by contacting the battery
terminals with tools.
Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
The electrolyte contains poisonous and corrosive
sulfuric acid.
Avoid contact with eyes, skin or clothes.
Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
Wear protective safety glasses when working near
the battery.
Keep children away from the battery.
EMERGENCY MEASURES
If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with
clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate
medical attention. If possible, continue to apply
water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the
medical office.
581
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel a pain or burn, get medical
attention immediately.
Checking battery exterior
If electrolyte gets on your clothes, there is a
possibility of its soaking through to your skin, so
immediately take off the exposed clothing and follow
the procedure above, if necessary.
G64008
If you accidentally swallow electrolyte, drink a large
quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of
magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Then go
immediately for emergency help.
1 Terminals
2 Hold−down clamp
Check the battery for corroded or loose connections,
cracks, or loose hold−down clamps.
1. If the battery is corroded, wash it off with a solution of warm
water and baking soda. Coat the terminals with grease to
prevent further corrosion.
2. If the connections are loose, tighten the clamp bolts − but do
not overtighten.
3. Tighten the hold−down clamp only enough to keep the
battery firmly in place. Overtightening may damage the battery
case.
582
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
NOTICE
Make sure the engine and all accessories are turned
off before performing maintenance.
Checking battery condition
Checking by indicator
When checking the battery, remove the ground cable
first and reinstall it last.
Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools.
G64009
Take care no solution gets into the battery when
washing it.
If the battery is disconnected or run down
The following functions may not operate correctly when you
reconnect or replace the battery. In these cases, you should
normalize each system referring to the following pages.
Check the battery condition by the indicator color.
Power windows (See page 61.)
1
BLUE − Good condition.
Moon roof (See page 138.)
2
WHITE − Charging necessary. Have the battery checked
by your Lexus dealer.
3
RED − Have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer.
Variable gear ratio steering system (See page 431.)
Intuitive parking assist (See page 387.)
NOTICE
Do not refill the battery with water.
583
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
BATTERY RECHARGING
PRECAUTIONS
CHECKING AND REPLACING THE
BLADE TYPE FUSES
During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen
gas.
Therefore, before recharging:
1. If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be
sure to disconnect the ground cable.
2. Make sure the power switch on the recharger is off when
connecting the charger cables to the battery and when
disconnecting them.
CAUTION
Always charge the battery in an unconfined area. Do
not charge the battery in a garage or closed room
where there is not sufficient ventilation.
Only do a slow charge (5 A or less). Charging at a
quicker rate is dangerous. The battery may explode
causing personal injuries.
G64010
Left side kick panel
G64011
NOTICE
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running.
Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.
Right side kick panel
584
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
G64012
Engine compartment
G64014
Trunk
1. Turn the engine switch off and open the fuse box lid.
Determine which fuse may be causing the problem. The lid of
the fuse box shows the name of the circuit for each fuse.
G64013
Engine compartment
1 Pull−out tool 2 Spare fuses
585
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
64L013
2. Make sure the inoperative component is turned off. Pull
the suspected fuse straight out with the pull−out tool and
check it. If it has blown, push a new fuse into the clips.
64G008a
Good
Blown
a. Look carefully at the fuse. If the thin wire is broken, the fuse
has blown. If you are not sure or if it is too dark to see, try
replacing the suspected fuse with one of the same value that
you know is good.
b. Install only a fuse with the amperage rating designated on
the fuse box lid.
If you do not have a spare fuse, in an emergency you can pull
out the ”CIG”, ”RAD NO.1” or ”OBD” fuse, which may be
dispensable for normal driving, and use it if its amperage rating
is the same.
If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one lower
than, but as close to the amperage as possible. If the
amperage is lower than that specified, the fuse might blow out
again but this does not indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get
the correct fuse as soon as possible and return the substitute
to its original clips.
586
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
It is a good idea to purchase a set of spare fuses and keep them
in your vehicle for emergencies.
If the new fuse immediately blows out, there is a problem with
the electrical system. Have your Lexus dealer correct it as
soon as possible.
CHECKING THE CARTRIDGE TYPE
FUSES
CAUTION
Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any
other object, in place of a fuse. This may cause
extensive damage and possibly a fire.
G64015
Engine compartment
587
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
NOTICE
Before replacing the fuses, have the cause of electrical
overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer.
64g104
Good
Blown
If the headlights or other electrical components do not
work and the blade type fuses are O.K., check the
cartridge type fuses. If any of the cartridge type fuses are
blown, they must be replaced.
If there is an overload in the circuits from the battery, the fuses
are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is
damaged.
CAUTION
Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent for
replacement. Never install an ordinary wire − even for
a temporary fix. This may cause extensive damage and
possibly a fire.
588
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
ADDING WASHER FLUID
CHECKING THE HEADLIGHT AIM
G64020
If the washer tank becomes nearly empty, add washer
fluid.
You may use plain water as washer fluid. However, in cold
areas where temperatures range below the freezing point, use
washer fluid containing antifreeze. This product is available at
your Lexus dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the
manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix with water.
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute
because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
1 Beam angle gauge
(horizontal movement for high beam)
2 Beam angle gauge
(vertical movement for high beam)
3 Beam angle gauge
(vertical movement for low beam)
4 Beam angle gauge
(horizontal movement for low beam)
Before checking the headlight aim:
1. Be sure that the body around the headlight is not deformed.
2. Park the vehicle on a level spot.
3. The driver gets into the driver’s seat and puts the vehicle in
a state readying for a driving (with a full tank).
4. Bounce the vehicle several times.
589
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Adjusting the headlight aiming (low beam)
G64022
G64021
1 Bubble
1 Adjusting bolt A
2 Adjusting bolt B
2 Acceptable range
Vertical movement gauge: The bubble of the gauge should
not deviate from the center of the gauge by more than 2 marks
to either side of the gauge.
If the bubble is out of the acceptable range of the beam angle
gauge, adjust it using bolt A and B.
590
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
G64023
1. Turn the bolt A in either direction using a Phillips−head
screwdriver. At this time, keep the turning direction and
number of turns in mind.
G64024
2. Turn the bolt B the same number of turns and in the same
direction as step 1 using a Phillips−head screwdriver.
If you do not know or cannot find the original position, or if you
feel that there is a large deviation, take the vehicle to your
Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim.
After adjusting the headlight in the vertical direction, check that
the light has been shifted from the adjusted position in the
horizontal direction.
591
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Adjusting the headlight aiming (high beam)
G64026
G64025
1 Bubble
1 Adjusting bolt A
2 Adjusting bolt B
2 Acceptable range
Vertical movement gauge: The bubble of the gauge should
not deviate from the center of the gauge by more than 2 marks
to either side of the gauge.
If the bubble is out of the acceptable range of the beam angle
gauge, adjust it using bolt A.
592
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
G64027
Turn the bolt A in either direction using a Phillips−head
screwdriver.
64G084
1 Red line
2 Acceptable range
Horizontal movement gauge: The red line should not
deviate by more than 2 blue lines to either side of the gauge.
If the red line is out of the acceptable range of the beam angle
gauge, adjust it using bolt B.
593
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
REPLACING LIGHT BULBS
G64028
Turn the bolt B in either direction using a Phillips−head
screwdriver.
If you do not know or cannot find the original position, or if you
feel that there is a large deviation, take the vehicle to your
Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim.
The illustrations on the following pages show the locations of
light bulbs. If it is necessary to replace a bulb, take your vehicle
to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Use bulbs with the
bulb numbers and wattage ratings given in the table.
The tail lights, stop lights, high mounted stoplight and rear side
marker light consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs
burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the
light replaced.
If two or more LEDs in a stoplight burn out, your vehicle may
not conform to local laws (SAE).
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, do not replace the light
bulbs while they are hot.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
require special handling. They can burst or shatter if
scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb only by its plastic
or metal case. Do not touch the glass part of a bulb
with bare hands.
Do not touch the (High−intensity discharge
headlight’s) high voltage socket when the headlights
are turned on. An extremely high voltage of 20,000 V
will be discharged and could result in serious injury
or death by electric shock.
594
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam
headlight bulbs, connectors, power supply circuits,
or related components. Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death. Call your Lexus dealer for headlights repair or servicing, including
replacement of bulbs and bulb disposal.
LIGHT LOCATION
G64017
NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.
The inside of the lens of exterior lights such as headlights may
temporarily fog up when the lens becomes wet in the rain or in
a car wash. This is not a problem because the fogging is
caused by the temperature difference between the outside and
inside of the lens, just like the windshield fogs up in the rain.
However, if there is a large drop of water on the inside of the
lens, or if there is water pooled inside the light, contact your
Lexus dealer.
Light Bulbs
Bulb No.
W
Type
1
Headlight (High beam)
HB3
60
A
2
Parking light
−−−
5
D
3
Front turn signal light
−−−
21
E
4
Headlight (Low beam)
D4S
35
B
5
Front side marker light
194
5
D
6
Fog light
HB4
51
C
595
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
G64018
Light Bulbs
596
G64019
Bulb No.
W
Type
Light Bulbs
Bulb No.
W
Type
1
High mounted stoplight
−−−
3.6
G
1
Front interior lights
−−−
0.1
G
2
Tail light
−−−
0.9/0.5
G
2
Front seat spot lights
−−−
0.1
G
3
Tail/stop light
−−−
0.9/10.8
G
3
Vanity lights
−−−
8
D
4
Trunk light
−−−
5
F
4
Rear seat spot lights
−−−
0.2
G
5
Rear side marker light
−−−
0.5
G
5
Door courtesy lights
−−−
0.2
G
6
Rear turn signal light
−−−
21
E
6
Foot lights
−−−
0.2
G
7
Back−up light
921
16
D
7
Glove box light
−−−
0.2
G
8
License plate light
−−−
0.85
G
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
HB3 halogen bulbs
D4S discharge bulbs
HB4 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (clear)
Wedge base bulbs (amber)
Double end bulbs
LEDs (Light−emitting Diodes)
597
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
598
SECTION
6–5
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Body
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing and waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
600
601
602
604
599
BODY
SPECIFICATIONS
− DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
Overall length
4825 mm (189.9 in.)
Overall width
1820 mm (71.6 in.)
Overall height
Two−wheel drive models
Four−wheel drive models
1425 mm (56.1 in.)*
1435 mm (56.4 in.)*
Wheelbase
2850 mm (112.2 in.)
Tread
1535 mm (60.4 in.)
1540 mm (60.6 in.)
– Front
– Rear
Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + luggage)
370 kg (815 lb.)
*Unladen vehicle
− FUEL TANK
Capacity
600
71 L (18.7 gal., 15.6 lmp.gal.)
BODY
PROTECTING YOUR VEHICLE
FROM CORROSION
Proper care of your Lexus can help ensure long−term
corrosion prevention.
The most common causes of corrosion to your vehicle
are:
The accumulation of road salt, dirt and moisture in
hard−to−reach areas under the vehicle.
Chipping of paint or undercoating caused by minor
accidents or by stones and gravel.
The following conditions will cause or accelerate
corrosion of your vehicle, so it is important to keep your
vehicle, particularly the underside, as clean as possible
and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings
as soon as possible.
The presence of road salt or dust control chemicals, salt in
the air near the sea coast, industrial air pollution.
High humidity, especially at temperatures just above
freezing point.
Certain parts of your vehicle are wet or damp for an
extended period of time, even though other parts of the
vehicle are dry.
To help prevent corrosion on your Lexus, follow these
guidelines:
Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing. In addition,
observe the following points.
If you drive on salted roads in the winter or if you live near
the ocean, you should hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month to minimize corrosion.
High pressure water or steam is effective for cleaning the
vehicle’s underside and wheel housings. Pay particular
attention to these areas as it is difficult to see all the mud and
dirt. It will do more harm than good to simply wet the mud
and debris without removing them. The lower edge of
doors, rocker panels and frame members have drain holes
which should not be allowed to clog with dirt as trapped
water in these areas can cause corrosion.
Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter
is over.
See ”Washing and waxing” on page 602 for more tips.
Check the condition of your vehicle’s paint and trim. If you
find any chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up
immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or
scratches have gone through the bare metal, have a qualified
body shop make the repair.
Components of the vehicle which do not dry quickly due to
lack of proper ventilation are exposed to high ambient
temperature.
601
BODY
Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can
accumulate under the floor mats and could cause corrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is
dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals,
cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc. These should be transported in
proper containers. If a spill or leak should occur, immediately
clean and dry the area.
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated garage or a roofed
place. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in the garage, or
if you drive it covered with water or snow, your garage may be
so damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your garage is heated,
a wet vehicle can corrode if the ventilation is poor.
WASHING AND WAXING
Washing your Lexus
Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing.
The following cases may cause weakness to the paint or
corrosion to the body and parts. Wash your vehicle as soon
as possible.
When driving in a coastal area
When driving on a road sprinkled with antifreeze
When exposed to coal tar, tree sap, bird droppings and
carcass of an insect
When driving in areas where there is a lot of smoke, soot,
dust, iron dust or chemical substances
When the vehicle becomes remarkably dirty with dust and
mud
Hand−washing your Lexus
Work in the shade and wait until the vehicle body is not
warm to the touch.
CAUTION
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite
hot. When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch
the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot
exhaust pipe can cause burns.
602
BODY
1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road
salt from the underside of the vehicle or the wheel wells.
Road tar: Remove with turpentine or cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces.
2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap, mixed according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and keep
it wet by dipping it frequently into the wash water. Do not rub
hard − let the soap and water remove the dirt.
3. Rinse thoroughly − dried soap can cause streaking. In hot
weather you may need to rinse each section right after you
wash it.
Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−pressure car wash,
for example) at or near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler door
opened. If the water enters the air vent, you may experience
trouble with refueling or rough engine idling.
Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic wheel ornaments are
damaged easily by organic substances. If any organic
substances splash an ornament, be sure to wash them off with
water and check if the ornament is damaged.
Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent.
Plastic bumpers and side moldings: Wash carefully. Do not
scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper and side molding
faces are soft.
Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not use organic
substances or scrub them with a hard brush. This may
damage the surfaces of the lights.
4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle using a clean soft
cotton towel. Do not rub or press hard − you might scratch the
paint.
NOTICE
Do not use organic substances (gasoline, kerosene,
benzine or strong solvents), which may be toxic or
cause damage.
Do not scrub any part of the vehicle with a hard brush,
which may cause damage.
Automatic car wash
Your vehicle may be washed in an automatic car wash, but
remember that the paint can be scratched by some types of
brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the washing process
itself. Scratching reduces paint durability and gloss, especially
on darker colors. The manager of the car wash should be able
to advise you whether the process is safe for the paint on your
vehicle.
603
BODY
Waxing your Lexus
Polishing and waxing is recommended to maintain the
original beauty of your Lexus’ finish.
Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle surface does not repel
water well.
1. Always wash and dry the vehicle surface before you begin
waxing, even if you are using a combined cleaner and wax.
2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If the finish has become
extremely weathered, use a car−cleaning polish, followed by
a separate wax. Carefully follow the manufacturer ’s
instructions and precautions. Be sure to polish and wax the
chrome trim as well as the paint.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
CAUTION
Be careful not to splash water or spill liquid on the
floor. This may prevent the SRS side airbags from
activating correctly, resulting in serious injury.
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water, or allow
water to get onto the floor when cleaning the vehicle
interior or exterior. Water may get into audio
components or other electrical components above or
under the floor carpet (or mat) and cause a
malfunction; and it may cause body corrosion.
3. Wax the vehicle again when water does not bead but
remains on the surface in large patches.
Leather−trimmed interior
Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses. If you accidentally put
wax on the light surfaces, wipe or wash it off.
The selected leather is used in your Lexus. Due to
characteristics of leather products, some parts of leather may
be rough, uneven or scratched originally.
To keep good appearance, we recommend you to clean it
periodically twice a year.
Remove dirt on the leather in the following ways:
1. Wipe it off lightly using a soft cloth (e.g. gauze) dampened
with 5% solution of neutral detergent for wool.
2. Wring water from a clean cloth and thoroughly wipe off all
traces of detergent with it.
3. Wipe off the surface of the leather with a dry soft cloth. Allow
the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area. Excess of wet
may cause the hardening or shrinking of the leather.
604
BODY
NOTICE
Dirt or sand adhered to the leather may damage the
treated surface and cause it to wear earlier. Remove
dirt or sand using a vacuum cleaner.
If a stain should fail to come out with a neutral
detergent, apply a cleaner that does not contain an
organic solvent.
Never use organic substances such as benzine,
alcohol or gasoline, or alkaline or acid solutions for
cleaning the leather as these could cause
discoloring.
Non−leather trim (Dash and sun visors)
The non−leather trim may be easily cleaned with a mild
soap or detergent and water.
First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then,
using a sponge or soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
non−leather trim. After allowing it to soak in for a few minutes
to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt and wipe off the soap with a
clean damp cloth. If all the dirt does not come off, repeat the
procedure. Commercial foaming−type cleaners are also
available which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Use of a nylon brush or synthetic fiber cloth, etc. may
scratch the fine grained surface of the leather.
NOTICE
Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be
especially careful to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your
upholstery always clean.
Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline or window cleaner
on the interior.
Long exposure to direct sunlight may cause the
leather surface to harden and shrink. Keep your
vehicle in a shaded area, especially in the summer.
The interior of your vehicle is apt to heat up on hot
summer days, so avoid placing on the upholstery
items made of vinyl or plastic or containing wax as
these tend to stick to leather when warm.
Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could
result in discoloration or staining.
605
BODY
Carpets, Windows and Seat Belts
Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove as much dirt as
possible. Several types of foam cleaners are available; some
are in aerosol cans and others are powders or liquids which
you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the
carpets, use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in
overlapping circles. Do not apply water − the best results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. Read the
shampoo instructions and follow them closely.
The seat belts may be cleaned with mild soap and water
or with lukewarm water.
Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts
for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
NOTICE
Use a good foam−type shampoo to clean the carpets.
Do not use dye or bleach on the belts − it may weaken
them.
Do not use the belts until they become dry.
The windows may be cleaned with any household
window cleaner.
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.
606
Air Conditioning Control Panel, Audio
System, Instrument Panel, Console Panel,
and Switches
Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly
wipe off any dirt.
NOTICE
Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene,
alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or
peeling of the surface.
If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure
their ingredients do not include the substances
mentioned above.
If you use a liquid car freshener, do not spill the liquid
onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain
the ingredients mentioned above. Immediately clean
any spill using the method mentioned above.
If you have any questions about the cleaning of your
Lexus, your local Lexus dealer will be pleased to answer
them.
SECTION
7
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
FOR U.S. OWNERS
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
607
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S. OWNERS
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
FOR U.S. OWNERS
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,
Inc. (Toll−free: 1−800−25−LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,
Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
Safety Hotline toll−free at 1−800−424−9393 (or
366−0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
608
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement